Home

Acer 4730 Laptop User Manual

1. 0 WHV1V OLINOO XH S T3A31 X10 SNLYLS T3A31 AILON NOLLWHNDISANOO M2v8dOO1 snivis CHI NOLLWHNDIANOO LINN INHV1V SNLVLS ONId33 3Sn0OH J13HS SNLYLS 2500 AHOLSIH IHNOO 96 180 014 2500 SNLYLS XNW esa AHVININQS OIHNOO 1HOd VIHIS ALINNOAS 3ALLOV 3IALL 31VG QLL WALSAS uasn OIHNOO 0 SNLYLS J13HS 39NVIWHO H3d 3ONVN3LNIVIA WALSAS NOILVYNSISNOD WALSAS NOILVULSINIINQV WALSAS LINN SNLVLS Figure 1 1 Soneplex Broadband V5 Craft Interface Menu Tree 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Page 1 2 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 1 Introduction A logon is required to gain access to the Craft Interface The logon remains active until either the operator logs off or a user selectable period of keyboard inactivity is exceeded The default time out period is 30 minutes Passwords are
2. 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 V 6182 B DS3 MUX RTAU UNITS MODULE Figure 521 1 DLX Module Locations Table 521 1 051 Signal Routing SIGNAL SLOT SIGNAL SLOT SIGNAL SLOT SIGNAL SLOT NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER Pe qos ee Lu p s 2 11 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 522 Page 1 of 2 DLX OR RLX EQUIPPED CIRCUIT END TO END TESTS Summary This procedure provides instructions for performing end to end system tests on Soneplex circuits equipped with DLX or RLX plug ins Two telephone technicians may be required to perform this test one at the near end and one at the far end of the system The installation must be complete and the equipment operating properly before performing this test 2 72 Warning To prevent electric shock and or equipment damage disable span power at the RLX module before performing this test At the chassis identify the DLX or RLX pair that corresponds to the DS1 circuit to be tested Reference DLP 532 DLX Configuration Reference DLP 533 RLXIOR Configuration Reference DLP 534 RLX Configuration At the chassis connect 053 test set with DS1 opt
3. Press CONTROL A for assistance 6675 A Figure 542 1 Active Alarms Screen Sample LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 DS1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 DS1 6 FEND HLXC HLXR FEND DS1 LOOP 2 LOOP 2 DS1 5 TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER LE IL LLLALILLLLILLLLLLLLLLLLIIIIIILILLLILLLLLO LZZULLE gt KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites FEND means ESF PRM information collected at the opposite ends of spans from the affected circuit and returned to the system via the ESF Datalink both at local and remote sites The framing format must be ESF in order for FEND information to be displayed Note For Site 1 FEND information is at A for Site 2 FEND information is at B 10263 A Figure 542 2 T1 HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations 2 147 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 542 Page 3 of 4 CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 NEND FEND LOOP 1 LOOP 1 HLXC HLXR LOOP2 LOOP2 NEND FEND TO NETWORK MUX CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 TO CUSTOMER 4 4 4 gt 4 68665 KEY NEND means at the HLXC looking toward the customer HLXR FEND means at the HLXR looking toward the ne
4. 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 44 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 MPU 8025 A Figure 502 1 Soneplex Broadband Chassis Front View Mounting Slot for MPU Figure 502 2 MPU Front Panel 2 31 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 503 Page 1 of 1 APU INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides guidelines for installing and testing the APU A Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used An ESD grounding post is located on the chassis for connecting the ESD wrist band Ensure that all modules removed from the equipment or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat 1 Remove the APU from protective packaging 2 Push the APU into slot marked APU located in the upper right corner of the chassis 3 Use screw to secure the APU to chassis 4 If PWR indicator is not lighted at all check for power at the A and B connections on the backplane Reference DLP 508 48 VDC Power Supply Test 5 If there is power at both of the connections remove and replace the APU with new one 6 Press the LMPTST switch to verify that a
5. SPECIFICATIONS STREAKER INSTALLATION AND TESTING SYSTEM COMPONENTS INSPECTION SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT PROVISIONING PROCEDURES SYSTEM TID DATE TIME SETTING 4 TAU INSTALLATION AND TESTING ipii TBOS CHASSIS DAISY CHAINING TBOS INTERFACE DESCRIPTION lt co casae mmm mme mmm TRANSACTION LANGUAGE 1 TL1 INTERFACE 5 USER ACCOUNT EDITING 0 VERSION HLXC VOLTAGE TO HLXR TEST VERSION D OR LATER HLXC VOLTAGE TO HLXR 5 X 25 PORT CONFIGURATION 2 5 4 IGICUR E SIGUE GER EGER SECTION 3 GENERAL INFORMATION oar O N Page viii 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc WARRANTUSOFIWABE 2424529339449 x RR ERA 2 6444 hd REPAIR ADVANCE REPLACEMENT POLICY REPAIR CHARGES dur 99 43293 33 9 T3 thii kerik REPLACEMENT SPARE PRODUCTS RETURNED MATERIAL CUSTOMER INFORMATION AND 55 5
6. 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 MPU LEON 1982 A GROUP NUMBERS Figure 523 1 Slot Numbers 2 74 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 523 Page 2 of 2 EMXWMXP 2 5 _ 7 2322202 pue S Oe ape M E pleri EE poer M pe cu OBS T O5 S Andi Figure 523 2 Assignment Record Form 2 15 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 524 Page 1 of 5 RLXIOR INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for installing the Repeater Loop Extender Intelligent Office Repeater RLXIOR module in the chassis A typical deployment consists of an RLXIOR module installed in a chassis that is connected to a repeater or a series of line repeaters There is no protection for this signal and an MPU must be installed to enable configuration and alarm reporting for this module The installation procedure consists of unpacking the RLXIOR setting two configuration switches installing the RLXIOR in the chassis and verifying that
7. RU OR DLP 562 AND HRX STATUS DISPLAY 4444444444 RE RE T DLP 548 HIGOCONFIBUBEHON RH OY Qo He ong DLP 531 HLX LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION DLP 573 HLXC AND HLXR END TO END 5 5 DLP 520 HLXC AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES NTP 009 HLXC INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 516 7 DLP 540 LOCAL CRAFT INTERFACE CONNECTION 5 00 TAP 103 LOCAL CRAFT INTERFACE CONNECTION DLP 504 continued Page vi 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface TABLE OF CONTENTS Tonet SECTION 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE continued LOOPBACK PROCESS DESCRIPTION TAD 102 LOOPBACK STATUS COMMANDS DLP 541 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY TAD 100 MAINTENANCE 5 NTP 005 MENU SECURITY EDITING DLP 536 MODULE INSTALLATI
8. TAP 102 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS RETRIEVAL DLP 565 BESEDLED TEST COMMANDS Rods I Cs dodo dira DLP 538 BER ALARM LEVEL 0 DLP 518 OR RLXIOR AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST 5 NTP 011 ALX CONFIGURATION ice cs etc robos s n xo caps dcc dca c c id DLP 534 RLX INSTALLATION AND TESTING 42 dade dees DLP 525 RLX AND RLXIOR STATUS DISPLAY DLP 509 OR RLXIOR TO REPEATER VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TEST DLP 567 RLX EQUIPPED CIRCUIT CROSS CONNECTS DLP 569 RLXIOR CONFIGURATION DLP 533 RLXIOR INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 524 RTAU INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 517 RATAU OPERATION DLP 570 SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION 2222 DLP 549 SHELF HOUSEKEEPING ALARM 5 DLP 550 continued Page vii 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface TABLE OF CONTENTS Content SECTION 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE continued SHELF STATUS DISPLAY
9. 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 V 6183 B DS3 MUX RTAU UNITS MODULE Figure 525 4 RLX Module Locations Table 525 1 051 Signal Routing DS1 GROUP 051 GROUP 1 GROUP 051 GROUP SIGNAL SLOT SIGNAL SLOT SIGNAL SLOT SIGNAL SLOT NUMBER z 5 2 2 RM M E 32 s o 2 85 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 525 Page 6 of 6 INITIAL START UP TEST AND STAND ALONE OPERATION Following insertion into the mounting shelf the STATUS LED will initially turn red to indicate the start of self test diagnostics While self test diagnostics are in progress all LEDs will turn yellow and then remain on until self test diagnostics are completed Following the successful completion of self test diagnostics the front panel LEDs will appear as follows STATUS Green to indicate that self test diagnostics were successfully completed LPBK Off NET LOS Red to indicate that the network DS1 signal is not being received by the RLX LINE LOS Red to indicate that the line DS1 signal is not being received by the RLX Figure 525 5 RLX Initial Start Up Test 2 86 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc LOSW LOS LINE C3 LINE 9 9 TL 1 A2 RLX Version B RLX 7392 B ADCP 61 471 Issue
10. DLP 550 SUEEFSTASUS RICE RR e DLP 545 SPECIFICATIONS 4 122243 9 oped aed eee eee pace OR E TAD 101 STREAKER INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 571 SYSTEM COMPONENTS DLP 500 SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT PROVISIONING 5 NTP 004 SYSTEM TID DATE TIME DLP 528 TAU INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 574 TAU PPP X SR T DLP 575 TBOS CHASSIS DAISY CHAINING DLP 576 TBOS INTERFACE DESCRIPTION TAD 104 TRANSACTION LANGUAGE 1 TL1 INTERFACE DESCRIPTION TAD 105 USER ACCOUNT DLP 535 VERSION HLXC VOLTAGE TO HLXR 5 DLP 568 VERSION D OR LATER HLXC VOLTAGE TO HLXR TEST DLP 572 2 0 CONFIGURATION PPP rr DLP 558 2 3 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc
11. Re qr GU E AES een TAD 104 Transaction Language 1 Interface DescripllOU gt e o TAD 105 Version G ALAG Voltage to HEAR 1091 ua anus kdo eee ER ee eed OA OR DLP 568 Version Dior Latch BEXC VOLO EO ALAR DLP 572 00 DLP 564 PROCEDURES NTP 006 Active Altis DEDIN de bua dba dos b dox os dod obs dos ood e od o obo dod sod Xo alo Ea abo db obo d a DLP 542 Alarm History Clearance DLP 527 4 4 4 4 acetal REOR RR RACER ORE ERROR KR RE wd DLP 544 PIM e DLP 543 MPU VERSION 5 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES NTP 007 Loca erant Den GOL DLP 504 Graft Interface System LOGON iua ERRARE ORE DLP 526 MPU Software Download Command 2 4 eed ROS DLP 551 dcr ucc Me TTC TTTT E DLP 564 MPU CONFIGURATION DATA SAVE AND TRANSFER PROCEDURES NTP 008 Local Craft Interface 0066000 22 2 2 RR RR
12. Page DLP 545 TAD 101 DLP 571 DLP 500 NTP 004 DLP 528 DLP 574 DLP 575 DLP 576 TAD 104 TAD 105 DLP 535 DLP 568 DLP 572 DLP 558 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual describes how to operate and maintain the ADC Soneplex Broadband system V5 which is a DS1 based multiplexer with an interface that is compatible with 3 networks It is specifically designed for use as a hub to distribute DS1 HiCap circuits for local access For a complete description of the Soneplex Broadband system refer to Soneplex Description Design and Application manual listed under Related Publications in this section RELATED PUBLICATIONS Listed below are related manuals and their publication numbers Copies of these publications can be ordered by contacting the ADC Technical Assistance Center at 1 800 366 3891 in U S A or Canada or 612 946 3000 extension 3223 outside U S A and Canada DS1 Fiber Loop Converter One Position Wall Mount Cabinet User Manual 61 122 053 Soneplex Remote Control System Description Manual V5 1 or later 61 490 DS3 Soneplex Remote Control System Installation Manual V5 1 or later 61 489 DS3 Soneplex Remote Control System Operation Manual V5 1 or later 61 488 Fiber Loop Converter FLC Installation Operation and Maintenance Quick Reference Guide 61 124 Fiber Loop Converter Model 4 Position Universal Wall Mount Cabinet User Manual 61 120 Fiber Loop
13. NTP 010 DEX CONFIGURATION DLP 532 DLX INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 521 DLX OR RLX EQUIPPED CIRCUIT END TO END 5 5 DLP 522 DLA STATUS pede ORE CRX DLP 553 51 PM CONFIGURATION 1 22520025 Re Lac DLP 556 continued 2 1 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance ALPHABETICAL TASK LIST continued DSS MUX ALARM LEVEL SETTING 24 DLP 560 0 MUS APOTE pec PP DLP 512 DS3 MUX DLP 529 083 MUX FORCED SWITGH TEST 2424 ee ae ee DLP 511 DS3 MUX INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 505 DSS MUX STATUS DISPLAY uuu qo Ed ded V AA DLP 546 DUAL REPEATER INCOMPATIBILITY 515 TAP 104 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR AND ADAPTER CLEANING AND MATING INSTRUCTIONS DLP 507 FORCE APS COMMANDS DLP 537 HDSL PM CONFIGURATION oo ewe aoa 9
14. 10387 A Note The default setting is strapped Figure 576 1 Berg Jumper Configuration on MPU for TBOS Linking CHASSIS 1 CHASSIS 4 10392 A Figure 576 2 Daisy Chaining Chassis for TBOS Linking 2 245 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance 2 246 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 100 Page 1 of 2 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY Summary Soneplex maintenance philosophy is built on the collection of system information through inspection of the Soneplex modules themselves and through software interfaces Central office near end alarms are displayed on the modules in the chassis Remote far end alarms are displayed on the corresponding near end modules by pressing the DISP RMT switch on the APU Alarm information is also gathered through a software interface such as Craft TL1 or TBOS Trouble Analysis Procedures Trouble analysis procedures found in this document involve replacing faulty modules and obtaining alarm and status reports Status and alarm reports are then analyzed to determine proper system operation and locate trouble Module Failures APU DLX DS3 MUX HLXC MPU ODS2 and RLX module failures are identified by status indicators and reported by system alarms The first step in analyzing a module failure is to look for a r
15. NEND FEND TO NETWORK CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 TO CUSTOMER 60 0 KEY NEND means at the HLXC looking toward the customer HLXR FEND means at the HLXR looking toward the network HLXC CRP1 means at the central office side of the HRX1 looking toward the network HRX2 HLXR RRP1 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX1 looking toward the customer HLXC CRP2 means at the central office side of the HRX2 looking toward the network HLXR RRP2 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX2 looking toward the customer HRX1 HLXC CRP1 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 1 1 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 2 TL1 CRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 3 TL1 RRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 4 TL1 NOTE CRP2 and RRP2 are not present when there is no HRX2 11375 A Note NEND and FEND are not reported in HLX HRX Status screens Figure 548 5 HDSL HLXC HLXR CRP and RRP Locations MPU V5 2 With Two HRXs 2 164 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 549 Page 1 of 3 SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for changing serial port configurations on the chassis to match the communications device parameters Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view
16. DLP 527 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY 50220 22 22022 DLP 544 ALARM SUMMARY DISPLAY DLP 543 ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING TAP 101 ALARM EVENT NOTIFICATION LEVEL SETTING DLP 552 continued Page 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface TABLE OF CONTENTS Tonet Page SECTION 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE continued ALARMS PROGEDURES ote EROR AC OR HC OR eon NTP 006 APU INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 503 ASSIGNMENT 0805 DLP 523 CHASSIS INSPECTION boo bebo bobo b db dob bbb obs DLP 501 CIRCUITID DISPLAY 2 22 RE ht dn DLP 566 CONFIGURATION DATA DOWNLOAD DLP 555 CONFIGURATION DATA UPLOAD COMMAND DLP 554 CRAFT INTERFACE SYSTEM LOGOFF DLP 564 CRAFT INTERFACE SYSTEM LOGON loueur x GHI REX ux REG RR Rx RR s DLP 526 DEX ALARM LEVEL SETTING 2 2 RR RR 444 4444444 DLP 563 DLX AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES N
17. 5 NTP 002 agb dog iE capire En DLP 559 MPU CONFIGURATION DATA SAVE AND TRANSFER PROCEDURES NTP 008 MPU INSTALLATION AND TESTING iiie hao 09319913 3949323300338 DLP 502 MPU REPLACEMENT AND TESTING 84 84 DLP 519 MPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMAND DLP 551 MPU VERSION 5 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES NTP 007 ODS2 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND QFLC QLX CHASSIS END TO END TESTS DLP 510 0052 MODULE ALARM LEVEL SETTING DLP 561 0052 MODULE AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES NTP 003 0052 MODULE APS TEST 2 2 mk om mmn RR DLP 514 0052 MODULE CONFIGURATION DLP 530 ODS2 MODULE FORCED SWITCH TEST THROUGH THE CRAFT INTERFACE DLP 513 0052 MODULE INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 506 0052 MODULE STATUS DISPLAY DLP 547 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTING 5 TAD 103 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS 5 TAP 102 PERFORMANCE MONITORI
18. DLP 570 Page 18 of 18 EQUIPMENT E FACILITY F EQUIPMENT E FACILITY F NETWORK CUSTOMER NETWORK CUSTOMER gt A B B CIRCUIT CIRCUIT UNDER TEST UNDER TEST LOOPF LOOPE SIGNAL SIGNAL QRS PRESENCE PRESENCE 5 DETECTOR DETECTOR 11872 B Figure 570 14 LOOPF and LOOPE RTAU CONFIG EQUIPMENT SETUP Current User CRAFT Test Circuit 1 2 Line Code INTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR SETUP Pattern Type Frame Format Loop Code BIT ERROR SETUP Error Count Error Rate Error Locn Test Timeout Measurement START WAITING ON SYNC In Minutes Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14867 A Figure 570 15 RTAU Configuration Screen Starting a Measurement 2 228 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 571 Page 1 of 2 STREAKER INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for installation and testing of the Streaker module Note For a detailed description of Streaker STK module use refer to Soneplex Streaker Module Installation Instructions listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual Caution Because of the height of the battery holders use care when sliding the module into the chassis To prevent damage to the Streaker module or adjacent modules insert the card straight into the chassis guides without bending or forcing the module into position
19. modules 8 watts each for a total of 28 watts Table 101 4 Broadband Power Characteristics with C1 HLXC HLXR NO OF C1 HLXCS MAX POWER MAX POWER MAX CURRENT DRAIN CONFIGURATION IN CHASSIS CONSUMPTION DISSIPATION AT 48 VDC sioe 0 with DS1 Simplex Disabled Note Power characteristics for fully configured chassis include common equipment APU 7 5 watts MPU 5 watts and two DS3 MUX modules 8 watts each for a total of 28 watts Local Powered B1 HLXR Span Powered B1 1 28 2 watts 12 4 watts 587 mA HLXR with DS1 Simplex Enabled 2 255 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 8 of 9 Table 101 5 Broadband Power Characteristics Version D and later HLXCs HLXR OF HRXS IN OF HLXCS IN MAX POWER CONFIGURATION SYSTEM CHASSIS CONSUMPTION Span Power ON 10 5 watts DS1 simplex disabled D2A D4 D4A D4B Version E HLXRs 322 watts 1 21 5 watts 28 630 watts 2 Version 1 25 5 watts E HLXR only 28 742 watts 19 0 watts MAX POWER MAX CURRENT DRAIN DISSIPATION AT 48 VDC 6 5 watts 219 mA 8 5 watts 448 mA 266 watts 13 1 amps 8 5 watts 531 mA 266 watts 15 4 amps 71 5 watts 396 mA Span Power ON DS1 simplex enabled D1 D2 D2A SP D3 D3A D3B HLXRs 1 28 1 28 1 28 560 watts 238 watts 11 7 amps 1 1 28 0 watts 9 5 watts 583 mA 28 Span Power ON 1 L
20. Note When 3 1 through 4 2 MPU software is loaded to a Version 5 system the database is converted automatically Parameters in Version 5 that are not in the previous version are left at default 1 Use the arrow keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return The System Maintenance menu is shown in Figure 555 1 2 At the System Maintenance menu select Upload Download Commands Press Enter or Return The Upload Download Commands menu is shown in Figure 555 2 3 Use the arrow keys to select Execute Configuration Data Download from the Upload Download Commands menu Press Enter or Return The following message appears across the lower part of the screen Preparing To Download Configuration Data To MPU Are You Sure y n 4 Start the Configuration Data Download process by pressing Y for yes or cancel download by pressing N for no 5 On the host computer start the program sequence that will transfer the data Note Files must be transferred using the XMODEM protocol 6 Enter the name of the file that contains the MPU configuration data and start the file transfer Note This transfer will take several minutes During the transfer some nonsense characters may appear at the top of your screen but this is normal 2 178 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 555 Page 2 of 2 7 After a download is finishe
21. 2 96 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 530 Page 2 of 3 ODS2 CONFIGURATION Group 3 Unit Equip State EQUIPPED T2 Service State IS Unit Service State IS BER Alarm Thresh 1E 8 Unit Protect State UNPROTECTED BER Switch Thresh 1E 6 Td Service Line PARAMETERS Provision State Code Circuit ID Tl 1 Tl 42 Tl 43 Tl 4 1 Remote Pulse Remote Remote PPS PARAMETERS Equalization Frame Format Threshold T1 41 T1 2 T1 3 T1 4 Remote Housekeeping Working Card HSKP1 RMT HSKP1 HSKP2 RMT HSKP2 Protect Card HSKP1 N A HSKP2 N A Press CONTROL A For Assistance 8110 C Figure 530 1 0052 Configuration Screen Table 530 1 0052 Configuration Fields Group Toggle 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 7 Specifies the module s group number designated on the chassis Unit Equipment Toggle Equipped Establishes communication with MPU Module UNEQUIPPED State must be set to EQUIPPED before remaining selections are allowed Sets all other fields to default values and allows MPU to process equipment alarms UNEQUIPPED No communication with MPU Unit Service State Toggle IS In Service Places the unit in service and allows equipment alarm reporting by the MPU Must be set to IS for reporting of equipment alarms OOS Out Of Service Removes unit from service and stops equipment alarm reporting by the MPU Unit Protect State PROTE
22. et 8 Se PM ROR CR CN A e COR OR Nd 14 87 Pop Up 0000822 esos ae a ee ened He es eee OR GORYORO EO EO OR EO EO 14 eon bibat 14 EMY A dad 1 5 A USINGATOP DOCUMENT ad edad decade 1 5 1 GENERAL This section provides instructions on how to use the Craft Interface and how to use a document arranged in the Task Oriented Practice TOP format Information in this manual is divided into sections as listed below Section 1 Introduction this section provides instructions on how to use the Craft Interface and how to use a TOP document Section 2 Operation and Maintenance contains NTPs DLPs TAPs and TADs for installation operation and maintenance of the Soneplex Broadband System Section 3 General Information located at the back of this manual provides information about warranty repair and support services 2 USING THE CRAFT INTERFACE After the initial installation of a Soneplex Broadband system most testing and local operations are conducted with the Craft Interface through a VT 100 compatible terminal This terminal is connected either to the front panel of the MPU plug in module or through a port located on the rear of the Soneplex Broadband chassis Both of these connecting points provide a standard 232 interface When you are configuring the Soneplex Broadband system moni
23. 02133 JT 1 7 0 minutes Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6126 C Figure 532 1 DLX Configuration Screen Table 532 1 DLX Configuration Fields FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Group Toggle 1 2 3 4 5 6 0r 7 Specifies the module s group 1 number designated on the chassis Slot Toggle 1 2 3 or 4 Specifies the module s slot number 1 designated on the chassis Refer to TAD 106 Access Identifier Unit Equip State Toggle Equipped Establishes communication with UNEQUIPPED MPU Module must be set to EQUIPPED before remaining selections are allowed Unequipped No communication with MPU Unit Service State Toggle 15 In Service OOS Out Of Service Places the unit in service This field OOS must be set to IS for reporting of equipment alarms Removes unit from service and stops equipment alarm reporting by the MPU continued 2 107 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 532 Page 3 of 3 Table 533 1 DLX Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT 0 Provision Brings up default settings and allows configuration changes Toggle YES Prevents configuration settings Service State Toggle Leave this field at OOS at this time to avoid undesirable reporting of alarms Place the circuit In Service after complete the remaining configurations Line C
24. ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance 2 4 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance IXL 001 Page 1 of 4 TASK INDEX LIST Find Your Job in the List Below Then Go To MODULE INSTALLATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES NTP 002 System Components InspactiDl iss e se tee eee obe SCR E UR UR RE EROR ER da eR E dee de DLP 500 DOSE ch cay sez Rk ty AAAA EAA AAE TA SAALE AAN AAA NAAA etiology Hondo DLP 501 18 Power Supply Tosi DLP 508 and TOSIN 3 65 5 DLP 502 MPU Replacement and TESI bobo ba eb ebbe DLP 519 APU Installation and TESNO cs 22 ua 33003 9030 330 4030 3 3054003 9 3 3 33 9 3 3 b ea DLP 503 DS3 MUX Installation and Testing GENERE NOE AGE NUS GE COS IGI RO DLP 505 SE oo oae abs ok brat a doses ior dob dd DLP 516 HLXG and gt 0 amp 22 22 24 DLP 520 DEX Installation POSUIT uaa oae e 2 23 62 306 19 3 06 2 3 4 3062 062 306 46 DLP 521 DLX or RLX Equipped Circuit End To End 5 DLP 522 BEX Tristallaton DLP 525 BLXIOR Installation and Testing ss ue toe DLP 524 ONS2 Mod
25. HDSL PERFORMANCE MONITORING CONFIGURATION Group 6 Circuit 1 Circuit ID 15 MINUTE MONTYPE EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT CVs PER SES Press CONTROL A For Assistance CONTROL C To Clear All PM Counts 6147 B Figure 557 1 HDSL PM Configuration Screen Typical 2 184 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 557 Page 3 of 3 Table 557 1 HDSL Threshold Crossing Default and Range Values PATH THRESHOLDS ALL LOCATIONS 15 MINUTE 15 MINUTE DAILY DAILY VALID MON TYPE DEFAULT VALID RANGE DEFAULT RANGE 6 NI S m i i Note refer to TAP 102 for Mon Type descriptions 2 185 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 558 Page 1 of 3 X 25 PORT CONFIGURATION Summary Use this procedure to set several parameters that must be set before using the X 25 interface Table 558 1 Table 558 2 and Table 558 3 outline the X 25 interface parameters and detailed technical specifications that are supported by the Soneplex Broadband system Data Link Layer LAPB Parameters The Soneplex Broadband system data link layer uses the standard Link Access Procedure Balanced LAPB protocol Parameters supported set values configurable options and defaults are shown in Table 558 1 Network Layer X 25 Packet Parameters The Soneplex Broadband system now supports thr
26. L4 2 RMT ALARM L6 2 RMT ALARM 2 216 HSKP 6 3 RMT ALM L1 3 LCL ALARM L3 3 LCL ALARM L5 3 LCL ALARM L2 3 RMT ALARM L6 3 RMT ALARM HSKP 6 4 RMT ALM L1 4 LCL ALARM L3 4 LCL ALARM L5 4 LCL ALARM L2 4 RMT ALARM L4 4 RMT ALARM L6 4 RMT ALARM HSKP 7 1 RMT ALM L4 1 LCL ALARM L7 1 RMT ALARM HSKP 7 2 RMT ALM L2 2 LCL ALARM L6 2 LCL ALARM L1 2 RMT ALARM L3 2 RMT ALARM L5 2 RMT ALARM HSKP 7 3 RMT ALM L2 3 LCL ALARM L6 3 LCL ALARM L1 3 RMT ALARM L3 3 RMT ALARM L5 3 RMT ALARM Figure 104 6 Compressed Scan Display 2 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc HSKP 7 4 RMT ALM L2 4 LCL ALARM L6 4 LCL ALARM L1 4 RMT ALARM L3 4 RMT ALARM L5 4 RMT ALARM L4 1 RMT ALARM ATT RESERVED 64 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 105 Page 1 of 8 TRANSACTION LANGUAGE 1 TL1 INTERFACE DESCRIPTION Summary This TAD describes the commands used to operate the Soneplex Loop Extender through a terminal using Transaction Language TL1 operations are performed at a local and or remote terminal using an EIA 232 interface For additional information on TL1 commands refer to the Soneplex TL1 Interface Specification Manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual for more information Note TL1 interface is case insensitive All input commands are
27. Reference DLP 552 Alarm Event Notification Level Setting 5 Move to the External Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR EVENT or NOT RPTD for each field that you wish to change Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting 6 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure 2 189 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 559 Page 2 of 2 MPU ALARM LEVELS Equipment Shelf Alarms CRITICAL APU FAIL MAJOR External Alarms Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6149 C Figure 559 1 MPU Alarm Levels with Default Settings 2 190 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 560 Page 1 of 2 DS3 MUX ALARM LEVEL SETTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for setting DS3 MUX Alarm Levels Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle
28. TIME OUT DISARM LOOPUP STATE LOOPUP TIME OUT DISABLE LOOPUP NO TIME OUT STATE Figure 102 1 Loopback Operation State Diagram DEACTIVATION 7077 C Inband and ESF data link sequences and time out operations produce the state transitions These sequences and time out values are Arming sequence inband or ESF data link Activation sequence Deactivation sequence Disarming sequence inband or ESF data link Loopup time out Arming time out 2 258 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 102 Page 2 of 5 The inband control code sequences will be recognized either in DS1 framed format SF or ESF framing or in unframed format Table 102 1 contains a summary of loopback time out and control codes Notice that in the Default Code column the inband codes are shown left bit transmitted first and the ESF data link codes are shown with the right bit transmitted first Table 102 1 HDSL Loopback Time Out and Control Default Codes NAME O DEFAULT CODE DETECTION TIME COMMENTS Arming inband 11000 gt 5 seconds The signal is sent inband or over ESF data link HDSL units in disarmed state make the transition Arming ESF 0001 0010 1111 1111 4 repetitions to armed state When the inband arming code is detected the smartjack loopup state activates Activation HLXC 1101 0011 1101 0011 gt 3 seconds The signal is sent
29. DS1 errors at HLXR are reported as T1 1 X X 2 NEND PM and alarms Report measures the actual DS1 performance as received on transmission from CSU H DS1 errors at are reported as 1 1 2 FEND PM and alarms from CSU H via the PRM in the FDL Facility Data Link External CSU at will inject PRM back to reporting DS1 Far End Alarms Errors are accumulated in the transmission of the 1251 from to transmit direction Soneplex T1 Repeater RLX System RLX CSU NETWORK B OF T1 REPEATER SPAN 2 264 WW 14863 A Figure 103 2 Location of Critical Alarm Points on Soneplex RLX System A External CSU that will inject PRM Performance Report Messages back to B reporting all DS1 Far End Alarms This is due to corrupted data received at A and reported back to B via the PRM in the FDL Facility Data Link RLX DS1 input monitors T1 1 X X 1 NEND PM and alarms Report measures the actual DS1 performance as received on transmission from CSU A OR RLX 51 input monitors T1 1 X X 1 FEND and alarms from CSU A via the PRM in the FDL Facility Data Link RLX DS1 input monitors T1 1 X X 2 NEND PM and alarms This report measures the actual DS1 performance as received on transmit from CSU H 51 input monitors T1 1 X X 2 FEND PM and alarms from CSU via the PRM in the FDL Facility Data Link External CSU 81 H will inject PRM back to G reporting 1251
30. Note For X 25 Port configuration see DLP 558 2 167 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 550 Page 1 of 2 SHELF HOUSEKEEPING ALARM LABELS Summary Use this selection to assign names to the housekeeping input alarm contacts When a housekeeping alarm door ajar water on floor fire alarm etc occurs the assigned name is displayed in the condition column of the Alarm History and Active Alarms screens These conditions are also displayed in the related TL1 autonomous message Note Edits be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Select Shelf Housekeeping Labels from the System Configuration menu Press Enter or Return She
31. Old New Old New 0 212 2 Z Table 104 1 Dual Repeater Compatibility Indicators Tor T ez omes Toe NO INCOMPATIBILITIES New New 2 0 0 5 4 z New UNDETECTABLE INCOMPATIBILITIES Old New New Old New e e e d New Old Old New o Z Z zZ 5 5 ew e o d ew 2 2 2 INCOMPATIBILITY None None None on on on on ZA zzz None None None None HLXR 2 HLXR HLXR CORRUPTED None None None None None None None None None None None 2ND HRXI IN OLD HRXI IN OLD HRX2 IN 2ND HRXI IN 3RD HRX2 IN Old Old New Old New Old New Undetectable Undetectable Not Shown Not Shown New HLXC refers to the Version E HLXC Old refers to the Version D or earlier HLXC New HRX refers to the Version B HRX Old HRX refers to the Version A HRX HLXR refers to the Version E HLXR Old HLXR refers to the Version D or earlier T Inventory Status screen if the incompatibility is present 2 314 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc The corrupted serial numbers shown in these examples will appear in the Craft Interface s GENERAL INFORMATION ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 3 Genera
32. 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 507 Page 2 of 2 9 On FC connectors push the connector into the adapter and screw the threaded cap clockwise onto the adapter to complete the connection 10 Connect SC connector by aligning the housing key with the slot in the adapter Push the connector into the adapter until a click is heard felt indicating that the latching system is engaged When connector is fully engaged the white stripes on the sides of the connector housing should be hidden inside the adapter Stop You have completed this procedure 2 43 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 508 Page 1 of 1 48 VDC POWER SUPPLY TEST Summary This procedure provides instructions for testing the voltage at the power terminal block located on the Soneplex Broadband chassis backplane The multimeter should indicate between 42 5 VDC and 56 5 VDC 1 2 10 Obtain multimeter capable of measuring 40 to 60 volts DC Are fuses installed at the fuse and alarm panel If No continue to Step 3 If Yes continue to Step 4 Install 48 VDC fuses in both A and B fuse holders Are any of the fuses open or blown If No continue to Step 8 If Yes continue to Step 5 Replace blown fuse or fuses Did fuse blow again Yes continue to St
33. Both 1544 cannot be set at the same time If single errors or a burst of errors is desired set the Error Count field to the number of errors to insert If the Error Count field is set the number of errors will be transmitted each time the Enter key is pressed E 6 1 7 set the Error Rate field which indicates the rate bit or frame errors are injected Error Locn Toggle N A PAYLOAD FBE Error Counts Display None Data only Error Counts Display None BPV only Error Counts Display None Frame only Error Counts Display None CRC only Error Rate Toggle OFF 1E 3 Select either Error Count or Error Rate for bit error setup Both 1 4 5 cannot be set at the same time If a steady error rate is desired OVERVIEW The Error Location field must be set to either PAYLOAD or FBE if the count or rate field is set Pressing the Enter or Return key will cause the RTAU to send the errors Indicates count is 0 and rate is off Bit errors are injected Frame Bit Error Frame errors are injected Eight digit counter or blank Eight digit counter or blank Eight digit counter or blank Eight digit counter or blank Eight digit counter or blank Error Counts Display None COFA only Status F Sync Display None only Status P Sync Display None only Status RAI Display None only or blank or blank or blank continued 2 222 2000 ADC Telecomm
34. Cancellation of the current operation and movement of the cursor to the previous menu Cancellation of the current operation and refreshing redrawing of the current screen with the last saved values Cancellation of the current operation and movement of the cursor to the Main Menu 3 7 Pop Up Screens In some areas of the Craft Interface screens pop up presenting error data and information screens to assist you in operating the system The information is displayed in a box that appears in front of the current screen display in reverse image 1 6 light on dark 3 8 Help Screen A help screen is available from all screens Pressing CONTROL A activates the help screen The help screen displays information about moving among the fields and making edits Page 1 4 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 1 Introduction 3 9 Data Entry Table 1 2 shows the different field types in the Craft Interface and how to enter data in them A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar and R key to view and select different options that are described An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Table 1 2 Craft Interface Data Entry FIELD FIELDSTATUS a HIGHLIGHTED FIELD TYPE DESCRIPTION Toggle ms the Toggles forward through fie
35. DSX DTE ESD ESF EV EXT EXZ FCC FE FEND GND HDSL HEMI HiCap HLXC HLXR HRX HS HSP HSW IS IXL KBPS KFT LAPB LE LEC LEC LED LIU LMPTST LOP LOS LOSW LS MBPS MN ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface Digital Facility Maintenance System Detailed Level Procedure TOP term DS1 Loop Extender module BB system only Digital Signal Level 1 Digital Signal Level 2 Digital Signal Level 3 DS3 Multiplexer module Digital Signal Cross Connect Data Terminal Equipment Electrostatic Discharge Extended Super Frame Event External Excessive Zeros Federal Communications Commission Far End Far End Ground High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line High Power HDSL Module High Capacity HDSL Loop Extender Central Office module HDSL Loop Extender Remote module HDSL Repeater High Speed High Speed Protect slot for EC1M module in SONET system only High Speed Working slot for EC1M module in SONET system only In Service Task Index List TOP term Kilobits Per Second Kilo Feet Link Access Procedure Balanced Loop Extender Local Exchange Carrier Loop Extender Chassis Light Emitting Diode Line Interface Unit Lamp Test Loss of Pointer Loss of Signal Loss of Synch Word Low Speed Megabits Per Second Major Minor Page xiii 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 6 MON MPU MUX MXP MXW NE NE NEND NID NMA NRZ NTP OAM
36. Day 3 HH MM SS Hour Minute Second The identification of output consists of the following format M CTAG completion code cr If 1 M Prority to indicate that the output is a response to an input message 2 CTAG Correlation code 3 Completion code Will contain COMPLD to acknowledge the completion of the input command or DENY to indicate that the input command was not executed A Deny response will always include information such as an error code and comments to indicate why the command was not executed 2 219 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 105 Page 4 of 8 The text block contains additional information that is specific to the input command No parameter grouping is allowed in output No null defaults unless specified in response syntax description The end of output is a single character semicolon is used for normal end of output The continuation symbol a greater than sign gt is used on a message to indicate that another associated output message follows When the continuation symbol is used the associated output messages must have the same and the last associated message must have a semicolon Example Standard Error Response Format The following error message format will be used whenever the NE is unable to execute a TL1 command cr If If c SID YY MM DD HH MM SS cr If M
37. ES MM nae dtd ac oh TL DLP 512 Craft Interface System DLP 564 Bosnien 22 2 4 43 4 d did dox dod od did a d EAE d EAE d dE d d DLP 523 RLX OR RLXIOR AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES NTP 011 Lora Grant nik OMNES UI ue use aac 39 3903093 04 gh 399 DLP 504 Craft interface System Logom DLP 526 Histars Clearance GOMMAN DLP 527 System TID Date Time Setting 15s du bee ee eoe DLP 528 Eso nC RT NEU e ud pipere DLP 529 Lus der sara TRENT TT DLP 534 RLX or RLXIOR to Repeater Voltage and Current 5 DLP 567 DLP 533 FOROS AP EO RORIS d eq odo Ebo abd DLP 537 Dos MUX Forced TOSL ausu dad NU DEA DLP 511 cT DLP 512 RLX Equipped Circuit Cross Connects DLP 569 pops bap eso Ea pias ot ae Mok if ap indy psoas ap Sak th te be DLP 564 Bosnien 25 37449342 132 141
38. Ej 5 ER SESL 1544 CVs ER SESP FE Press CONTROL A For Assistance CONTROL C To Clear A11 PM Counts 6146 B Indicates valid range of values for selected field See Table 556 1 Figure 556 1 051 PM Configuration Screen 2 181 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 556 Page 3 of 3 Table 556 1 051 Threshold Crossing Defaults and Range Values 15 MINUTE DAILY DEFAULT DAILY VALID MON TYPE DEFAULT VALID RANGE DAILY DEFAULT RANGE 13340 1 to 1048575 5 5 5 SESL 8 LOSS FCP CVL ESL 4 10 100 10 10 LINE PATH FEND THRESHOLDS 15 MINUTE DAILY DEFAULT DAILY VALID MON TYPE DEFAULT VALID RANGE DAILY DEFAULT RANGE 10 100 UASP FE 1 to 4095 CSS FE 1 to 4095 INTERNAL PARAMETER THRESHOLDS MON TYPE VALID RANGE CVs per SESP FE 320 to 333 Note refer to TAP 102 for Mon Type descriptions 2 182 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 557 Page 1 of 3 HDSL PM CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for assigning thresholds for each HDSL facility in the Soneplex Broadband system You can also view or edit the HDSL Performance Monitoring configuration for each HDSL facility in the Sonepl
39. Equipped MUX PLUS U Unequipped MUX ENHANCED P Protected ODS2 HLX RLX TAU Unit Type DLX T TAU OLX R RTAU X 0 R D Q Control P Jump to previous menu Control T Jump to Main Menu Control R Refresh this current menu Control A Display this help screen Control D Terminate user session logout 14855 A Figure 545 2 Help Screen 2 156 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 546 Page 1 of 2 DS3 MUX STATUS DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying the status of the working and protect Soneplex 053 MUX modules installed in the chassis Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Display Status from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys or number keys to select Display MUX Status from the Display Status menu Figure 546 1 Press Enter or Return A detailed Display Status screen is shown in Figure 546 2 Note DS3 RX Status displays are OK LOS OOF Yellow AIS Idle M13 or C Bit Stop You have completed this procedure DISPLAY STATUS Display Shelf Status Display MUX Status Display ODS2 Status Display QLX Status Display HLX Status Display DLX Status Display RLX Status Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9447 A Figure 546 1 Display Status Menu 2 157 2000 AD
40. Figure 102 5 HDSL Daily Performance Monitoring Report HDSL PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS Circuit 2 Loop 1 Report Type Circuit ID PERIOD SESP SEFSP 06 01 95 Press CONTROL A for Assistance 6656 B Figure 102 6 HDSL Summary Performance Monitoring Report 2 307 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 9 of 11 LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 DS1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 DS1 FEND HLXC HLXR 2 051 Loop 2 LOOP 2 051 lt a TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER LLL LLLI nL gt KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites FEND means ESF PRM information collected at the opposite ends of spans from the affected circuit and returned to the system via the ESF Datalink both at local and remote sites The framing format must be ESF in order for FEND information to be displayed Note For Site 1 FEND information is at A for Site 2 FEND information is at 2 11377 A Figure 102 7 T1 HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 NEND FEND 4 B 5 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 HLXC HLXR LOOP2 LOOP2 EE tee e Be NEND FEND TO NETWORK MUX CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 TO CUSTOMER 1 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL gt KEY NEND means at the HLXC looking t
41. Figure 548 1 HLX Status Screen MPU V5 3 Without an HRX HLX HRX STATUS Circuit ID DS1 Loopback DS1 LOS E YES N A YES DS1 Line Code AMI N A AMI DS1 Frame Format N A N A N A Loop Reversal N A NO NO HSKP1 HSKP2 N A N A NO PWR1 PWR2 N A N A HLXC RRP1 LP2 1 LPI LP2 1 HDSL LP STAT N A N A Reversal NO N A N A N A N A SNR Exceeded NO NO NO NO NO N A N A BER Exceeded NO NO NO NO NO N A N A Pulse Attn 0 0 0 0 0 N A N A SNR margin 425 24 424 425 25 N A N A Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14857 A Note The SNR and PA values are only updated when the HDSL loop is active If the HDSL loop has never been activated the SNR value will be set to 71 and the PA value will be set to 0 Note Figure 548 4 provides a key to the HRX status column headings shown in this figure Figure 548 2 HLX HRX Status Screen MPU V5 3 With HRX 2 162 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 548 Page 4 of 5 HLX HRX STATUS Slot 4 Circuit ID DS1 Loopback 2 INACTIVE INACTIVE INACTIVE DS1 LOS 5 5 5 DS1 Line Code 5 AUTO AMI N A N A AUTO AMI DS1 Frame Format AUTO ESF N A N A AUTO ESF Loop Reversal N A NO NO YES HSKP1 HSKP2 2 PWR1 PWR2 N A N A HDSL IP STAT T R
42. Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 539 Page 1 of 1 ACO ALARM CUT OFF COMMAND Summary This procedure provides instructions for silencing currently active audible alarms Any new alarms will cause the audible alarm relay to be activated again and the ACO state canceled 1 Use the arrow keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Execute ACO Alarm Cut Off from the System Maintenance Menu 3 Press Enter or Return to activate the ACO 4 The following message appears across the screen and is shown in Figure 539 1 ACO Executed Press any key to continue Stop You have completed this procedure SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Force APS Commands Reset LED Test Commands Execute ACO Alarm Cut Off Loopback Status Commands gt Di lt Day Up Press Any Key To Continue xe o 2 0 dH Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6157 A Figure 539 1 ACO Executed Message 2 128 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 540 Page 1 of 1 INVENTORY DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying inventory information for the modules installed in the Soneplex Broadband chassis and modules installed at the remote locations The inventory displayed is current at th
43. Page 1 of 2 MPU INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions on unpacking and installing a new MPU in a non provisioned chassis and then verifying that it is functioning properly A 1 2 30 Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used An ESD grounding post is located on the chassis for connecting the ESD wrist band Ensure that all modules removed from the equipment or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Note When installing a new MPU module use the same DIP switch settings on the MPU s printed circuit board as the 053 MUX s DIP switch settings Keeping both switch settings the same enables communication between the MPU and the DS3 MUX for OAM amp P Note When replacing an MPU in a configured chassis the configuration data from the modules in the chassis is automatically loaded into the new MPU If an MPU from a provisioned chassis is moved to another chassis the chassis unit configurations may not match the MPU unit configurations resulting in alarms and erroneous information Refer to DLP 519 Replace MPU and Verify Stand Alone Operation for more information Open the shipping carton and carefully unpack the MPU from its protective packaging Note DO NOT change an
44. Power D1 D2 D2A SP D3 D3A HLXR only Toggle UNIT SWITCH ENABLED DISABLED Enter for DSO Channel blocking or leave blank for normal operation for each of the 24 DSO channels DSO Channel Versions D E and G Input HLXC Blocked Enter an eight bit programmable code Channel Pattern consisting of 1s and Os Remote Enter up to 8 Housekeeping Labels alphanumeric characters If the system detects a LOS Loss of Signal from the customer an AIS or customer disconnect indication DS1 Idle Code is sent to the network An AIS is sent if UNFRAMED is selected in the T1 Framing Format field A DS1 Idle Code is sent if a framed format Ft SF or ESF is selected in the T1 Framing Format field If the system detects a LOS Loss of Signal from the customer an AIS is sent to the network If the system detects a LOS from the customer the signal is automatically looped back towards the network If the system detects a LOS from the customer the signal is cut off and no pattern is transmitted to the UNIT SWITCH NOT APPL for D2A D4 E4 or G4 HLXR network Defaults to the simplex power hardware configuration setting on the HLXR Refer to the Soneplex Version D and Version E HLXR Remote System Operation and Maintenance Manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual for more information 60 mA constant current is applied to the 1 terminals for powering NIDs
45. Reference DLP 522 DLX or RLX Equipped Circuit End to End Tests Using the DS3 MUX ejectors press the module into the chassis until it is properly seated Verify that the STATUS indicator on the offline DS3 MUX is green and the ONLINE indicator is extinguished Verify that the STATUS indicator on the online DS3 MUX is green and the ONLINE indicator is green If the online DS3 MUX APS LOCKOUT FORCE indicator is on hold the ENABLED button down and momentarily press LMPTST APS to extinguish the APS indicator Slide the online DS3 MUX partly out to cause an APS Verify that the DS3 MUX that was offline is now online its ONLINE indicator is green 2 49 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 512 Page 2 of 2 11 Perform the end to end test and verify error free data Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End to End Tests Reference DLP 520 HLXC HLXR End to End Tests Reference DLP 522 DLX or RLX Equipped Circuit End to End Tests 12 Insert partially removed DS3 MUX back into the chassis until it is properly seated 13 Verify that STATUS indicator on offline DS3 MUX is green and its ONLINE indicator is extinguished Stop You have completed this procedure 2 50 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 513 Page 1 of 2 0052 MOD
46. Summary This procedure provides instructions for performing a software reset and reinitialization or to test the indicators on selected modules Resets and LED Tests cannot be performed at the same time 1 2 126 Note toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields Note Commands can be initiated on more than one module by using the arrow keys to move to each module and pressing the space bar to select each module Use the arrow keys to select System Mainten
47. TAU TBOS TID TL1 TOP TSGR TX VOM WW XCVR XMT ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface Signal to Noise Ratio Synchronous Optical Network Soneplex Status Status Streaker module Switched Virtual Circuit Tip Trouble Analysis Data TOP term Trouble Analysis Procedure TOP term Telecommunications Alarm Surveillance and Control Test Access Unit Telemetry Byte Oriented Serial Target Identifier Transaction Language 1 Task Oriented Process Transport Systems Generic Requirements Transmit Virtual Circuit Volt Ohmmeter Wire Wrap Transceiver Transmit Page xv 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc INTRODUCTION ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 1 Introduction SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Content Page GENERI dedo ee ea da nota d o 1 1 2 USING THE CRAFT INTERFACE iicuoeesce RR RR RR RRRERER RR CREER ERR 1 1 S 0220 boo bed tebe de ede aa dod 1 3 debe 1 3 e BUONO E ART PADS 1 3 8 32 Enterand Return 02 22 2242 4444 44 34 434 4444434 444 4444444 44444 1 3 0 1 Speer EATUR 14 Ja WKO c 14
48. To terminate a test set the Measurement field to STOP Setting the Mode field to DISABLE also stops any measurements in progress and terminates the test 10 To end a test session and restore the tested circuit to normal operation set the Mode field to DISABLE Stop You have completed this procedure RTAU CONFIG EQUIPMENT SETUP Current User CRAFT Test Circuit Line Code INTERNAL Mode SIGNAL GENERATOR SETUP Pattern Type Frame Format Loop Code BIT ERROR SETUP Status Error Count Error Rate Error Locn Test Timeout Measurement In Minutes Press CONTROL A For Assistance Figure 570 4 RTAU Config Screen Showing Defaults for Screen With Line Code Field Set to INTERNAL 2 214 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc 14866 A ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 5 of 18 TEST ACCESS UNIT STATUS COMMANDS Group 1 Drop Direction Insert Direction Status Command TAU Present Status Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14851 A Figure 570 5 Test Access Unit Status Commands Screen 2 215 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 6 of 18 Table 570 1 RTAU Configuration Fields FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT EQUIPMENT SETUP FIELDS Current User Toggle OVERVIEW The Current User field can only be set to NONE or CRAFT from the Craft menu
49. time the notification pop up appears Even with this feature disabled all alarms and events are logged in the alarm database The notification pop up appears and the beep occurs any time an alarm occurs that is as critical or more critical than the level at which it is set 4 Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields Use the a
50. 13 Table 101 1 Alarm Descriptions Conditions continued HLXC ALARMS AID EQPT LIU COMM FAIL HLXC ALARMS AID T1 0 HLXC ALARMS AID continued d c o o O gt gt a a J lt Jg gt Cc t gt P n Q 5 co 2 Q lt t w 0 a JEDE B 5 d Z lt 5 lt 6 Z 5 ALS TIT nin ARIA NIJ 2 295 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 10 of 13 Table 101 1 Alarm Descriptions Conditions continued DLX ALARMS AID EQPT LIU CONDITION DESCRIPTION COMM FAIL MPU unable to communicate with DLX DLX ALARMS AID T1 CONDITION DESCRIPTION LOOPED BACK Signal looped back toward network LOS DS1 Loss of Signal T BERL DS1 BER threshold crossed based on BPVs LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 DS1 FEND HLXC HLXR 2 DS1 LOOP 2 LOOP 2 DS1 5 988 TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER E OE RE gt KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites FEND means ESF PRM information collected at the opposit
51. 2 55 1 1 EDITING FIELDS 1 3 d 1 3 22 EEE 1 3 mad uiu uq 40 3 1 4 QOIS CR REGIOS CACHE REA 1 3 ha 1 4 9 i Se 1 4 SA 1 4 3 7 Pop Up 5 1 4 mao Web Sa 2 5 ada de a ota dai pde 1 4 Data A 1 5 4 WSING ATOP DOCUMENT 5 555 1 5 SECTION 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE GENERAL 2 1 ALPHABETICAL TASK LIST CER RE RR 2 1 0 VOG POWER SUPPLY TEST ORC RC oo a Ca cci ela DLP 508 ACCESS IDENTIFIER TAD 106 ACO ALARM CUT OFF COMMAND DLP 539 ROTTNE ALARMS DISPENE eae eR ac o DLP 542 ALARM HISTORY CLEARANCE COMMAND
52. 3 or 4 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier Move to the Mon Type Threshold toggle fields Enter the value for each field that you wish to change based on ranges and default values for each Mon Type listed in Table 556 1 Ranges are also listed at the bottom of the DS1 PM Configuration screen Reference 102 Performance Monitoring Reports Description 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 556 Page 2 of 3 6 Move to the Mon Type Alarms toggle fields The following selections are possible Critical Allows notification of all Critical Major Minor and Event alarms as they occur Major Allows notification of all Major Minor and Event alarms as they occur Minor Allows notification of all Minor and Event alarms as they occur e Event Allows notification of all events as they occur Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting 7 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return 8 Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each applicable DS1 signal in the chassis Note Pressing CONTROL C and confirming with the Y key removes all threshold values and alarm level information from the database for the group and slot selected Stop You have completed this procedure DS1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING CONFIGURATION Group 1 Circuit 1 Circuit ID 15 MINUTE 15 MINUTE 133400 EVENT 648 EVENT 100 EVENT 100 EVENT 100 EVENT
53. 42 to 56 VDC local 85 to 130 VDC line continued 2 251 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 4 of 9 Table 101 1 Soneplex Broadband System V5 Specifications continued PARAMETER SPECIFICATION REMARKS Version D and later HLXRs HLXR 3192 DS1 Interface Input Output Signals Per ANSI T1 403 Frequency 1 544 Mbps HLXR 3192 only 200 bps received signal tolerance 50 bps generated signals HDSL Interface Format Two 784 kbps full duplex pairs 2B1Q 130 VDC or 130 VDC line Constant voltage differential between loops 1 and 2 can vary from 42 VDC to 260 VDC Version A and Version B HRXs Impedance 135 ohms Input Voltage Up to 130 VDC nominal Loop Loss Allowed HLXC to HRX first HRX to second HRX and HRX to HLXR Output Signal Level Power Consumption power dissipated in the unit ODS2 Module 5 to 31 dBm 10 BER Transmit Device continued 2 252 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 5 of 9 Table 101 1 Soneplex Broadband System V5 Specifications continued Input Signal Level 0 dB dB Clock recovery range for loop timing Output Line Buildout Settings 0 0 7 5 15 0 and 22 5 dB Output Signal Range Up to 3 000 feet 914 4 meters Up to 6 000 feet 1 828 8 meters with ideal cable c
54. 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance SITE i RMT HSKP psk LOS 9 BER CONT L1 LOSW BER LOSW P 0 l V l V L TL LJ 11395 A Version E HLXC Figure 516 4 HLXC Front Panel Layouts DLP 516 Page 6 of 6 12391 A Version G HLXC 2 61 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 517 Page 1 of 1 RTAU INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for installing the Remote Test Access Unit RTAU in the chassis and verifying that it is functioning properly The RTAU requires no provisioning or periodic maintenance A Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used An ESD grounding post is located on the chassis for connecting the ESD wrist band Ensure that all modules removed from the equipment or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Note For information about installing and testing the which is used with MPU Software Version 5 3 refer to the Soneplex RTAU Remote Test Access Unit Installation Instructions manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual 1
55. 531 1 and working your way to the bottom configure the HLXC for the group and slot selected 5 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return 6 Repeat Steps 4 through 5 for each HLXC module installed in the chassis Stop You have completed this procedure 2 09 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 531 Page 2 of 7 HLX CONFIGURATION 1 HLX Unit Configuration 2 Loopback Configuration Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6661 A Figure 531 1 HLX Configuration Menu HLX UNIT CONFIGURATION Group 6 Slot 1 Circuit ID Unit Equip State EQUIPPED Loop Power Setting ENABLED Unit Service State IS Loop 2 Operation ENABLED T1 Provision YES Half AIS Feature ENABLED 1 Service State OOS HDSL Service State IS T1 Framing Format AUTO UNFRAMED HDSL BER Threshold 1E 7 T1 BER Threshold 1 7 HDSL SNR Threshold 5 dB HLXC T1 Line Code NOT APPL HDSL PA Threshold 3 dB HLXC DSX 1 EQ NOT APPL Network DS1 Source NOT APPL HLXR T1 Line Code AUTO AM Network Keep Alive AIS HLXR LBO Setting UNIT SWITCH HLXR Simplex Power NOT APPL DSO Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 B blocked s lm E Blocked Channel Pattern 11111111 Remote HSKP Labels HSKP1 RMT HSKP1 HSKP2 RMPT HSKP2 User Notes HLXC Switch Settings DSX 1 EQ NOT APPL Loop Power NOT APPL HLXR Switch Settings Simplex P
56. 575 2 Test Access Unit Status Commands Screen 2 241 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 575 Page 4 of 5 DS3 CUSTOMER NETWORK LOW SPEED MODULES RX TX 6177 A Figure 575 3a Drop None Insert Network DS3 CUSTOMER NETWORK LOW SPEED MODULES RX TX 6176 A Figure 575 3c Drop Network Insert None DS3 CUSTOMER NETWORK LOW SPEED MODULES RX TX 6178 A Figure 575 3b Drop None Insert Customer DS3 CUSTOMER NETWORK LOW SPEED MODULES RX TX 6175 A Figure 575 3d Drop Customer Insert None Figure 575 3 TAU Drop Insert Configurations 2 242 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 575 Page 5 of 5 DS3 053 CUSTOMER CUSTOMER NETWORK LOW SPEED NETWORK LOW SPEED MODULES MODULES RX TX 6174 A 6173 A Figure 575 3e Drop Network Insert Customer Figure 575 31 Drop Customer Insert Network DS3 DS3 CUSTOMER CUSTOMER NETWORK LOW SPEED NETWORK LOW SPEED MODULES MODULES RX RX TX TX 6171 A Figure 575 3g Drop Network Insert Network Figure 575 3h Drop Customer Insert Customer Figure 575 3 TAU Drop Insert Configurations continued 2 243 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4
57. 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 527 Page 1 of 1 ALARM HISTORY CLEARANCE COMMAND Summary This procedure provides instructions for clearing alarm history and all active alarms for the entire system 1 Use the arrow keys to select Clear Alarm History from the Alarms menu 2 Atthe Clear Alarm History selection prompt press Enter or Return The system displays the following message also shown in Figure 527 1 Deleting all ALARM HISTORY Are You Sure y n 3 Clear all alarm history by pressing Y for yes or cancel clear alarm history by pressing N for no Stop You have completed this procedure ALARMS MENU Display Active Alarms Display Alarm Summary Display Alarm History Clear Alarm History Deleting all ALARM HISTORY Are You Sure y n Press CONTROL A For Assistance 5314 A Figure 527 1 Delete Alarm History Query 2 89 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 528 Page 1 of 2 SYSTEM TID DATE TIME SETTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for setting the Craft Interface system internal time and date clock and entering the Target Identifier TID Time and date must be set when the system is first installed or if there is a change in time Also each Soneplex Broadband chassis requires a unique identification name or number called the TID 2
58. 90 Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields Use the arrow keys or number keys to select the System Configuration menu from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Use the arrow keys or number keys to select the System TID Date Time screen Press Enter or Return The System TID Date Time screen should appear See Figure 528 1 Move t
59. 946 3223 outside U S A and Canada or by writing to ADC Telecommunications Inc Attn Technical Assistance Center Mail Station 477 P O Box 1101 Minneapolis MN 55440 1101 U S A 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Page 3 3 www adc com
60. ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance RLX CONFIGURATION Slot EQUIPPED 005 5 005 AUTO AUTO Network DS1 Source NRZ 1 7 i Circuit ID Pulse Equalization LBO Setting Programmable Loopback NID Loopback Loopback Activation Code Loopback Deactivate Code Loopback Timeout Period Lpbk Timeout Disable Code NOT APPL UNIT SWITCH DISABLED UNIT SWITCH 1101001111010011 1001001110010011 1101010111010110 0 minutes DLP 534 Page 2 of 6 Span Power Setting UNIT SWITCH Network Keep Alive AIS DSO Channel blocked 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Unit Switch Settings Pulse Equalization NOT APPL NID DISABLED DISABLED 7 5 dB Span Power LBO Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6127 C Figure 534 1 RLX Configuration Screen Table 534 1 RLX Configuration Fields FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION Toggle 1 2 3 4 5 6 or7 Specifies the module s group number groups and 7 are not designated on the chassis available in the 19 inch chassis i i 0 Establishes communication with MPU Module must be set to EQUIPPED before remaining selections are allowed Toggle Unequipped No communication with MPU DEFAULT Group Specifies the module s slot number designated on the chassis Circuit Identifier Enter up to 20 characters This represents the customer s circuit ID The first and last ch
61. B RLX RLXIOR Power Table 101 1 Soneplex Broadband System V5 Specifications PARAMETER SPECIFICATION REMARKS Chassis H x W x D 10 x 21 5 x 12 inches 25 4 x 54 6 x 30 5 cm Environment No condensation Operating Relative Humidity 596 to 9596 Operating Temperature 40 F to 149 F 409 to 65 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 Storage Temperature Input Voltage Range 42 5 to 56 5 VDC A and B feed Consumption 48 VDC APU 7 5 watts maximum MPU DS3 MUX 5 watts maximum See Table 101 2 See Table 101 3 See Table 101 4 See Table 101 5 9 9 watts 8 3 watts Simplex current disabled Version D and later HLXRs 9 watts Simplex power enabled D1 D2 HLXR 3192 D2A SP D3 D3A D3B HLXRs only Simplex power disabled D2A D4 D4A D4B and Version E HLXRs and HLXR 3192 only Per module Z Per module C1 HLXC Version D and later HLXCs B1 HLXR Simplex current enabled ODS2 A2 RLX Version B RLX RLXIOR A RTAU Maximum Power See Table 101 6 See Table 101 7 See Table 101 8 2 watts maximum 8 2 watts maximum Determined by configuration continued 2 249 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 2 of 9 Table 101 1 Soneplex Broadband System V5 Specifications continued PARAMETER SPECIFICATION REMARKS DS3 Interface 053 MUX DS3 Transmit Power
62. CIRCUIT CROSS CONNECTS Summary This procedure provides instructions for making any necessary cross connects on HDSL loops and then re install the HLXC modules AN A Danger To avoid electric shock be careful when working near HDSL loop connections or telecommunications circuits An electrical potential of 130 volts exists on HDSL loop connections and telecommunications circuits Coming in contact with this high electrical potential will result in death or severe personal injury Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded Open the chassis cover Use the ejector at the bottom of each HLXC module front panel to carefully disengage the module from its connector Withdraw each HLXC module part way to break electrical contact with the backplane connector Note The HLXC module can be configured to supply 130 VDC simplex current over the HDSL loops to supply power to the remote HLXR modules When an HDSL Repeater HRX is in the HDSL loops HLXC modules can be configured to supply 130 VDC Partially withdrawing the HLXC module ensures that current is not present when cross connects are installed At the central o
63. Chassis Note The Unit Service State field default is UNEQUIPPED and the Provision field default is NO When the Unit Service State field 15 set to EQUIPPED and the Provision field is set to YES this screen shows all other field defaults as above Table 533 1 RLX IOR Configuration Fields FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 06 7 groups 6 and 7 are not available in the 19 inch Toggle LEC chassis gt Toggle Note The RLXIOR configuration field default values shown Circuit Identifier Enter up to 20 characters Unit Equip State Equipped 2 110 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Unequipped No communication with the MPU Specifies the module s group number designated on the chassis Specifies the module s slot number in the group designated on the chassis UNEQUIPPED in this manual are valid for a system with an MPU installed This represents the customer s circuit ID The first and last characters must be alpha or numeric middle characters can be alpha numeric or hyphens Establishes communication with the MPU Module must be set to EQUIPPED before remaining selections are allowed continued ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 533 Page 3 of 5 Table 533 1 RLXIOR Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Unit Service State Toggle Leave this fiel
64. Circuit option can only be changed if the value set in 3 1 thru 3 4 the Mode field is DISABLE 4 thru 4 4 5 thru 5 4 6 1 thru 6 4 7 1 thru7 4 continued 2 216 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 7 of 18 Table 570 1 RTAU Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT EQUIPMENT SETUP FIELDS continued OVERVIEW Valid access modes and the resulting configurations are shown in DISABLE Figure 570 6 RTAU Test Configuration Block Diagram Figure 570 7 MONF and MONE Figure 570 8 SPLTB and SPLTA Figure 570 9 Typical Round Robin Test Configuration Figure 570 10 Typical End Test Configuration Figure 570 11 SPLTF and SPLTE Figure 570 12 Typical Point to Point Test Configuration Figure 570 13 SPLTFL and SPLTEL and Figure 570 14 LOOPF and LOOPE addition when the Mode field change is saved by pressing the Enter or Return key the MPU will instruct the 053 MUX to drop and insert the selected circuit MONE Non intrusive monitor access to the A pair MONF Non intrusive monitor access to the B pair SPLTA SPLTA mode indicates a split in the A transmission path with a TSG Test Signal Generator connected in the F direction and an SPD Signal Presence Detector connected to the signal from the E direction SPLTB SPLTB mode indicates a split in the B transmission path with a TS
65. Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT SIGNAL GENERATOR SETUP FIELDS continued Pattern Type Toggle lin 8 Containing strings of 7 sequential 075 It is used to determine continued the ability of a circuit to handle payload signals having minimum 175 density Use of this pattern often reveals the existence of timing recovery problem under conditions of low signal density Unframed 10000000 1000 0000 Framed 0100 0000 0100 0000 DALY Daly Pattern Modified 55 Octet This is useful for stressing the timing recovery circuits of line cards and the preamplifier equalizer circuits of repeaters The pattern stresses a circuit by introducing rapid transitions from long sequences of low density octets to high density octets high density octets to low density octets and rapid transitions The pattern may be transmitted framed or unframed When framed the frame bit shall be inserted at the octet boundaries and will not overwrite the bits User Code For user defined patterns of 32 bits or less set the Pattern Type field to User Code The bits can be entered by typing a string of 0 s or 1 s in the bit field located to the right of the designated entry Pattern Bits Display None If the Pattern Type field is configured for User Code pattern only bits will be displayed to the right of the Pattern type field parameter This field s name is not shown on the screen If no User Code is entered in the Patt
66. Configuration screen appears as shown in Figure 533 1 Note The RLXIOR is displayed as RLX in the Craft Interface menus and screens Starting at the top of Table 533 1 and working your way to the bottom configure the RLXIOR Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each RLXIOR module installed in the chassis Stop You have completed this procedure 2 109 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and DLP 533 Page 2 of 5 RLX CON Slot 1 Group Unit Equip State EQUIPPED Unit Service State OOS T1 Provision YES 1 Service State OOS Line Code AMI Framing Format AUTO Network DS1 Source NRZ BER Threshold 1E 7 Span Power Setting ENABLED DSO Channel B blocked l2 3 4 56 7 8 9 1 Unit Switch Settings Pulse Equaliza Press CONTROL Figure 533 1 RLX Configur Maintenance FIGURATION Circuit ID NOT APPL UNIT SWITCH DISABLED ENABLED 1101001111010011 1001001110010011 1101010111010110 0 minutes AIS Pulse Equalization LBO Setting Programmable Loopback NID Loopback Loopback Activation Code Loopback Deactivate Code Lpbk Timeout Disable Code Loopback Timeout Period Network Keep Alive 011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 tion NOT APPL NID DISABLED DISABLED 7 5 dB Span Power LBO A For Assistance 11783 A ation Screen Broadband
67. Connection Turn the power on to the control terminal or host computer and press Enter or Return The Logon screen appears Logon to the Craft Interface and check the status of each transmission module to verify that the configuration data is correct Reference DLP 526 Craft Interface System Logon 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 519 Page 3 of 3 10 Re enter the MPU configuration data manually or follow this procedure Reference DLP 555 Configuration Data Download Command Stop You have completed this procedure HIGH SPEED UNITS LOW SPEED UNITS yy HSW MXW TAU 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU 12 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 MPU 8025 Figure 519 1 Soneplex Broadband Chassis Front View Mounting Slot for MPU M P uU STATUS 1749 B Figure 519 2 MPU Front Panel 2 67 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 520 Page 1 of 2 HLXC AND HLXR END TO END TESTS Summary This procedure provides instructions for using 1253 test set with 251 option to verify that error free data is received from the HLXC module at the H
68. Converter Two Position Horizontal Mounting Shelf User Manual 61 125 Model FLC A10MPU Fiber Loop Converter Micro Processor Unit 61 129 Quad DS1 Fiber Loop Converter B2 B3 D3 User Manual 61 135 Quad Loop Extender QLX and Remote Terminal Description Manual 61 151 Quad Loop Extender QLX Operation and Maintenance Manual 61 152 Soneplex Broadband System Chassis Installation Manual 61 412 Soneplex Integrated Broadband Chassis Installation Manual 61 768 Soneplex Broadband System Description Design and Application Manual V5 61 470 Soneplex Broadband System Reference Guide V5 61 473 Soneplex HLXR 3192 Remote System Operation and Maintenance Manual 61 732 Soneplex Main Processor Unit MPU Installation Instructions 61 495 Soneplex RTAU Remote Test Access Unit Installation Instructions 61 743 Soneplex Test Access Unit Installation Instructions 61 449 Soneplex System TL1 Interface Specification 61 419 Soneplex System X 25 Concentrator Installation and Operation Manual 61 708 Soneplex Version D or later HLXR Remote System Operation and Maintenance Manual 61 314 Page ix 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 6 ADMONISHMENTS Important safety admonishments are used throughout this manual to warn of possible hazards to persons or equipment admonishment identifies a possible hazard and then explains what may happen if the hazard is not avoided The admonishments in the form of Dangers Warnings and Caut
69. Do not install a still configured MPU in an already configured chassis If you want to retain unit configuration data in all transmission units or prevent alarms and you are installing a previously configured MPU verify that the MPU s unit configuration data is gone before you re install it A Caution Do NOT re install MPUs with revisions older than 3 1 or MPUs that have an older revision than the currently installed MPU A corrupted database may result A Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded 2 65 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 519 Pag 1 2 66 e 2 of 3 To save the replacement MPU s current configuration data upload configuration data to the host computer Contact the Technical Assistance Center at ADC Telecommunications described in the General Information section of this manual for more information Reference DLP 554 Configuration Data Upload Command Locate the mounting slot designated for the MPU as shown in Figure 519 1 Align the edges of the module printed circuit card with the guides in the chassi
70. Fail HSKPx Rmt Alm HSKPx Rmt Alm HLX RLX HSKPx Rmt Alm DLX Alarm DSI RX LOS DSI RX LOF DSI Loopback represents the Soneplex chassis shelf slot number 2 214 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 10 of 11 CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR REMOTE POWER MPU HSW HSP ALARM ALARM ALARM FAILURE ALARM ALARM EQPT ALM EQPT ALM 2 3 5 6 HSW HSP MXW MXP MXW MXP FAC ALM FAC ALM EQPTALM EQPTALM FAC ALM FAC ALM 11 12 14 D1 4 L R D2 4 L R ALARM ALARM D3 4 L R D4 1 L R D4 2 L R D4 3 L R ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM D5 4 L R D6 4 L R D7 1 L R D7 2 L R ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM D7 3 L R HSKP 1 1 HSKP 1 2 HSKP 1 3 HSKP 1 4 HSKP 2 1 HSKP 2 2 ALARM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM 43 45 46 48 HSKP 2 3 HSKP 2 4 HSKP 3 1 HSKP 3 2 HSKP 3 3 HSKP 3 4 HSKP 4 1 HSKP 4 2 RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 HSKP 4 3 HSKP 4 4 HSKP 5 1 HSKP 5 2 HSKP 5 3 HSKP 5 4 HSKP 6 1 ATT RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RMT ALM RESERVED 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Figure 104 5 Compressed Scan Display 1 2 275 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 11 of 11 HSKP 6 2 RMT ALM L1 2 LCL ALARM L3 2 LCL ALARM L5 2 LCL ALARM L2 2 RMT ALARM
71. Far End Alarms This is due to corrupted data accumulated in the transmission of the DS1 from A to H transmit direction 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 103 Page 3 of 3 Soneplex Optical 052 QLX System 14862 A Figure 103 3 Location of Critical Alarm Points on Soneplex QLX System A External CSU that will inject PRM Performance Report Messages back to B reporting all DS1 Far End Alarms This is due to corrupted data received at A and reported back to B via the PRM in the FDL Facility Data Link QLX DS1 input monitors 1 1 1 NEND and alarms Report measures the actual DS1 performance as received on transmission from CSU A G QLX DSI input monitors 1 1 2 NEND and alarms This report measures the actual DS1 performance as received on transmit from CSU H External CSU at will inject PRM back to G reporting DSI Far End Alarms This is due to corrupted data accumulated in the transmission of the DS1 from A to transmit direction Note A indicates DS1 1 of four possible DS1s 2 265 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 1 of 11 TBOS INTERFACE DESCRIPTION Summary This section provides information for operating the Soneplex Broadband system using a Telemetry Byte Oriented Serial T
72. Figure 506 2 Connect receive fiber to the front connector Route fiber out the top of the chassis Reference DLP 507 Fiber Optic Connector and Adapter Cleaning and Mating Instructions With the module still withdrawn adjust the fibers as required to remove any excess slack Hold the fibers with one hand to guide them while the module is being fully inserted into the chassis Slide the ODS2 module slowly into the chassis Route the fibers through the Fiber Management Baffle without exceeding the minimum bend radius Using the ODS2 module ejector press the module into the chassis until it is properly seated If there is excessive resistance withdraw the module and check for alignment or obstructions Did the STATUS indicator light green If there is no DS2 signal present the OPT FAIL indicator will be lighted red If Yes continue to Step 18 If No replace ODS2 module and go to Step 4 Will this system be configured as DS2 Protected e Yes continue to Step 19 e If No go to Step 23 Remove an ODS2 module from the protective packaging and inspect for damage Install protect ODS2 module in the slot adjacent to the working module Reference DLP 523 Assignment Records Align protect module with the slots and slide module into the chassis until the two fiber connectors protrude about three inches out from the front of the chassis Do not seat module in connector at this time 2 39 6 2000 ADC Telecommunication
73. HDSL system Refer to Figure 103 2 for a drawing of the Soneplex Repeater RLX system Refer to Figure 103 3 for a drawing of the Soneplex Optical DS2 QL X system Soneplex HDSL System HLXC HLXR reo CSU NEND NETWORK B LOOP 1 091 C ws D gt LOOP 2 14861 A Figure 103 1 Location of Critical Alarm Points on Soneplex HDSL System A External CSU that will inject PRM Performance Report Messages back to B reporting all DS1 Far End Alarms Errors or problems received at A are reported back to B via the PRM in the FDL Facility Data Link B DSI errors at HLXC are reported as T1 1 X X 1 NEND PM and alarms Report measures the actual DS1 performance as received from CSU A DS1 errors at HLXC are reported as T1 1 X X 1 FEND PM and alarms from CSU A via the PRM in the FDL Facility Data Link C HDSL errors at HLXC are reported as HDSL 1 X X 1 Loop 1 or HDSL 1 X X 2 Loop 2 NEND PM and alarms D HDSL errors at HRX are reported as HDSL 1 X X 1 Loop 1 or HDSL 1 X X 2 Loop 2 REPR PM and alarms at HRX on CO side E HDSL errors at HRX are reported as HDSL 1 X X 1 Loop 1 or HDSL 1 X X 2 Loop 2 NEND PM and alarms at HRX REPC on CPE side F HDSL errors at HLXR are reported as HDSL 1 X X 1 Loop 1 or HDSL 1 X X 2 Loop 2 FEND PM and alarms 2 263 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 103 Page 2 of 3
74. If the Current User field is set to NONE the Mode field is automatically set to DISABLE However to change this field to CRAFT the Mode field must first be set to an option other than DISABLE At that point the Current User field is PC NT set to CRAFT The RTAU is not E used CRAFT The RTAU is The RTAU is being controlled via the Craft controlled via the Craft The RTAU is being controlled via the TL1 interface This option cannot be enabled from the Craft menu When a Connect Test Access command is issued the Current User field is automatically set to TL1 Line Code Toggle OVERVIEW If external test equipment is being used set the Line Code field to either AMI or B8ZS External test equipment required T Berd 211 1251 test set or equivalent that can generate a T1 signal If the internal signal monitor and signal generator of the RTAU is being used set the line code to INTERNAL In addition when an intrusive test mode is selected and the line code is set to INTERNAL the signal generator Pattern Type field defaults to QRS to transmit an unframed QRSS signal INTERNAL Disables RTAU front panel bantam jacks for test access Selects internal TSG and SPD B8ZS Enables Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution line code through the Craft Interface Enables Alternate Mark Inversion line code through the Craft Interface Test Circuit Input 1 1 thru 1 4 Group and slot number to be dropped by the 253 MUX The 2 1 thru 2 4 Test
75. Level Forma Impedance With splitter combiner Maximum Span DS3 Interface D1 DS3 MUX DS3 Transmit Power Level Forma Impedance With splitter combiner Maximum Span DLX Module Format Transparent to frame format Input Signal Level 1 544 Mbps 200 bps 130 ppm Output Pulse 22 AWG ABAM Output Signal Level C1 HLXC Module Loop Loss 35 dB 196 kHz 135 ohm termination Loop Types Two pair single or mixed gauges With or without bridged taps Format Two 784 kbps full duplex pairs 2B1Q modulation Line Impedance 135 ohms nominal Balanced Loop Power Output Voltage 132 5 VDC Return Loss 220 dB 40 kHz to 200 kHz Total Signal Power 13 5 dBm 0 5 dBm continued 2 250 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 3 of 9 Table 101 1 Soneplex Broadband System V5 Specifications continued PARAMETER SPECIFICATION Version D and later HLXC Modules gt 35 dB 196 kHz 135 ohm termination Loop Types Two pair single or mixed gauges With or without bridged taps Transmission Format Two 784 kbps full duplex pairs 2B1Q modulation Line Impedance 135 ohms nominal Loop Power Output Voltage 132 gt 5 VDC without HRX 130 VDC with HRX Total Signal Power 13 5 dBm 0 5 dBm B1 HLXR DS1 Interface Input Output Signals Per ANSI T1 403 HDSL Interface Format Two 784 kbps full duplex pairs 2BIQ Power
76. Location Circuit Identifier Condition St Status and ACO There are seven columns that appear on the Alarm History screen Date Time Access Identifier Locn Location Circuit Identifier Condition and St Status The Access ID AID column identifies an entity in the chassis to which the alarm condition pertains Different alarm conditions result in different types of AIDs The AID consists of several parts the Identifier the Shelf the Group the Slot and the Site or Loop Number as described below See Figure 101 5 for a complete definition of the Access Identifier 2 287 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 4 TAP 101 71 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance Page 2 of 13 Identifier e identifies modules within the chassis where XXX represents the type of module MPU LIU MXW or EXT and represents the number of the Soneplex chassis in the system always 1 e HDSL identifies trouble on the HDSL loop A 1 in the last column of the AID indicates trouble on HDSL Loop 1 A 2 in the last column of the AID indicates trouble on HDSL Loop 2 TI identifies trouble on the DS1 either at the local or remote site 2 identifies trouble on the DS2 either at the local or remote site identifies trouble on the DS3 Shelf Number This is the number of the Soneplex chassis in the system Group Number Thi
77. Random Signal QRS 220 1 is a 1 048 575 bit sequence generated by a 20 stage shift register with feedback taken from the 17th and 20th stages The non inverted output is taken from the 20th stage and an output bit is forced to be 1 whenever the next 14 bits are all 075 QRS is typically used to verify continuity and to check circuit performance in the presence of traffic like signals QRS Quasi random Signal is a signal repeated every 1 to 24 bits as specified by the OS Operation System application QRS must conform to the description in Bellcore TR NPL 000054 2 218 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc continued ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 9 of 18 Table 570 1 RTAU Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT SIGNAL GENERATOR SETUP FIELDS continued Pattern Type Toggle 2 15 1 215 1isa 32 767 bit pseudo random pattern that generates continued maximum of 14 sequential 075 and 15 sequential 175 The pattern provides a maximum number of 075 allowed for framed non B8ZS testing The pattern does not meet the minimum 175 density requirement 2 23 1 223 is a 8 388 607 bit pseudo random pattern that generates a maximum of 22 sequential 0 s and 23 sequential 175 The pattern exceeds excess 0 s and does not meet the minimum 175 density requirements for applications Ones Test of T1 span line The all 1
78. SIGNAL SLOT SIGNAL SLOT SIGNAL SLOT NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER 2 59 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 516 Page 5 of 6 INITIAL START UP TEST AND STAND ALONE OPERATION Note When an HRX is installed the HLXC indicators only verify the loop segment between the HLXC and the HRX After the is installed in the chassis its STATUS indicator will initially turn red to indicate the start of self test diagnostics While the self test is in progress all indicators will briefly turn yellow Then all indicators except STATUS will turn off Following the successful completion of the self test the HLXC front panel indicators will appear as follows STATUS Green to indicate that the self test was successfully completed RMT HSKP Off LPBK Off DS1 LOS BER Red to indicate that a DS signal is not being received by the HLXC HDSL CONT SNR Red after a short delay if loop power is enabled which indicate the HDSL loops are open Off if loop power is disabled L1 and L2 Red to indicate that the HDSL loops are not LOSW BER synchronized i e HLXR is not in service If loop 2 is disabled the L2 indicators will stay off 6762 C Figure 516 3 HLXC Module Initial Start Up 2 60 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc CONT SNR LOSW BER 12 e LOSW BER Lo 6770 A Versions C and D HLXC ADCP 61
79. Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier 5 Move to the Equipment Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL CR MAJOR MJ MINOR MN EVENT EV or NOT RPTD not reported for each field that you wish to change Note Abbreviations of the alarm field options except NOT RPTD will appear in the Active Alarms and Alarm History screens In addition what options you select at any alarm level setting screen will determine whether you will be notified of the alarm Reference DLP 552 Alarm Event Notification Level Setting 6 Move to the DS2 Facility Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR EVENT or NOT RPTD for each field that you wish to change 2 193 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 561 Page 2 of 3 7 Move to the DS1 Facility Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR EVENT or NOT RPTD for each field that you wish to change Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting Note Default values are listed in Table 561 1 8 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure ODS2 ALARM LEVELS Equipment Alarms BOARD FAIL PROTECT COMM FAIL COMM FAIL REMOTE COMM FAIL CONFIG MISMATCH VERSION MISMATCH HSKP1 Facility Alarms LOF LOS TO PROT DEGRADE Facility Alarms LOOP
80. Slot 1 Circuit ID LXC Activation Code 1101001111010011 LXC Programmable Lpbk DISABLED ESF Inband Loopback ENABLED HLXR NID Loopback UNIT SWITCH HLXR Activation Code 000111010000 LXR Programmable Lpbk DISABLED RX 1 Activation Code 00011101000001 RX 2 Activation Code 00011101000010 RX Programmable Lpbk DISABLED Common Deactivate Code 2 001001110010011 Lpbk Timeout Disable Code 01010111010110 Lpbk Timeout Period 30 minutes HLXR NID Loopback Switch Setting ENABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11389 A Note Activation Code is equivalent to Programmable Code Figure 573 4 HLX Loopback Configuration Screen MPU V5 2 With Two HRXs 2 234 2000 Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 573 Page 4 of 6 Table 573 1 HLX Loopback Configuration Fields FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Group Toggle 1 2 3 4 5 6 0r7 Specifies the module s group Blank number designated on the chassis Slot Toggle 1 2 3 or 4 Specifies the module s slot number Blank designated on the chassis Circuit ID Input Up to 20 characters This represents the customer s circuit Blank ID The first and last characters must be alpha or numeric middle characters can be alpha numeric or hyphens Note This field can be configured only after the T1 Provision field described in DLP 531 is set to YES HLXC Activation I
81. Stop You have completed this procedure ane UN H TE x 9 stat RMT 5 rek LOS 51 ach CIT TT Version D HLXC Version E HLXC Version G HLXC Figure 572 1 HLXC Module Front Panels 2 231 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 573 Page 1 of 6 HLX LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for viewing or editing the loopback configuration for HLXC modules Note toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selectio
82. TYPE DESCRIPTION Critical Alarm Shelf Critical Alarm shelf summary Major Alarm Shelf Major Alarm shelf summary Minor Alarm Shelf Minor Alarm shelf summary Remote Alarm Shelf Remote Alarm shelf summary Power Alarm Shelf Shelf Power A or B input failure but not both HSW Alm N A Not Applicable for this release HSP Eqpt Alm N A N A for this release HWS Fac Alm N A N A for this release HSP Fac Alm N A N A for this release MXW Eqpt Alm MXP Eqpt Alm DS3 MUX Unit Fail MPU COMM Fail DS3 TX LOS or SISTER COMM Fail and not SISTER MPU COMM Fail MXW Fac Alm MXP Fac Alm DS3 MUX DS3 RX LOS DS3 RX OOF DS3 Loopback Dx L R Alarm ODS2 amp QLX DS2 Optical COMM Fail DS2 Optical LOS DS2 Optical OOF DS2 Optical BER DS1 RX LOS DS1 Loopback Dx L R Alarm DS1 RX LOS HDSL LOSW HDSL BER HDSL SNR DC Loop Continuity if HLXR is line powered DS1 Loopback Dx L R Alarm LX DS1 RX LOS DS1 RX LOF DS1 Loopback Dx L R Alarm DLX DS1 RX LOS DS1 BER DS1 Loopback HSKPx Rmt Alm ODS2 amp QLX Slot number is x 1 HSKPI alarm reporting by QFLC or QLX working Slot number is x 2 HSKP2 alarm reporting by QLX working only Slot number is x 3 HSKP3 alarm reporting by QFLC or QLX working Slot number is x 4 HSKP4 alarm reporting by QLX working only Remote Housekeeping Alarm A or B reported by an HLXR ODS2 amp QLX Unit Fail MPU COMM Fail Laser Degrade DS1 TX LOS or SISTER COMM Fail and not SISTER MPU COMM
83. a path is SEFSP FE Severely Errored FEND Derived from PRM Severely Errored Framing Event Framing Second Path SE unavailable no other PM counts are maintained Derived from SESP FEs Note DS1 Path Parameters are collected at the HLXC for both directions as shown in Figure 102 7 Note Far end parameters are not derived from defects detected in the incoming signal but rather from the PRM Performance Report Messages embedded in the incoming signal from the far end A Remote Alarm Indication condition disallows reception of a valid PRM The framing format must be ESF for FEND information to be transmitted and displayed Note For complete information on counts refer to ANSI T1 231 2 303 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 5 of 11 Table 102 2 HDSL Mon Type Descriptions MEANING 10 0 DESCRIPTION FCP Failure Count Path NEND FEND Count of Loss Of Sync Word LOSW REPR CRP RRP failures on the HDSL loop CVP Code Violation NEND FEND REPC Count of CRC errors on the HDSL loop REPR CRP RRP H no LOSW defects occurred SESP Severely Errored NEND FEND REPC A second in which the number of CRC Second Path REPR CRP RRP errors on the HDSL loop was greater ESP Errored Second NEND FEND REPC second in which one or more REPR CRP RRP errors occu
84. additional data is required such as a schematic diagram line drawing tabulated data maintenance philosophy or trouble clearing strategy the reader will be sent to a TAD 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc AND MAINTENANCE ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance SECTION 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE Content Page 422 owe ened 0 2222 5 20 Xe dida id 0280 cies 2 1 ALPHABETICAL TASK HIST ERO OS eee noes eter ETT va 2 1 INDEN EST scooter oe eee dua eee IXL 001 1 GENERAL This section provides procedures to install and maintain a Soneplex Broadband system The procedures are given in a Task Oriented Practice TOP format Regardless of your work experience TOP can be a useful tool in doing your job If you have done a particular job many times the TOP serves as a memory jogger for those instructions you cannot recall If you have never done a particular job or do it infrequently a TOP provides step by step instructions to complete the task ALPHABETICAL TASK LIST VOC POWER SUPPLY TEST 2 de ood ox dod Ro red ic ato DLP 508 ACCESS IDENTIFIER a EE EUR oe EE TAD 106 CUT OFF COMMAND ERICH RE CH EC RC DLP 539 ACTIVE ALARMS DISPLAY DLP 542 ALARM HISTORY CLE
85. always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded Do Items Below in the Order Listed For Details Go To 1 Obtain the following tools and equipment e 2 or 3 Phillips head screwdriver e Anti static wrist strap Digital volt ohmmeter VOM e Optical power meter if installing ODS2 modules Standard hand tools e Two fiber optic patch cables 1 to 3 meters long each 2 Open Soneplex Broadband chassis front cover 3 Inspect the Soneplex Broadband chassis for proper installation and correct installation of all cables Refer to the Soneplex Broadband System Chassis Installation Manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual for more information 4 If required unpack modules from their shipping container they may be stored in the chassis Inspect for damage or missing parts DLP 500 2 9 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 002 Page 2 of 3 Do Items Below in the Order Listed 10 11 12 13 14a 14b 15 16 17 2 10 Familiarize yourself with the Soneplex Broadband chassis module locations and wiring points Verify that 48 VDC is present at the power supply terminal block located on the chassis backplane If specified in the work order install and test the MPU module e Install a new MPU module in non provisioned chassis and verify stand alone op
86. amp P ODS2 OOF 005 OR OSS OTGR PC PCB PIC PID PM PRM PVC PWR QFLC QLX R RAI RCV RDI REPC REPR RFI RLX RLXIOR RMT RRP RTAU RX SEF SF SLM Page xiv 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Monitor Main Processor Unit Multiplexer DS3 MUX Protect slot DS3 MUX Working slot Near End Network Element Near End Network Interface Device Bell Network Monitoring and Analysis System Non Return to Zero Non Trouble Clearing Procedure TOP term Operation Administration Maintenance amp Provisioning Optical Digital Signal 2 Out Of Frame Out Of Service a type of Boolean operator Operations Support System Operations Technology Generic Requirements Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board Plastic Insulated Cable Personal Identification Performance Monitoring Performance Report Message Permanent Virtual Circuit Power Quad Fiber Loop Converter module Quad DS1 Loop Extender module Ring Remote Alarm Indication Receive Remote Defect Indication Repeater Central office network side MPU version 5 1 Repeater Remote customer side MPU version 5 1 Remote Failure Indication Repeater Loop Extender module Repeater Loop Extender Intelligent Office Repeater Remote Repeater Remote customer side MPU version 5 2 and 5 3 Remote Test Access Unit Receive Severely Errored Framing Super Frame Signal Label Mismatch SPX St STAT STK SVC TAD TAP TASC
87. and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 From the Main Menu use the arrow keys or number keys to select the System Configuration menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys or number keys to select Serial Port Configuration from the System Configuration menu Press Enter or Return A Serial Port Configuration screen is shown in Figure 549 1 The serial port defaults are listed Table 54
88. bab DLP 535 EET CIERRE Sud rd ud suis eee dus DLP 529 0022 Module ieu eee EE UO DLP 530 and DLP 516 OE DLP 532 Gu ac costado op aba DLP 534 REXIOR 65 66 56 ahaha dees eee aaa DLP 533 EL s se each ck dai itat douter dab DLP 556 CONIO uoces ue E I DLP 557 Alarm Event Notification Laval suu uaa uox 3x69 069 3 90903090 3 9630 939094 4 95 3 99 X 9 3 06 3963 90993 93063 DLP 552 MPU arm Lavel Setting 02285 A C oe de ER E eben DLP 559 Dos MUX AER GOLBBIE caa oaa a o caeca o beoe s roca cor DLP 560 0052 Module Alarm Level 0 DLP 561 EX AME age SOR pda ks aos DLP 562 DLX Marmi Level ER EROR CREER EA E pb bob bee begeben DLP 563 o osa dhs S arde Bh DLP 518 Craft Intertace System Logoff iua 4 sse ere E OR IRR OR OR Ru DERNIER DLP 564 MAINT
89. between chassis and the remote chassis Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End to End Tests 2 Identify the offline ODS2 module of the working and protect pair to be tested Its STATUS indicator is green and is the only illuminated indicator its ONLINE indicator is extinguished 3 Slide the offline ODS2 module part way out this disconnects the offline module from the chassis and ensures that data passes through the online ODS2 module only 4 Perform end to end test and verify error free data Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End to End Tests 5 Using the ODS2 module ejector press the module into the chassis until it is properly seated 6 Verify that the STATUS indicator on offline ODS2 module is green and its ONLINE indicator is extinguished 2 51 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 513 Page 2 of 2 7 Hold ENABLED button down and momentarily press LMPTST APS on the offline ODS2 module 8 Verify that the ODS2 module that was offline is now online its ONLINE indicator is green and ODS2 module that was online is now offline its ONLINE indicator is extinguished 9 Verify that the APS indicator on the online ODS2 module is red indicating a forced switch and APS disabled 10 Slide the offline ODS2 module part way out of the chassis this disconnects the offline module from the
90. connectors protrude about three inches out from the front of the chassis Do not seat module in connector at this time Remove the protective dust caps from the transmit and receive connectors on the ODS2 module Remove the protective covers from the fibers Clean fiber optic connectors and adapters Reference DLP 507 Fiber Optic Connector and Adapter Cleaning and Mating Instructions Connect a fiber optic patch cord between the transmit and receive connector on the ODS2 module See Figure 506 2 This sets the configuration of the module in optical loopback Using the ODS2 module ejector press the module into the chassis until it is properly seated On the APU press LMPTST APS switch Did all ODS2 indicators light e If Yes continue to Step 11 e If No replace ODS2 module and go to Step 4 Is the STATUS indicator on the ODS2 module lighted green e If Yes continue to Step 12 If No replace ODS2 module and go to Step 4 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 506 Page 3 of 5 Is the OPT FAIL indicator lighted red Yes check the patch cord connection If indicator remains lighted replace the ODS2 module and go to Step 4 e If No go to Step 13 Pull the ODS2 module out far enough to remove fiber optic patch cord Connect transmit fiber to the rear connector See
91. entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields Use the arrow keys to select Unit Configuration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Use the arrow keys to select ODS2 Configuration from the Unit Configuration menu Press Enter or Return An ODS2 Configuration screen is shown in Figure 530 1 Starting at the top of Table 530 1 and working your way to the bottom configure the ODS2 for the group and slot selected Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each ODS2 module installed in the chassis Stop You have completed this procedure
92. highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space of the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 2 130 Use the arrow or number keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return The System Maintenance menu is shown in Figure 541 1 Use the arrow or number keys to select Loopback Status Commands from the System Maintenance Menu Press Enter or Return The Loopback Status Commands menu is shown in Figure 541 2 Use the arrow or number keys to select High Speed Loopback Status Commands or Low Speed Loopback Status Commands then press Enter or Return The High Speed Loopback Status Commands screen appears as shown in Figure 541 3 The Low Speed Loopback Status Commands screen appears as shown in Figure 541 4 Low Speed only move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Low Speed only move to t
93. inband HDSL units go to loopup state when they ae are in armed state Loopup is Activation HRX 1100 0111 0100 0001 lt seconds activated for selected units Activation HLXR 1100 0111 01000010 gt seconds Deactivation all 1001 0011 1001 0011 gt 5 seconds The signal is sent inband Units in HDSL units loopup state go back to armed state Loopup time out 1101 0101 11010110 gt 3 seconds Disable loopup time out Active disable loopbacks stay up until deactivation or disarm code is received Disarming inband 11100 5 seconds The signal is sent inband or over ESF data link HDSL units are disarmed Disarming ESF 0010 0100 1111 1111 4 repetitions Arming time out 2 hours An armed HDSL unit goes to disarmed state Loopup time out Programmable An HDSL unit in loopup goes to from Version D armed state HLXC Note codes are programmable 2 259 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 102 Page 3 of 5 Disarmed State The normal operation mode is the disarmed state Although each HDSL unit is transparent to the data flow each monitors the inband data flow and the ESF data link for the arming sequence The CPE smartjack loopup inband control code sequence arms the loopback capability of all HDSL units at the same time Each HDSL unit arms when the arm sequence code has been received for five seconds The HDSL unit dete
94. installed remove the module from its protective ESD packaging If the HLXC module is installed remove it and inspect for physical damage 2 Version C HLXC only locate the configuration switches on the HLXC module printed circuit board as shown in Figure 516 1 3 Version C HLXC only set the configuration switches as specified in the work order These switch settings do not need to be set if the unit is to be provisioned via the software Otherwise refer to Figure 516 1 for the switch handle settings The following operating parameters are switch selectable Loop 2 enable disable e Loop Power on off Note With loop 2 enabled both HDSL loops will be active allowing a full DS1 payload With loop 2 disabled the first 12 DSO channels will be carried on loop 1 and DSO channels 13 through 24 will be filled with all ones fractional DS1 Note When the Loop Power switch is set to the ON position the HLXC module supplies 130 VDC simplex power to the loops 4 Determine which HLXC slots are to be used referring to your work order and Figure 516 2 Chassis slots 1 1 through 7 4 correspond to DS1 signals 1 through 28 See Table 516 1 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier 2 56 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 516 Page 2 of 6 5 Align the edges of the printed circuit card with the card guides in the chassis Use the injector at the b
95. it is functioning properly The RLXIOR may be installed in either a Soneplex Broadband chassis or a Soneplex Loop Extender chassis Caution enable span power on the RLXIOR module a proper connection must be made between chassis ground and 48 return at a location in the central office following local practices It is recommended that this connection be made outside the Soneplex chassis AN Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded 1 Open the shipping carton and carefully unpack the RLXIOR from the protective packing material See Figure 524 1 2 Setthe configuration switches on the RLXIOR to match the requirement of the work order See Figure 524 2 for the location of switches The following operating parameters are switch selectable e Line Power 130 Vdc or 130 Vdc e Channel Blocking Idle Code 7Fhex or FFhex Note Factory default settings for the RLXIOR switches are 2130 Vdc for Line Power and 7Fhex for Channel Blocking Idle Code 3 Align the edges of the RLXIOR module with the slot guides Use the ejector to press the module into the backplane connector in one of the module locations as shown
96. lt CTAG gt ADENY cr If MA lt ERRCDES cr If comment cr If e 1 ERRCDE Error code 2 Comment Optional free form text that provides more information about the error Acknowledgment Output Syntax When there is a delay of more than two seconds before a response can be sent a brief output message is sent to acknowledge the receipt of the command This response has three components acknowledgment code CT AG If 1 Acknowledgment code values IP In progress e PF Printout follows OK Okay e Repeat later 2 CTAG Correlation code Indicates end of acknowledgment output 2 280 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 105 Page 5 of 8 Autonomous Message Syntax Autonomous messages are used to report alarms events and reports The format is the same as the full response except the identification of output is replaced by lt ALMCDE gt lt ATAG gt lt output code cr If Alarm Codes ALMCDE e C Critical alarm e Major alarm e Minor alarm e AA Automatic message is the autonomously generated correlation tag that the user can use to see if spontaneous outputs have been missed by checking for omissions in the sequence of messages received It starts with a value of 1 and increments until the system is initialized a
97. mapped to uppercase except for TID and CTAG Size of input commands is limited to 512 bytes The following notational conventions are used throughout this TAD cr Carriage return If Line feed e Blank space YY MM DD Year Month Day e HH MM SS Hour Minute Second Indicates zero or more repetitions of expression contained in brackets e One or more parameters contained in brackets are optional e Selection of one and only one of the listed parameters is allowed e lt gt Indicate names of parameters that will be replaced by parameter values in actual TL1 transactions TL1 Command Syntax Any user request is considered a command Commands generally consist of five blocks command block gt lt routing block gt lt access block gt lt correlation block gt lt data block s gt The command block consists of commands verbs and modifiers separated by hyphens lt command verb gt lt modifier gt lt modifier gt For example The command block OPR LPBK contains the command verb OPR OPeRate and the modifier LPBK LooPBacK to provide for the loopback function The command block SET ATTR T1 contains the command verb SET the modifier ATTR ATTRibute and the modifier T1 to provide the mechanism for setting attributes of a T1 circuit 2 277 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 105 Pag
98. one page and the right arrow key moves the screen down one page Each time the screen is moved down one page the last line from the previous screen is displayed as the first line on the new page Each time the screen is moved up one page the first line from the previous screen is displayed as the last line on the new page 3 3 Enter and Return Keys The Enter and Return keys causes the system to act on the data that was entered Selections may be entered into the system in one of two ways 1 By pressing an arrow key and then the Enter or Return key once 2 By pressing the Enter or Return key twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen Page 1 3 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 1 Introduction 3 4 Space Bar Pressing the space bar when the cursor is in a toggle field changes the item at the cursor If the item is selected from a list of options pressing the space bar brings up the next choice 3 5 R Key If you press the key by itself when you in a toggle field the selection will revert to its previous value 3 6 Control Key Special functions are activated by pressing the Control key and another key at the same time as shown in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Control Key Functions HOLDING DOWN THE CONTROL RESULTS IN KEY AND PRESSING Display of the help screen Termination of the session and logging the user out
99. or CSUs Overrides the hardware setting on the HLXR Turns simplex power off Overrides the hardware setting on the HLXR Blocking a channel causes the channel blocking pattern to be transmitted in both directions on the selected channel Enter the pattern you want to use to block the Blank Version C HLXC is fixed at an all 1s pattern channels you selected in the DSO Channel field and is not configurable These fields can be edited to create customized labels When a housekeeping alarm door ajar water on the floor fire alarm etc occurs the name assigned is displayed in the condition column of the Alarm History and Active Alarms screens Note HLXC and HLXR Switch Settings HLXC DSX 1 EQ HLXR LBO Loop Power Loop 2 Operation and HLXR Simplex Power of the module being configured are displayed at the bottom of the screen 2 104 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc continued ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 531 Page 7 of 7 Table 531 1 HLXC Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Unit Service State Toggle IS In Service Places the unit in service and allows equipment alarm reporting by the MPU Must be set to IS for reporting of equipment alarms OOS Out Of Removes unit from service and stops equipment Service alarm reporting by the MPU Service State Toggle IS In Service Places facility in service a
100. or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 4 Use the arrow keys to select System Administration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Select Edit Menu Security from the System Administration menu Press Enter or Return An Edit Menu Security screen with default settings appears as shown in Figure 536 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Privilege toggle field Use the space bar to select the privilege level 1 to 5 The lowest security level is 1 the highest level is 5 Users assigned Level 5 have access to all menu selections Level 5 is assigned to the system administrator Level 3 is often assigned to the operating technician users have access to Levels 1 2 and 3 Level 2 is normally assigned to a local technician users have access to Levels 1 and 2 Users assigned Level 1 have access to only those menus assigned a Level 1 Repeat Step 3 for each Main Menu Selection that you wish to change Note Disregard the QLX Alarm Levels a
101. provisioned chassis is moved to another chassis the chassis unit module configurations may not match the MPU unit configurations These instructions explain how to avoid unwanted data replacements or data conflicts The MPU contains both general configuration data and unit configuration data configuration data can be restored to the MPU by performing a database upload or download procedure The upload is outlined in DLP 554 Configuration Data Upload Command and the download is outlined in DLP 555 Configuration Data Download Command General Configuration Data System administration and maintenance tasks create general configuration data alarm levels PM thresholds system identification port configuration and user account data Unit Configuration Data Individual module configurations create unit configuration data which includes unit service state framing line coding etc Unit configuration data does not need to be re entered as long as the chassis remains powered and transmission units remain installed Unit configuration data is also stored in the transmission units and is loaded back into a non configured MPU automatically Note When installing a replacement MPU module use the same DIP or rotary switch settings on the MPU s printed circuit board as the MPU you are removing Note When an MPU is removed from a powered up chassis the MPU retains both general and unit configuration data for at least 24 hours
102. s pattern causes the span line repeater to consume the maximum amount of power If the current powering the span line is low transmission errors may occur due to the inter symbol interference resulting from the inability of a weak repeater power supply to develop the energy necessary to support the transmission of a long sequence of 175 Framed AII Used as a final confirmation that all network elements in a Zeros circuit are properly optioned with B8ZS for clear channel operation The framed all 0 s pattern consisting of a frame bit followed by an all 0 s payload will only be applied to circuit optioned with B8ZS for clear channel operation Used to determine the ability of network equipment to function properly when transporting signal sequences containing both a maximum of 15 consecutive 0 s during periods of minimum overall pulse density Unframed 1000 1000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 1000 Framed 0100 0100 0000 0000 0000 0100 0100 1000 Used in conjunction with the 1 in 8 pattern Useful when performing test to reveal the presence of incorrectly optioned AMI or B8ZS equipment Use of the 2 in 8 pattern will confirm the circuits ability to support error free transmission e Unframed 0100 0010 0100 0010 Framed 0100 0010 0100 0010 continued 2 219 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 10 of 18 Table 570 1 RTAU
103. the Order Listed 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Momentarily press the LMPTST switch on the APU front panel and verify that all indicators light Connect terminal equipment to Craft port on the front of the MPU Log on to the Craft Interface Clear Alarm History Enter Target Identifier and set date and time now or during provisioning the turn up process Configure DS3 MUX as required Configure ODS2 modules as required Clean and mate fiber optic connectors and adapters as required Connect the test equipment at both ends of the system and perform an end to end test between the Soneplex chassis and the remote module If the Soneplex system being tested is equipped with protection modules Execute Force APS commands through the Craft Interface Perform Manual Force Switch to Protect test on DS3 MUX module Perform APS test on DS3 MUX module Perform Manual Force Switch to Protect Test on ODS2 module Perform APS test on ODS2 module Log off from the Craft Interface system Complete assignment forms and update office records as required by local procedures NTP 003 Page 2 of 2 For Details Go To DLP 504 DLP 526 DLP 527 DLP 528 DLP 529 DLP 530 DLP 507 DLP 510 DLP 537 DLP 511 DLP 512 DLP 513 DLP 514 DLP 564 DLP 523 2 13 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 004 Page 1 of 2 SYS
104. the optical fiber to the module Verify that all indicators are dark off and the module is not engaged with the chassis connectors before proceeding A Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat 1 Set up the Soneplex Broadband system and QFLC or QLX to perform end to end tests Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End to End Tests 2 Identify the offline ODS2 module of the working and protect pair to be tested The STATUS indicator is green and is the only illuminated indicator its ONLINE indicator is extinguished 3 Slide offline ODS2 part way out This disconnects the ODS2 from the chassis and ensures that data passes through the online ODS2 only 4 Perform end to end test and verify error free data Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End to End Tests 5 Using the ODS2 module ejector press the offline module into the chassis until it is properly seated 6 Verify that the STATUS indicator on the offline ODS2 module is green and that its ONLINE indicator is extinguished 2 53 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Sect
105. type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Refer to Figure 575 1 Check that the STATUS indicator on the front panel of the TAU module is green indicating that the module is operating normally 2 To drop a network or customer 1251 signal connect a patch cord from the TX Bantam jack on the front panel of the TAU module to the monitoring equipment Note The 053 MUX must be equipped to perform TAU commands 3 Use the arrow keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 4 Use the arrow keys to se
106. used to limit access to the system When you enter your assigned User Name the Soneplex Broadband system will request a password When you enter your assigned password the Main Menu appears It includes the current software version number top right corner and a copyright insignia A default user ID and password are available for a newly installed system but to ensure system security these should be removed by the system administrator after the system is in operation 3 EDITING FIELDS The keyboard is used to select menus view the various screens and when necessary to enter alpha and numeric information into the system Keyboard operations make use of the alpha and numeric keys arrow keys enter or return key space bar and control key 3 1 Cursor In the Craft Interface system a cursor is used to indicate menu selections option settings and data entry fields The cursor may take the form of a block a highlighted field or a flashing line When selecting a menu the cursor is moved by pressing either the arrow or number keys When selecting an option setting or making a data entry the cursor is moved by pressing the arrow keys 3 2 Arrow Keys The arrow keys are used to move the cursor to indicate menu selections option settings and data entry fields In screens that have more than one page the up and down arrow keys also move the screen up or down one line at a time In the same screens the left arrow key moves the screen up
107. x DLP 504 5 ic uua cg qoi ER On RES DLP 526 Configuration Data Wplead 4 4 4 4 4 4 ume ex RA EX HY eR YU x ER UY xg DLP 554 MPU TOS dor ie cR ois ie ae poi ie DLP 519 Configuration Data Download Command DLP 555 Grab aerae SUA INGOT ER DLP 564 HLXC AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES 442 NTP 009 0 ace Denn SCHON 5 2 DLP 504 Draft System 0008 cu aua caca DLP 526 Alarm History Clearance DLP 527 System DDAA T ime SOING uius quede 333 3 909339 3 8 4293 3323 6 8 9 9 329 8 8 DLP 528 Dog MUN 2 d 3er Ud ae Ge eg eh ES DLP 529 REE padre ap eaa aree seti te d p DLP 531 FLAG and HLXB edere OTIO GE weed DLP 520 BONIS d quc SEO Roo E ET uii eee eRe eee gor Sup Rod DLP 537 Bos TOR dee EX E ERA PET ES ERE RE SUE E DLP 511 ESSI AT TES tipi E ads qtd ant adco d at
108. 0 0100 1111 1111 Down ESF CSU 14FF 0001 0100 1111 1111 Payload Loop Up ESF CSU 32FF 0011 0010 1111 1111 Payload Loop Down User Loop Up Enter 16 value expression using only 175 075 or The toggle and bits can be entered by typing a string of 078 or 1 s in the bit input field located to the right of the designated entry User Loop Enter a 16 value expression using only 175 0 s or The Down bits can be entered by typing a string of 0 s or 1 s in the bit field located to the right of the designated entry NONE Disables any active loop code selected for this field When NONE is selected the Loop Code field displays 16 dashes Note NI means Network Interface device continued 2 221 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 12 of 18 Table 570 1 RTAU Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT BIT ERROR SETUP FIELDS OVERVIEW Bit errors can be injected by the RTAU using the Bit Error Set Up fields These sections are display only fields that are only displayed when the line code setting is INTERNAL The Status field always shows the current status if the line code is INTERNAL but the Error Counts and Elapsed Time fields only show a value when a measurement is being made Error Count Input Range of 0 to Select either Error Count or Error Rate for bit error setup
109. 00 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 2 of 11 Note In the DSI Performance Reports screens Figure 102 1 DS1 15 Minute Figure 102 2 DS1 Daily Figure 102 3 DS1 Summary NE Near End and FE Far End apply to the entire time period e g 00 15 not just the statistics that appear on their respective lines In addition the headings shown over each column apply respectively to each statistic in the column For example in Figure 102 1 FCP applies to the first column first row applies to the first column second row and ESL applies to the first column third row Note In Figure 102 1 DS1 15 Minute Figure 102 2 051 Daily Figure 102 3 051 Summary Figure 102 4 HDSL 15 Minute Figure 102 5 HDSL and Figure 102 6 HDSL Summary certain status abbreviations are used and are described below e COMPL means Completed e PRTL means Partial when all the statistics from the time period have not yet been compiled or when data has been lost means Not Applicable when SF framing is in use 2 301 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 3 of 11 Table 102 1 051 Mon Type Descriptions MON TYPE MEANING LOCATION DESCRIPTION CVL Code Violation Line Count of Bipolar Violations BPV and exc
110. 011 1101 0101 1101 0110 30 minutes 2 231 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 574 Page 1 of 1 TAU INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for installing the Test Access Unit TAU in the chassis and verifying that it is functioning properly The TAU requires no provisioning or periodic maintenance A Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used An ESD grounding post is located on the chassis for connecting the ESD wrist band Ensure that all modules removed from the equipment or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Note For information about installing and testing the TAU which is used with MPU Software Version 5 3 refer to the Soneplex Test Access Unit Installation Instructions manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual 1 Remove the TAU from its protective packaging 2 Insert the TAU into the full height chassis slot labeled TAU as shown in Figure 574 1 until it reaches the backplane connector 3 Using the ejectors fully seat the TAU in the chassis A moderate amount of force may be required to properly seat the module in the backplane connector
111. 090 8 93398 DLP 557 HDSL EQUIPPED CIRCUIT CROSS CONNECTS DLP 515 HL ALARDA LEVEE SERIE ER eed cR eed e dO E Rei ce ER ec cipe tic gal DLP 562 HLX AND HRX STATUS DISPLAY DLP 548 MOO ss sas tet hf St va AA ef A DLP 531 HLX LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION DLP 573 HLXC AND HLXR END TO END TESTS 122223 3 3 33 3040 DLP 520 HLXC AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES NTP 009 HLXC INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 516 INVENTORY DISPLAY 55553 50 eG eee eg DLP 540 LOCAL CRAFT INTERFACE CONNECTION 5 00 TAP 103 LOCAL CRAFT INTERFACE CONNECTION DLP 504 LOOPBACK PROCESS 5 TAD 102 LOOPBACK STATUS COMMANDS DLP 541 MAINTENANGE PINEOSOPITIS a cac 0 TAD 100 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES NTP 005 MENU SECURITY EDITING CROCO ENCORE DLP 536 MODULE INSTALLATION AND TESTING
112. 1 Page 3 of 13 The Circuit ID column displays the circuit identifier or facility name of the circuit in trouble Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference DLP 532 DLP 531 DLP 530 DLP 533 DLP 534 DLX Configuration HLX Configuration ODS2 Module Configuration RLXIOR Configuration RLX Configuration The Condition column displays the alarm condition present on the circuit See Table 101 1 for a listing of the possible alarm conditions The St Status column displays Critical CR Major MJ Minor MN or Event EV indicating the degree of the alarm When an alarm clears it is indicated on the Alarm History screen by the letters CL Events are reported as they occur but are not reported as cleared when they clear Conditions configured as Not Reported are never reported at all The ACO column indicates whether the ACO is active YES or NO for the particular alarm This column is found only on the Active Alarms screen 7 Troubleshoot the problem following local practices Once the problem is located and corrected the alarm 1s cleared and the LEDs return to their normal state Stop You have completed this procedure 2 289 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 4 of 13 ACTIVE ALARMS Legend Access ID Identifier Shelf Grp Slot Site 1 2Lcl 2 Rmt Loop 1 Lp 1 2 Lp 2 Access ID Locn Circuit ID Condit
113. 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 5 Move to the Slot toggle field Select slot number 1 2 3 or 4 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier 6 Move to the Equipment Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL CR MAJOR MJ MINOR MN EVENT EV or NOT RPTD not reported for each field that you wish to change Note Abbreviations of the alarm field options except RPTD will appear in the Active Alarms and Alarm History screens In addition what options you select at any alarm level setting screen will determine whether you will be notified of the alarm Reference DLP 552 Alarm Event Notification Level Setting 2 199 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 563 Page 2 of 2 7 Move to the 251 Facility Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR EVENT or NOT RPTD for each field that you wish to change Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting 8 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure DLX ALARM LEVELS Group 5 Slot Equipment Alarms COMM FAIL DS1 Facility Alarms USTOMER LOOPBACK MINOR ETWORK LOOPBACK MINOR LOS MAJOR T BERL MINOR Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6154 B Figure 563 1 DLX Alarm Level Defaults 2 200 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 564 Page 1 of 1
114. 22020202 FoerBDetails o To Craft Interface System Logon DLP 526 Access Identifier TAD 106 ACO Alarm Cutoff Command DLP 539 Alarm History Display DLP 544 Alarm Summary Display DLP 543 Alarm Troubleshooting TAP 101 Circuit ID Display DLP 566 DLX Status Display DLP 553 MUX Status Display DLP 546 HLX and HRX Status Display DLP 548 HLX Loopback Configuration DLP 573 Local Craft Interface Connection Troubleshooting TAP 103 Loopback Process Description TAD 102 Loopback Status Commands DLP 541 Maintenance Philosophy TAD 100 ODS2 Module Status Display DLP 547 Performance Monitoring Reporting Locations TAD 103 Performance Monitoring Reports Description TAP 102 Performance Monitoring Reports Retrieval DLP 565 Reset LED Test Commands DLP 538 RLX and RLXIOR Status Display DLP 509 Shelf Housekeeping Alarm Labels DLP 550 Shelf Status Display DLP 545 Specifications TAD 101 RTAU Operation DLP 570 2 16 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 005 Page 2 of 2 Do Items Below As Required For Details Go To Note For information about installing testing and operating the Remote Test Access Unit RTAU which is used with MPU Software Version 5 3 refer to the Soneplex RTAU Remote Test Access Unit Installation Instructions manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual TAU Operation DLP 575 TBOS Chassis Daisy Chaining DLP 576 TBOS
115. 2414204 142241424 141041414 EROAA DLP 523 2 8 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 002 Page 1 of 3 MODULE INSTALLATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES Summary This procedure provides instructions for installing the various modules in the installed chassis and verifying operation Installation includes inspecting the chassis for proper installation checking the power supply inserting the modules into the chassis and testing various functions This procedure assumes that the Soneplex Broadband chassis and associated Heat Baffle Fiber Management Panel are installed in the rack and that all power signal and alarm cables are connected This procedure must be performed before attempting to test or operate the entire circuit or system that will be using this equipment A Danger To avoid electric shock be careful when working near HDSL loop connections or telecommunications circuits An electrical potential of 130 volts exists on HDSL loop connections and telecommunications circuits Coming in contact with this high electrical potential will result in death or severe personal injury A Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules
116. 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 526 Page 1 of 2 CRAFT INTERFACE SYSTEM LOGON Summary This procedure provides instructions for logon to the Craft Interface system Logging on consists of connecting the control terminal or host computer to the Soneplex Broadband chassis entering the communication rate user name and password then setting the serial port configuration 1 Connect chassis to control terminal or host computer 7 Reference DLP 504 Local Craft Interface Connection Locate power switch on terminal or computer and turn power on Press Enter or Return If using a computer enter the communications software package resident on the computer At the Enter User Name field on the Logon screen Figure 526 1 enter assigned User Name If no User Name is assigned yet enter SONEPLEX uppercase only Press Enter or Return The Craft Interface requests a password Enter your assigned password or if the SONEPLEX user name was used in Step 3 enter SONEPLEX1 uppercase only Press Enter or Return The welcome message and Main Menu Figure 526 2 should now be displayed on your screen The welcome message includes the current software version number and a copyright insignia If this is your initial use of the Craft Interface System or if you are changing communication device parameter settings perform the Serial Port Configuration procedure Otherwise proceed to Step 7 Note Make the initial
117. 4 Did the STATUS indicator light green e Yes you have completed this procedure e If No replace the TAU and return to Step 1 Stop You have completed this procedure HSW HSP MXW TAU 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU E TAU MODULE Figure 574 1 TAU Mounting Position in the Soneplex Broadband Chassis 2 238 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 575 Page 1 of 5 TAU OPERATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for Summary This procedure provides instructions for operating the Test Access Unit TAU The TAU can be used to drop or insert DS1 signals either toward the network DS3 interface or the customer interface i e the DS1 distribution modules for monitoring or intrusive testing Note For information about operating TAU refer to the Soneplex Test Access Unit Installation Instructions manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the R key to view and select the previous option An input field
118. 40 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 12 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 2 51 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9698 A Figure 541 10 0052 Customer Loopback Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 2 DS1 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS NETWORK Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9496 C Figure 541 10b Remote QLX Network Loopback Screen 2 141 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 13 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands DS14 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type LPBK RQ NETWORK LPBK RQ Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14849 A Figure 541 10c ODS2 SEND LPBK Screen Low Speed Loopback Status Commands 51 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS CUSTOMER Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9699 A Figure 541 11a DLX Customer Loopback Screen 2 142 2000 Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 14 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 5 51 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loop
119. 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 537 Page 1 of 2 FORCE APS COMMANDS Summary This procedure provides instructions for using manual forced switching and automatic protection switching commands with the DS3 MUX and ODS2 modules Executing one of the Force commands forces the working or protect module online Executing the Enable APS or Disable APS command enables or disables Automatic Protection Switching APS Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the R key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help informa
120. 5 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 505 Page 2 of 2 9 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 then Stop You have completed this procedure HSW HSP MXP TAU 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 MPU DS3 MUX UNITS Figure 505 1 053 MUX Locations 2 36 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 506 Page 1 of 5 ODS2 MODULE INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure describes how to install working and protect ODS2 modules in the Soneplex Broadband chassis as well as how to troubleshoot the installation The working ODS2 module must be installed before the protect ODS2 module Safety Considerations Sufficient invisible infrared energy can be emitted from the end of an active fiber or operational transmitter to seriously damage the retina of the eye Danger labels located on the chassis alert you to the potential of exposure to invisible laser radiation Observe the procedures described in the following Danger notice A A Danger Do not look into the ends of any optical fiber Exposure to invisible laser radiation may resul
121. 5 2 Sample 2 291 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 6 of 13 CIRCUIT AID Shelf Number Group Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Site or Loop Number 1 Local or HDSL Loop 1 or 2 Remote or HDSL Loop 2 T1 1 7 2 1 Circuit Identifier Slot Number 1 2 3 or 4 T1 T2 or HDSL EQUIPMENT AID Equipment Type LIU MPU MXP MXW TAU or EXT and Shelf Number Group Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Site or Loop Number 1 Local or HDSL EQPT LIU1 7 2 1 Loop 1 or 2 Remote or HDSL Loop 2 Identifier for Equipment AID Slot Number 1 2 3 or 4 LIU Line Interface Unit MPU Main Processor Unit 053 MUX Protect MXW DS MUX Working TAU Remote Test Access Unit RTAU EXT External 14852 A Figure 101 5 Access Identifier 2 292 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 7 of 13 Table 101 1 Alarm Descriptions Conditions CONDITION GRP MISMATCH GRP MISMATCH GRP 3 MISMATCH GRP 4 MISMATCH ioni D 5 MISMATCH GRP 6 MISMATCH 7 MISMATCH CGA Carrier Group Alarm 6 or more DS1 s in MAJOR alarm CONDITION Contact closure detected at HSKP IN pair on backplane o Contact closure detected at HSKP IN pair 2 on backplane Contact closure detected at HSKP IN pair 3 o
122. 511 Page 1 of 1 DS3 MUX FORCED SWITCH TEST Summary This procedure provides instructions for testing the forced switch capability of the DS3 MUX in the Soneplex Broadband system An end to end data path test is also performed using only the working DS3 MUX The forced switch occurs first to bring the Protect DS3 MUX online then the end to end data path test is repeated Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Identify the offline DS3 MUX its STATUS indicator is green and its ONLINE indicator is extinguished Hold ENABLED button down and momentarily press LMPTST APS on offline DS3 MUX Verify that the DS3 MUX that was offline is now online its ONLINE indicator is now green and DS3 MUX that was online is now offline its ONLINE indicator is extinguished Verify that APS indicator on online DS3 MUX is yellow indicating a forced switch and APS disabled Repeat Step 2 and verify that APS indicator is off Perform end to end test and verify error free data Set up the chassis and perform end to end tests between chassis and remote unit Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX ChassisEnd to End Tests Ref
123. 54 Configuration Data Upload Command for more information Log on to the Craft Interface Reference DLP 526 Craft Interface System Logon Select System Maintenance from the Main Menu using the arrow keys Press Enter or Return The System Maintenance menu displays as shown in Figure 551 1 At the System Maintenance menu select Upload Download Commands Press Enter or Return The Upload Download Commands menu displays as shown in Figure 551 2 At the Upload Download Commands Menu select Execute Software Download Press Enter or Return The following message displays Preparing to execute new software download Are You Sure y n Begin the software download process by pressing Y for yes or cancel the download process by pressing N for no If you press Y all indicators on the APU will be on and the MPU status indicator will flash yellow green The following message displays Download In Progress Craft Logged Out Please Wait Start the program used to transfer the MPU application software from the host computer to the MPU Note You must use the XMODEM protocol to transfer files 2 170 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc 10 11 12 13 14 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 551 Page 2 of 3 Enter v50 dlp source file name from the host computer and start the file transfer process Enter the Version 5 3 MPU software source file name mpu
124. 5xxx bin from the host computer Then start the file transfer process During the download observe the indicators on the MPU and APU modules During the download the MPU Status LED continually flashes green yellow and all APU indicators flash If you cancel a download repeat Step 7 and continue If this fails reset the MPU and restart this procedure from the beginning Note If the download is aborted and a cancel character is sent to the MPU the MPU will reset for a new download attempt immediately The cancel character is part of the protocol supported by most software packages If no cancel character is sent wait two minutes before attempting another software download The MPU takes two minutes to reset when no cancel character is sent Note If the new software has been loaded into the host computer but the download process to the MPU has NOT been initiated resetting the MPU allows the existing earlier version of Version 5 software to reboot If the download has been initiated the earlier version has been destroyed and a full download is necessary As the Version 5 3 MPU software download proceeds the software existing in the MPU module is replaced When the download completes the MPU automatically restarts and runs self test diagnostics The MPU status indicator lights green when the download completes successfully Verify the MPU status indicator is green Yes proceed to Step 13 e If No and the MPU
125. 6 RLX NEND and FEND Locations 2 154 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 545 Page 1 of 2 SHELF STATUS DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for viewing the status of all the modules installed in the selected Soneplex Broadband chassis Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields Usethe arrow keys to select Display Status from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Display Shelf Status from the Display Status menu Press Enter or Return A Shelf Status screen is shown in Figure 545 1 Refer to Figure 545 2 for a help screen that displays a key to the Shelf Status screen Stop You have completed this procedure SHELF STATUS Low Speed Units Group Slot Critical Shelf Alarm 11 Unit Unit Present Equip State Online Alarm s In Service gt lt 3 m Mc Facility In Service HSKP Alarm s Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14870 A Note in Present field means that module is present Figure 545 1 Shelf Status Screen Typical 2 155 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 545 Page 2 of 2 HELP SCREEN press any key to return to MENU On MENU Unit Type Equip State M MUX E
126. 6 1 Access Identifier Display 2 285 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 106 Page 2 of 2 Table 106 1 051 Signal Routing GROUP GROUP GROUP 081 SLOT 081 SLOT DS1 SLOT 051 SIGNAL NUMBER SIGNAL NUMBER SIGNAL NUMBER SIGNAL NUMBER 24 15 2 62 f a d de T wer s 51 25 Cu je qr de xp ose go 2 54 a p d GROUP SLOT GROUP SLOT NUMBER NUMBER DS2 SIGNAL HIGH SPEED UNITS LOW SPEED UNITS 14 HSW HSP MXW MXP 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 MPU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 106 2 Slot Locations GROUP NUMBERS 1982 A 2 286 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 1 of 13 ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING Summary This TAP describes the various alarm screens in the Craft Interface An accurate diagnosis of the Active Alarms or Alarm History screens allows you to determine where the trouble is and dispatch the appropriate technician to isolate and repair the problem 1 X Log on to the Craft Interface The Main Menu will the
127. 70 Page 15 of 18 EQUIPMENT E FACILITY F EQUIPMENT E FACILITY F NETWORK DS3 MUX CUSTOMER NETWORK CUSTOMER gt gt A lt 4 CIRCUIT CIRCUIT UNDER TEST UNDER TEST SPLTB SPLTA SIGNAL SIGNAL PRESENCE PRESENCE DETECTOR DETECTOR TEST SIGNAL TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR GENERATOR 11866 B Figure 570 8 SPLTB and SLPTA A END OFFICE A INTEROFFICE OFFICE Z ZEND noo RTAU RTAU i r T LOOPBACK INSERT DROP LOOPBACK NETWORK p CUSTOMER B i T 1 red CPE SPLTB A A TRANSMISSION PATH B B TRANSMISSION PATH E EQUIPMENT NETWORK F FACILITY CUSTOMER 11867 B 6 SIGNAL PRESENCE DETECTOR O TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR OR UNFRAMED QRS Figure 570 9 Typical Round Robin Test Configuration 2 225 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 16 of 18 OFFICE A INTEROFFICE END FACILITY ZEND INSERT 1 NETWORK 1 LOOPBACK DROP NETWORK 1 1 SPLTE A A TRANSMISSION PATH B B TRANSMISSION PATH E EQUIPMENT NETWORK F FACILITY CUSTOMER SIGNAL PRESENCE DETECTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR 116688 OR UNFRAMED QRS 77 TERMINATED SIGNAL Figure 570 10 Typical End Test Configuration EQUIPMENT E FACILITY F EQUIPMENT E FACILITY F NET
128. 9 1 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the Craft Port Application toggle field Use the space bar to select CRAFT TBOS TL1 or NONE 4 Move the cursor to the Port 1 2 Application toggle field Use the space bar to select TBOS CRAFT TL1 or NONE Selecting TBOS outputs TBOS to Port 1 EIA 422 only Selecting CRAFT or TL1 outputs Craft or TL1 to Port 2 only If Port 2 is configured for CRAFT the Craft port on the front of the MPU can be configured for either TL1 or TBOS EIA 232 At least one system port must be configured as Craft 5 Move the cursor to the Port 3 Application toggle field Use the space bar to select X 25 TBOS CRAFT TL1 INTERNAL or NONE When X 25 is selected all other fields in that category are shown as Not Applicable Reference DLP 558 X 25 Port Configuration 6 Move the cursor to the Craft Port Baud Rate toggle field Use the space bar to select 1200 2400 4800 or 9600 Baud or AUTO 2 165 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 549 Page 2 of 3 Note The Craft port defaults to 9600 Baud When AUTO is selected pressing Enter or 7 8 9 10 Return before logon will determine the communication speed 1200 19200 bps for the session Move the cursor to the Craft Port Parity toggle field Use the space bar to select EVEN ODD or NONE Move the cursor to the Craft Port Data Bits toggle field Us
129. ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 IDC Broadband System Operation and Maintenance Manual V5 3 1037961 RevA ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface COPYRIGHT 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Rights Reserved Printed in the U S A REVISION HISTORY ISSUE 1st Edition Issue 1 1st Edition Issue 2 1st Edition Issue 3 Issue 4 DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY DATE 10 1995 03 1996 01 1998 06 2000 REASON FOR CHANGE Original Added Version 5 1 software update and corrected typographical errors Corrected typographical and artwork errors updated format added TOC 3 level alphabetical task list and expanded related manuals listing changed part number due to technical changes Technical changes Contents herein are current as of the date of publication ADC reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice In no event shall ADC be liable for any damages resulting from loss of data loss of use or loss of profits and ADC further disclaims any and all liability for indirect incidental special consequential or other similar damages This disclaimer of liability applies to all products publications and services during and after the warranty period This publication may be verified at any time by contacting ADC s Technical Assistance Center at 1 800 366 3891 extension 3223 in U S A or Canada or 952 946 3223 outside U S A and Canada or by writing to ADC
130. ARANCE COMMAND DLP 527 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY 2 2 gt gt gt gt 4 44 3449 EHI DLP 544 ALARM SUMMARY BISPERY qe ORG qo p ERG ee d adu dE RUE EROR DLP 543 ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING TAP 101 ALARM EVENT NOTIFICATION LEVEL SETTING DLP 552 ALARMS PROCEDURES RHEE HERRERA Red RE RE Reg NTP 006 RR GS DLP 503 ASSIGNMENT RECORDS DLP 523 CHASSIS DLP 501 CIREUIT ID DISPLAY Liu gt gt meme ee eee DLP 566 CONFIGURATION DATA DOWNLOAD COMMAND DLP 555 CONFIGURATION DATA UPLOAD COMMAND DLP 554 CRAFT INTERFACE SYSTEM DLP 564 CRAFT INTERFACE SYSTEM LOGON DLP 526 DUX ALARM LEVEL SETNING 2 2 DLP 563 DLX AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES
131. Alarm Cut Off Loopback Status Commands Display Inventory Display Circuit IDs Upload Download Commands Test Access Unit Commands L 24 34 4 Siz 6 Fa 8 Press CONTROL A For Assistance Figure 554 1 System Maintenance Menu UPLOAD DOWNLOAD COMMANDS 1 Execute Configuration Data Upload 2 Execute Configuration Data Download 3 Execute Software Download Press CONTROL A For Assistance Figure 554 2 Upload Download Commands Menu DLP 554 Page 2 of 2 5323 A 9449 A 2 177 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 555 Page 1 of 2 CONFIGURATION DATA DOWNLOAD COMMAND Summary This procedure provides instructions for transferring MPU configuration data that was saved on an external device host computer back to an MPU A host computer containing software that can emulate a VT 100 terminal and perform XMODEM file transfers is required This procedure is used to transfer any saved MPU configuration data to a newly installed MPU A Caution Any configuration database from an MPU with Version 3 1 or later software can be downloaded to an MPU with Version 5 software When downloading to an MPU that is not running Version 5 software the MPU software version of the source MPU must match the software version of the destination MPU A Caution This process will modify configuration that could affect traffic Be sure of what you are doing
132. BOS remote interface The TBOS interface provides a reliable means of communicating transmission alarm information between an Alarm Processing telemetry Remote APR unit and the Soneplex Broadband system MPU The MPU contains the processor memory and communication facilities to interface with a centralized system administration control center The MPU monitors the alarm status conditions of each module installed in the same chassis as well as the alarm status conditions of the remote modules that are connected to them The alarm status conditions are saved in MPU memory for transmission to the centralized administration center via TBOS protocol The MPU Main Processing Unit interfaces internally to the TBOS communications link protocol link to report alarm status for local and remote modules control and report loopback configuration and control and report protection switching status The MPU interfaces externally to a TBOS communications link protocol TBOS is the basic communications format used by the customer provided E2A Alarm Processing telemetry Remote APR equipment The E2A APR allows the concentration of up to 504 alarm indications onto a four wire alarm bus The E2A APR operates with a centralized alarm surveillance reporting system similar to the Bell Network Monitoring and Analysis NMA System and TASC Telecommunications Alarm Surveillance and Control or the DFMS Digital Facility Maintenance System AT amp T Compatibility B
133. C Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 546 Page 2 of 2 DS3MUX STATUS Working Protect Unit Online Board Fail NO Mate Comm Fail RX DS3 Lpbk NO DS3 RX Status DS3 Framing Format M13 APS Status 5 ENABLED APS Lockout NO Splitter Present YES TAU Present YES Group 1 2 4 eB 6 UM sm Slot 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 RX DS1 Lpbk Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6679 B Figure 546 2 053 MUX Status Screen 2 158 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 547 Page 1 of 1 0052 MODULE STATUS DISPLAY Summary Use this command to display the status of the working and protect Soneplex ODS2 modules installed in the selected chassis Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Display Status from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Display ODS2 Status from the Display Status menu Press Enter or Return A Display ODS2 Status screen is shown in Figure 547 1 3 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier Stop You have completed this procedure ODS2 STATUS Group 3 LOCAL RE
134. CONTINUITY 03 95 RECOVERY 03 95 5 1 6 1 1 RECOVERY Page 1 of Press CONTROL A for assistance E E 2 5 2 5 2 2 2 2 y gt 5 5 6677 Figure 101 3 Alarm History Screen MPU V5 1 Sample ALARM HISTORY Legend Access ID Identifier Shelf Grp Slot Site 1 2Lcl 2 Rmt Loop 1 Lp 1 2 Lp 2 Locn Circuit ID Condition 03 98 38 EOPT LIU1 1 1 2 HLXR INCOMPATIBLE 03 98 38 54 EQPT LIU1 1 1 2 HLXR INCOMPATIBLE 03 98 37 00 T1 6 1 2 LOF 03 98 5333000 TI 6951 1 LOF 03 98 36 57 HDS 6 LOF 03 98 36 57 HDS 6 LOF 03 98 36 52 HDS 6 LOF 03 98 36 52 HDS 6 LOF 03 98 36 48 HDS 6 LOF 03 98 36 48 HDS 6 RECOVERY 03 98 36 48 HDS 6 LOF 03 98 36 48 HDS 6 RECOVERY 03 98 36 36 HDS 6 RECOVERY 03 98 36 36 HDS 6 RECOVERY 03 98 36 34 HDS 6 RECOVERY 03 98 36 34 HDS 6 RECOVERY 03 98 36 32 HDS 6 DC CONTINUITY i nj 2 BREE E E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page 1 of Press CONTROL A for assistance 11378 A Figure 101 4 Alarm History Screen MPU V
135. CP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 7 of 11 HS HSW HSP UNPROT RESET RESET SW TO HS NET HS NET HS A NET HS B NET HS B NET HSP LPBK ON LPBK OFF LPBK OFF LPBK ON LPBK OFF 9 10 HS APS DIS 18 HSACUS HSACUS HS B CUS LPBK LPBK LPBK ON OFF OFF MX MX PROT UNPROT 39 40 MXP RESET 47 48 ATT RESERVED 64 Note Bit definitions for High Speed HS or MUX MX modules are not significant when the MPU is installed in the Soneplex Loop Extender chassis Figure 104 3 Command Display 1 2 212 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 8 of 11 L2 L3 L3 L4 L4 EQ OFF EQ ON EQ OFF EQ ON EQ OFF 3 4 5 6 7 8 D3 04 005 005 14 16 32 D4 B8ZS 40 L1 UNPROT 48 ATT RESERVED 64 Note Bit definitions for High Speed HS or MUX MX modules are not significant when the MPU is installed in the Soneplex Loop Extender chassis Note Command Displays 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 are the same as display 2 except for the DS1 signal numbers and chassis slot numbers One group of four mounting slots is displayed on each command display Figure 104 4 Command Displays 2 through 8 2 213 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 9 of 11 Table 104 4 Compressed TBOS Scan Display Definitions DISPLAY UNIT
136. CRAFT INTERFACE SYSTEM LOGOFF Summary This procedure provides instructions for logging off the Craft Interface system 1 Press CONTROL D to log off Note You will be logged off automatically if a period of keyboard inactivity exceeds threshold default is 30 minutes You can change this threshold at the Serial Port Configuration menu The change will take effect the next time you log on the Craft Interface 2 If you are using a terminal turn the power off If using a host computer exit the communications software then turn the power off Stop You have completed this procedure 2 201 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 565 Page 1 of 3 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS RETRIEVAL Summary This procedure provides instructions for retrieving 051 and HDSL 15 PM Daily PM and Summary PM reports Performance Monitoring reports are based on the data contained in the MPU memory 1 10 Log to the Craft Interface Reference DLP 526 Craft Interface System Logon Use the arrow keys to select Performance Monitoring from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Performance Monitoring menu is shown in Figure 565 1 Use the arrow keys to select PM Reports from the Performance Monitoring menu Press Enter or Return A Performance Monitoring Reports menu is shown in Figure 565 2 Select DS1 PM Reports or HDSL PM Reports from th
137. CTED Designates that equipment APS is available UNPROTECTED UNPROTECTED Designates that equipment APS is not available continued 2 97 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 530 Page 3 of 3 Table 530 1 ODS2 Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT T2 Service State Toggle Leave this field at OOS at this time to avoid undesirable reporting of alarms Select IS after completing the remaining configurations BER Alarm Toggle Setto OFF or set between The average Bit Error Ratios of both the Threshold 10 6 and 10 10 incoming optical signals are monitored by the ODS2 By monitoring the ODS2 is capable of triggering a minor alarm when any of the monitored signals degrades below the BER threshold level BER Switch Toggle Set between 1074 and 107 This sets the threshold at which the APS will be 6 Threshold 10 executed Provision Toggle YES Brings up default settings and allows NO configuration changes set for each T1 Facility not provisioned Service State Toggle Leave this field at OOS at this time to avoid undesirable reporting of alarms OOS Select IS after completing the remaining configurations Line Code Toggle Alternate Mark Inversion AMI set for each T1 B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Circuit Identifier Input Enter up to 20 characters Use alphanumeric characters
138. Craft Interface connection to the Craft port on the front of the MPU Initial communication parameter settings for this port are 9600 baud no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Reference DLP 549 Serial Port Configuration Note Changes to port configurations take effect when you log off and then log back on to the system Reference DLP 564 Craft Interface System Logoff Use the arrow or number keys to select a sub menu After selecting a sub menu press Enter or Return to move to the menu you have selected Note The second line from the bottom of the screen displays any sub menus available in the selection that is highlighted Stop You have completed this procedure 2 87 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 526 Page 2 of 2 Welcome to ADC SONEPLEX Shelf Interface Version 5 1 2 C Copyright 1997 ADC Telecommunications Inc Enter User Name 10454 A Figure 526 1 Craft Interface Logon Screen Welcome to ADC SONEPLEX Shelf Interface Version C Copyright 1997 ADC Telecommunications Inc SONEPLEX MAIN MENU Alarms Display Status Unit Configuration System Administration System Configuration System Maintenance Performance Monitoring Display Shelf ODS2 QLX HLX DLX RLX Status Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6659 D Figure 526 2 Craft Interface Main Menu 2 88 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP
139. DLP 532 DLP 522 DLP 337 DLP 511 DLP 512 DLP 564 DLP 523 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 011 Page 1 of 2 RLX OR RLXIOR AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES Summary This procedure provides instructions for performing end to end tests between the Version A or Version B RLX modules or RLXIOR modules and the remote system Performing an end to end test includes connecting the cross connect jumper wires and then sending a test signal between the two systems This procedure assumes that the T1 facility between the central office and the repeater is functional and that the RLX modules to be tested have already been installed This procedure must be performed before attempting to operate the entire circuit or system that will be using this equipment AN Warning prevent electrical shock never install telephone equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm When installing or modifying telephone lines disconnect lines on the network side before working with uninsulated lines or terminals A Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded Do Item
140. DLP 571 Page 2 of 2 slg L HOLDERS D VOLTAGE SWITCH 5858 B Figure 571 1 Streaker Module 5852 D Figure 571 2 STK Front Panel 2 230 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 572 Page 1 of 1 VERSION D OR LATER HLXC VOLTAGE TO HLXR TEST Summary This procedure provides instructions for measuring DC voltage and DC current being supplied by the Version D or later HLXC to the Version D or later HLXR The V V I and I jacks provide monitor access to the voltage and current supplied to the HDSL Repeater HRX if present and HLXR through the HDSL span Current measurements are taken as the voltage drop across a 10 ohm resistor Measure DC Voltage 1 Select VDC on the VOM and if so equipped select a voltage scale of 300 volts or higher 2 Refer to Figure 572 1 Insert the black test probe into the V test jack and insert the red test probe into the V test jack A typical meter reading should be approximately 130 VDC with no HRX present or approximately 260 VDC with HRX present Measure DC Current Note The current test is not available on the Version module 3 Select VDC on the VOM and if so equipped select the millivolt scale 4 Insert the black test probe into the I test jack and insert the red test probe into the I test jack The millivolt reading divided by 10 is the DC current in milliamps
141. ED BACK RECEIVE LOS TRANSMIT EXZ RECEIVE AIS Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6152 C Figure 561 1 ODS2 Alarm Levels Screen 2 194 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 561 Page 3 of 3 Table 561 1 0052 Alarm Level Defaults 2 195 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 562 Page 1 of 3 HLX ALARM LEVEL SETTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for setting HLX Alarm Levels Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or
142. EDs then turn yellow and remain yellow until self test diagnostics are completed Following successful completion of self test diagnostics the front panel LEDs appears as follows STATUS Green indicates successful completion of self test diagnostics LPBK Off NET LOS BER Off LINE LOS BER Off LO X stat A LPBK LOS NET gen 11784 A Figure 524 4 RLXIOR Front Panel 2 79 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 524 Page 5 of 5 5 If the LED indicators respond as described proceed to Step 6 otherwise refer to the following to isolate the problem STATUS is red The RLXIOR module has failed self test diagnostics Remove and reinsert the module then wait while it again performs self test diagnostics If the STATUS LED turns red at the end of the second self test the module is defective replace the module then repeat Steps 1 through 4 NET LOS BER is red A DS1 signal is not being received from the network NET LOS BER is yellow The error rate of the DS1 network signal exceeds the threshold value default value is 10 7 LINE LOS BER is red A DS1 signal is not being received from the line LINE LOS BER is yellow error rate of the 1251 line signal exceeds the threshold value default value is 10 7 6 Press the LMPTST switch on the APU to verify that all the LEDs o
143. ENANCE PROCEDURES obo odor ob e ood ord b dopo NTP 005 Craft Interface System LOJON UR NOE EUR EOS EGO eR DLP 526 Bipcesa 22 9 dd abo d dod Ed od d od d dd d od d d Edd d oo d TAD 106 ACO CONAN oie 4 praedi S IE OE ROI AE DLP 539 Alan PERO DISQUS dodo dL 3 4 73 4 474 374 474734374 3 dd Ld DLP 544 Alarm Summary DISMAY aun deed DLP 543 ADS TOMS Aca cd Aca bcd Aca Dc Ac bo Jc cid d TAP 101 35444 DLP 566 EIS SINE DOM esu o Laura costis bil abet dup uns d dea cbe tu DLP 553 DSS MIX iiec dubia DLP 546 Dual Repeater Incompatibility BIagrni sis TAP 104 HLX and HRX Status Display aues see Re E OE ER eee DLP 548 FEX DLP 573 Local Craft Interface Connection Troubleshooting 2 0 2 cc eee eee eee TAP 103 Lbopback Process Descilplielir TAD 102 Loopback Status COmmarde uuo ses ES RO n E eor e E E COR E OR OE EE DLP 541 Maintenant PhiloSODIM 1 uuu ng anh 29 30932036329 3093003003
144. EPC or REPR indicating the location of the alarm Figure 542 2 Tl HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND locations Figure 542 3 HDSL HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations Figure 542 4 DLX NEND locations Figure 542 5 ODS2 NEND locations and Figure 542 6 RLX NEND and FEND Locations show FEND NEND REPC and REPR locations and descriptions for HLXC HRX HLXR DLX ODS2 and RLX systems The third column Circuit Identifier displays the circuit or facility name assigned in the configuration menu This is also the circuit in trouble The fourth column Condition displays the alarm condition present on the circuit Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting The fifth column Status displays CR Critical MJ Major MN Minor or EV Event indicating the degree of the alarm The sixth column indicates whether the Alarm Cut Off has been activated YES or NO for a given alarm Stop You have completed this procedure 2 146 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 542 Page 2 of 4 ACTIVE ALARMS Legend Access ID Identifier Shelf Grp Slot Site 1 Lcl 2 Rmt Loop 1 Lp 1 2 Lp 2 Access ID Condition Status OPTICAL LOS NO OPTICAL LOF NO RECOVERY NO LOF NO T BE NO T SN NO LOF NO T BER NO T SNR NO RECOVERY NO LOF NO T BE NO T SN NO LOF NO T BE NO T SN NO
145. FEND count of Loss Of Frame or Remote Alarm Indication RAJ failures within the interval This is also called a Yellow alarm A failure is counted when the failure condition transitions from OFF to ON Failure count is independent of the duration in seconds of the failure condition ESL FE Errored Second Line FEND second in which there occurred one or more BPVs or more EXZs or one or more LOS defects Derived from Line Code violation indicator in the PRM CVP FE Code Violation Path FEND Count of CRC errors in ESF format Derived from PRM GBIT G1 G6 indicators Event SL indicator or the occurrence of an RAI ESP FE Errored Second Path FEND This is a second in which there occurred one or more CVP errors one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects Derived from PRM G6 SE or Slip failure SESP FE Severely Errored FEND This is a second in which there occurred more than Second Path some user specified value of CVP errors one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects CSSP FE Controlled Slip FEND second in which one or more controlled frame slips second Path occurred Derived from PRM SL indicator ASP FE Unavailable Second FEND count of second s in which the DS1 signal is not available A signal becomes unavailable upon the completion of ten consecutive SESPs A signal becomes available again at the completion of ten consecutive seconds with no SESPs When
146. G DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14850 A Figure 541 12c RLX SEND LPBK Screen 2 145 2000 Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 542 Page 1 of 4 ACTIVE ALARMS DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying only the currently active alarms for all circuits in the system Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields M Note Pressing the R key clears the screen and displays only the current alarm status 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Display Active Alarms from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return Display Active Alarms screen is shown in Figure 542 1 3 A maximum of 112 entries is displayed If the list is too long to fit on one screen use the Up Down keys to scroll through the entries one line at a time Use the right arrow key to move down one screen at a time Use the left arrow key to move up one screen at a time Pressing CONTROL R queries the database for all currently active alarms and a new list is displayed The first column Access Identifier AID identifies an entity in the Soneplex Broadband system to which the alarm condition pertains Different alarm conditions in the Soneplex Broadband system result in different types of AIDs The second column Locn displays NEND FEND R
147. G connected in the E direction and an SPD connected to the signal from the F direction SPLTE SPLTE mode indicates a split in both the A and B transmission paths An SPD is connected to the line incoming from the E direction and a TSG is connected to the line outgoing to the E direction The line outgoing in the F direction is connected to a QRSS source and the line incoming from the E direction is terminated by the nominal characteristic impedance of the line SPLTF SPLTF indicates a split in both the A and B transmission paths with a TSG connected to the line outgoing to the F direction and an SPD connected to the line incoming from the F direction The line outgoing in the E direction is connected to a QRSS source and the line incoming from the E direction is terminated by the nominal characteristic impedance of the line SPLTEL SPLTEL indicates a split in both the A and B paths and connects an SPD to the line incoming from the E direction and a TSG to the line outgoing the E direction similar to SPLTE mode The signal in the F direction is looped back continued 2 217 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 8 of 18 Table 570 1 RTAU Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT EQUIPMENT SETUP FIELDS continued Mode Toggle SPLTFL SPLTFL indicates a split in both the A and B paths and continued c
148. ITH 0052 AND QLX MODULES LOW SPEED T1 SYSTEM WITH DLX MODULE LOW SPEED ull A m x T1 SYSTEM WITH RLX MODULE LOW SPEED Ul A 2 3 The SEND LPBK option is only available in the Soneplex Broadband System at the Local command toggle field on the Loopback Status Commands screen when the DS1 Loopback Mode field on the 053 MUX Configuration screen is configured as C Bit parity Note When a customer CPE loopback is in progress the network output signal is returned to the network as a keep alive for network equipment However when a network loopback is in progress an unframed all 1s signal AIS is transmitted to the customer interface 2 135 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 7 of 16 High Speed Loopback Status Commands Unit Location COMMANDS Loopback ACT NET STATUS Unit Type DS3MUX Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6666 C Note Do not perform a DS3 loopback when the Soneplex Broadband chassis is connected to a 053 CAM unit in the Soneplex CCAS system Figure 541 5 053 MUX Network Loopback Screen Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 4 DS1 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11381 A Figure 541 6a HLXC Customer Loopback Screen 2 136 6 2000 ADC Tel
149. Interface Description TAD 104 Transaction Language 1 Interface Description TAD 105 Version C HLXC to HLXR Voltage and Current Test DLP 568 Version D or Later HLXC to HLXR Voltage and Current Test DLP 572 Craft Interface System Logoff DLP 564 2 17 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 006 Page 1 of 1 ALARMS PROCEDURES Summary The following procedures can be used to display alarms and locate trouble in a Soneplex system using the Craft Interface device They may be performed in any order Do Items Below As Required For Details Go To Active Alarms Display DLP 542 Alarm History Clearance Command DLP 527 Alarm History Display DLP 544 Alarm Summary Display DLP 543 2 18 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance MPU VERSION 5 3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES NTP 007 Page 1 of 1 Summary This procedure is used to install MPU Version 5 3 software on an MPU To perform this procedure a host computer with VT 100 emulation and XMODEM file transfer capability is required The application software requires 12 to 17 minutes to transfer depending on the type of host computer and the communication program used MPU Version 5 3 software can only be downloaded to MPU Version 5 3 hardware Do Items Below in the Order Listed 1 The following tools and equipment
150. June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 576 Page 1 of 2 TBOS CHASSIS DAISY CHAINING Summary This procedure provides instructions for daisy chaining one TBOS link to several chassis configured for compressed TBOS Up to four chassis can be connected in this manner 1 2 3 4 Assign a different address in the range 0 through 7 to each of the compressed displays available on the link Reference DLP 549 Serial Port Configuration Make sure each chassis the chain has an MPU installed Reference DLP 502 MPU Installation and Testing Reference DLP 519 MPU Replacement and Testing Remove the termination strap from the Berg jumper pins labeled JD 13 from each MPU s PC board except the last one in the chain as shown in Figure 576 1 Make connections between chassis from each Port 1 to from each Port 1 Tx to Tx from each Port 1 Rx to Rx and from each Port 1 Rx to Rx as shown in Figure 576 2 Refer to the Soneplex Broadband System Chassis Installation Manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual for wiring instructions Stop You have completed this procedure 2 244 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 576 Page 2 of 2 BERG JUMPER JD 13 n El LAST ALL OTHER CHASSIS CHASSIS IN CHAIN NO STRAP
151. K CONFIGURATION Group 6 Slot 1 Circuit ID HLXC Activation Code 1101001111010011 HLXC Programmable Lpbk DISABLED HLXR NID Loopback UNIT SWITCH HLXR Activation Code 1100011101000010 HLXR Programmable Lpbk DISABLED HRX Activation Code NOT APPL HRX Programmable Lpbk NOT APPL Common Deactivate Code 1001001110010011 Lpbk Timeout Disable Code 1101010111010110 Lpbk Timeout Period 30 minutes Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6697 B Note Activation Code is equivalent to Programmable Code Figure 573 2 HLX Loopback Configuration Screen MPU V5 1 Without an HRX 2 233 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 573 Page 3 of 6 HLX LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION Group 6 Slot 1 Circuit LXC Activation Code 0100 010011 LXC Programmable Lpbk DISABLE LXR NID Loopback UNIT SWITCH LXR Activation Code A 0001 000010 LXR Programmable Lpbk DISABLE RX Activation Code 0001 000001 RX Programmable Lpbk DISABLE Common Deactivate Code 001001110010011 Lpbk Timeout Disable Code 01010111010110 Lpbk Timeout Period 30 minutes HLXR NID Loopback Switch Setting ENABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 8113 A Note Activation Code is equivalent to Programmable Code Figure 573 3 HLX Loopback Configuration Screen MPU V5 1 With One HLX LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION Group 5
152. LXIOR Configuration Fields continued TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Input 16 binary characters 078 These codes can be set to any 16 bit 175 must be entered binary value except all Os all 1s or a Input This disables loopup time out Active loopbacks stay up until deactivation or disarm NID Loop Down code is 1101 0011 1101 0011 value that is already used in another 16 bit code The Loopback Activation Code signal is sent inband RLX units go to loopup state when they are in armed state Loopup is activated for selected units Detection time is 3 secs The signal is sent inband Units 1001 0011 1001 0011 state go back to armed state Detection time is 5 secs 1101 0101 1101 0110 received Detection time is 3 secs Input Enter a number from 0 to This represents the minutes the loopback 0 minutes 255 remains in effect before reverting to the non loopback state Setting the loopback time out period to 0 disables the time out feature AIS Toggle 15 If the system detects an LOS Loss of Signal from the customer an AIS is sent to the network DS1 CUTOFF If the system detects an LOS from the customer the signal is cut off and no signal is transmitted to the network Toggle for DSO Channel blocking or blank for normal operation for each of the 24 DSO channels Toggle IS In Service OOS Out Of Service Removes unit from service and stops equipment alarm rep
153. LXR module AN 10 11 12 13 Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields Connect a DS3 test set with DS1 option to the cross connect or to the RX and TX connections at the rear of the chassis See Figures 520 1 and 520 2 Identify the HLXC module corresponding to the DS1 circuit to be tested Identify the HLXR module corresponding to the DS1 circuit to be tested Connect the DS1 Test Set RX to the NET OUT jack on the front panel of the HLXR module Connect the DS1 Test Set TX to the NET IN jack on the front panel of the HLXR module Using the Craft Interface verify that the 053 MUX is EQUIPPED and is IN SERVICE Reference DLP 529 053 MUX Configuration Using the Craft Interface verify that the HLXC module to be tested is EQUIPPED and IN SERVICE and the DS1 to be tested is PROVISIONED and IN SERVICE Reference DLP 531 HLX Configuration Insert a test signal into the DS1 to be tested using the DS3 test set with DS1 option Verify that all alarm indicators on the chassis out and the DS1 test set at HLXR module NET OUT jack
154. MOTE Working Protect Working Protect Unit Online Status HSKP1 HSKP2 5 N A Optical Status E LOS Optical Comm Fail NO Laser Degrade Mate Comm 1 N A Config Mismatch NO Version Mismatch NO Board Fail NO Optical BER Alarm APS Status APS Lockout DS1 Number DS1 Online Status DS1 Lpbk Active Receive DS1 LOS Receive DS1 AIS 6140 B Figure 547 1 ODS2 Status Screen 2 159 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 548 Page 1 of 5 HLX AND HRX STATUS DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying the status of the HLX modules installed in the central office chassis the associated HLX modules at the remote end of the circuit and the HRX modules Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Display HLX Status from the Display Status menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select HLX Status from the Display Status menu Press Enter or Return Refer to Table 548 1 for descriptions of status screens and status locations displayed on the screens 3 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier 4 Move to the Slot toggle field Select slot number 1 2 3 or 4 Stop You have completed this procedure Table 548 1 Status Locatio
155. MX NET OFFLINE UNPROT DIS LBPK 5 52 54 5 7 5 9 7 5 ACO ATT RESERVED 63 64 Note Bit definitions for High Speed HS or MUX MX modules are not significant when the MPU is installed in the Soneplex Loop Extender chassis Figure 104 1 Expanded Scan Display 1 2 210 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 6 of 11 L1 L2 L3 L4 EGPT L1 L2 L4 FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL RMT FAIL RMT FAIL RMT 1 2 3 4 L1 LINK L2 LINK L3 LINK L4 LINK L1 RMT L2 RMT L4 RMT ALM ALM ALM ALM LINK ALM LINK ALM LINK ALM 9 10 11 12 13 16 D1 SIG 2 SIG D3 SIG D4 SIG D1 RMT D2 RMT FAIL FAIL FAIL FAIL SIG FAIL SIG FAIL 17 18 19 20 L1 RMT L1 RMT L2 RMT L2 RMT HSKP A HSKP B HSKP A HSKP B 25 26 27 28 L4 UNEG 36 D1WKG D2 WKG D4 WKG LOCLPBK LOCLPBK LOC LPBK D1 PROT D2 PROT D4 PROT D1 PROT D2 PROT D4 PROT C REM REM REM LPBK LPBK LPBK L1 L1 ATT OFFLINE S RESERVED Note Bit definitions for High Speed HS or MUX MX modules are not significant when the MPU is installed in the Soneplex Loop Extender chassis Note Scan Displays 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 are the same as display 2 except for the DS1 signal numbers and mounting slot numbers One group of four mounting slots is displayed on each scan display Figure 104 2 Expanded Scan Displays 2 through 8 2 211 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc AD
156. Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Note When using DLX modules in a group NEVER install ODS2 modules in of the unused slots in the group 1 Remove the module from the protective packaging if required Refer to your work order and determine which DLX slots are to be used DLX chassis slots are shown in Figure 521 1 Chassis slots 1 1 through 7 4 correspond to 1251 signals 1 through 28 as shown in Table 521 1 Reference 106 Access Identifier 2 Align module with the slots and slide module into the chassis Using the ejector press the DLX module into the chassis until it is properly seated 3 Press LMPTST switch on the APU Are all indicators lighted If Yes continued to Step 4 If No replace DLX module and go to Step 1 4 Repeatentire procedure for each DLX module Stop You have completed this procedure 2 70 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 521 Page 2 of 2 1to 28 DLX UNITS HSW HSP MXW MXP 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU 66 HEE
157. ND TO END TEST PROCEDURES Summary This procedure provides instructions for performing end to end tests between a central office Version C D E or G HLXC module and a remote Version E or Version D HLXR module Performing an end to end test includes connecting the cross connect jumper wires verifying that the HDSL loops synchronize and then sending a test signal between the two systems This procedure assumes that installation of the HLXC modules the remote module enclosure and the remote HLXR module is complete This procedure must be performed before attempting to operate the entire circuit or system that will be using this equipment Danger 7o avoid electric shock be careful when working near HDSL loop connections or telecommunications circuits An electrical potential of 130 volts exists HDSL loop connections and telecommunications circuits Coming in contact with this high electrical potential will result in death or severe personal injury AN Warning prevent electrical shock never install telephone equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm When installing or modifying telephone lines disconnect lines on the network side before working with uninsulated lines or terminals AN Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when t
158. NG REPORTS DLP 565 continued 2 2 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance ALPHABETICAL TASK LIST continued RESET LED TEST COMMANDS EA T DLP 538 BERE ALARM LEVEL SERIE qr sede RO EROR Rc DLP 518 OR RLXIOR AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST 5 NTP 011 RIA CONFIGURATION RUE DLP 534 RLX INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 525 REX ANE REXIOBR STATUS DISPLAY 71 ua uad o9 3 0 309 9 dx eWeek ae ERE EQ ERR CQ Oi e qs DLP 509 RLX OR RLXIOR TO REPEATER VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TEST DLP 567 RLX EQUIPPED CIRCUIT CROSS CONNECTS DLP 569 RUMOR CONFIGURATION 2222 DLP 533 INSTALLATION AND DLP 524 RTAU INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 517 ATAU OPERATION DLP 570 SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION DLP 549 SHELF HOUSEKEEPING ALARM 5
159. NTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Display Status from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Usethe arrow keys to select Display DLX Status from the Display Status menu Press Enter or Return DLX Status screen is shown in Figure 553 1 3 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 4 Move to the Slot toggle field Select slot number 1 2 3 or 4 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier Stop You have completed this procedure DLX STATUS Group 5 Slots 1 Circuit ID DS1 Lpbk Active LOS DS1 BER Thresh Exceeded Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6145 B Figure 553 1 DLX Status Screen 2 175 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 554 Page 1 of 2 CONFIGURATION DATA UPLOAD COMMAND Summary This procedure provides instructions for copying the current MPU configuration data to an external device host computer for transfer to another MPU A host computer containing software that can emulate a VT 100 terminal and perform XMODEM file transfers is required Use this command to save the current MPU configuration data before installing a new 1 replacement MPU in the chassis 1 Use the arrow keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return The System Maintenance menu is shown in Figure 554 1 At the S
160. O Setting IN DS1 Loopback Mode C BIT DS3 Framing Format Status Display Only M13 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6660 C Figure 529 4 DS3 MUX Configuration Screen 2 94 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 529 Page 4 of 4 Table 529 2 053 MUX Configuration Fields FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Unit Equipment Toggle Equipped Sets all other fields to default values UNEQUIPPED establishes communication with the MPU and allows the MPU to process equipment alarms Module must be set to EQUIPPED before remaining selections are allowed UNEQUIPPED No communication with the MPU Unit Service Toggle SERVICE Places the unit in service and allows OUT OF SERVICE State equipment alarm reporting by the MPU Must be set to IS for reporting of equipment alarms OUT OF Removes the unit from service and stops SERVICE equipment alarm reporting by the MPU MUX Protect Toggle Protected Designates that equipment APS is available UNPROTECTED Status UNPROTECTED 0681808108 that equipment APS is not available Facility Service Toggle SERVICE Allows facility alarm reporting by the MPU OUT OF SERVICE State Must be set to IS for reporting of facility alarms OUT OF Stops facility alarm reporting by the MPU SERVICE Transmit LBO Toggle IN Inserts a Line Build Out LBO equivalent to IN Setting 0 to 224 feet OU
161. ON AND TESTING PROCEDURES NTP 002 MPU ALARM LEVEL SETTING DLP 559 MPU CONFIGURATION DATA SAVE AND TRANSFER PROCEDURES NTP 008 MPU INSPALLATION AND TESTING deae RR RR Rx Ren DLP 502 MPU REPLACEMENT AND TESTING DLP 519 MPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD DLP 551 MPU VERSION 5 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND TESTING 5 NTP 007 0052 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND QFLC QLX CHASSIS END TO END TESTS DLP 510 0052 MODULE ALARM LEVEL DLP 561 0052 MODULE AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES NTP 003 0052 MODULE APS TEST DLP 514 0052 MODULE CONFIGURATION DLP 530 0052 MODULE FORCED SWITCH TEST THROUGH THE CRAFT DLP 513 0052 MODULE INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 506 0052 MODULE STATUS DISPLAY DLP 547 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTING LOCATIONS TAD 103 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS DESCRIPTION
162. OPEN OPEN OPEN 0 133 FT SPAN POWER CLOSED OPEN OPEN 133 TO 266 FT CLOSED ON OPEN CLOSED 266 TO 399 FT OPEN OFF CLOSED CLOSED OPEN 399 TO 533 FT CLOSED CLOSED 22 5 DB CLOSED OPEN 15 NID LOOP CODE RECOGNITION OPEN CLOSED 7 5DB CLOSED ENABLE OPEN OPEN 0DB CONFIGURATION SWITCH PLACEMENT E o E 6262 A Figure 525 1 Version A RLX Configuration Switches 2 83 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 525 Page 4 of 6 CHANNEL BLOCKING LINE POWER IDLE CODE OR 7428 B Figure 525 2 Placement of B1 RLX Jumpers CHANNEL BLOCKING LINE POWER IDLE CODE OR anu nan 130V 130V 7035 A Figure 525 3 Placement of B2 RLX Jumpers 2 84 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 525 Page 5 of 6 1 to 28 RLX UNITS HSW HSP MXW 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU 66 cog
163. OS at this time to avoid undesirable reporting of alarms Set this field to IS after completing the configuration of the remaining fields Framing Format Toggle AUTO The system automatically detects and establishes the current frame format UNFRAMED FT ONLY SF or ESF It then displays AUTO and the frame format Extended Super Frame BER Threshold Toggle From 1073 to 1079 The average Bit Error Ratios of the incoming DS1 signals are monitored by the HLXC By monitoring BERs the HLXC is capable of triggering an alarm when any of the monitored signals degrades below the BER threshold level HLXC TI Line Code Fixed Locked at NOT APPL HLXC DSX 1 EQ Fixed Locked at NOT APPL Toggle Note HLXC and HLXR Switch Settings HLXC DSX 1 EQ HLXR LBO Loop Power Loop 2 Operation and HLXR Simplex Power of the module being configured are displayed at the bottom of the screen continued 2 101 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 531 Page 4 of 7 Table 531 1 HLXC Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT HLXR Line Code Toggle Alternate Mark Inversion AMI B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution AUTO Specifies that the T1 line code transmitted by the HLXR will match the line code received by the HLXR Setting Toggle UNIT SWITCH Defaults to the Line Buildout hardware Version C HL
164. Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 4 of 11 Table 104 3 Expanded Scan Displays 2 Through 8 Definitions DISPLAY MODULE TYPE DESCRIPTION Lx EQPT Fail QLX Module Fail COMM Fail Laser Degrade 051 TX LOS or SISTER COMM Fail and not SISTER MPU COMM Fail HLXC RLX BOARD Fail or MPU COMM Fail Lx EQPT Fail RMT Remote Board Fail HLXC RLX Not Applicable Lx Link ALM QLX DS2 OPTICAL COMM Fail DS2 OPTICAL LOS DS2 OPTICAL OOF or DS2 OPTICAL BER HLXC LOS BER or SNR Lx RMT Link ALM QLX REMOTE OPTICAL COMM Fail REMOTE DS2 OPTICAL LOS REMOTE DS2 OPTICAL OOF or REMOTE OPTICAL DS2 BER HLXC REMOTE LOSW DC Loop Continuity if HLXR is line powered BER or SNR Dx SIG Fail QLXJ HLXC DSI RX LOS Dx RMT SIG Fail Remote 051 RX LOS Lx RMT HSKP A B QLX Remote Housekeeping Alarm A reported by QFLC Remote Housekeeping Alarm B is not applicable HLXC Remote Housekeeping Alarm A or B reported by an HLXR X LX Lx APS DIS Lx APS Status or Lx APS lockout status 1 x represents the chassis slot number 2 269 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 5 of 11 REMOTE POWER ALARM ALARM 4 5 6 HSKP 5 HSKP 6 HSKP 7 HSKP 8 ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM 13 14 1 16 HS HS LBO HS APS OFFLINE OFFLINE UNPROT OUT DIS 37 38 3 HS DS3A HS DS3B HS DS3A NET NET CUS LPBK LPBK LPBK 43 1 HS NET LPBK 44 MXW MX MX MX APS
165. Remove the RTAU from its protective packaging 2 Insert the RTAU into the full height chassis slot labeled TAU as shown in Figure 517 1 until it reaches the backplane connector 3 Using the ejectors fully seat the RTAU in the chassis A moderate amount of force may be required to properly seat the module in the backplane connector 4 Did STATUS indicator light green If Yes you have completed this procedure f No replace the RTAU and return to Step 1 Stop You have completed this procedure HSW HSP MXW TAU 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU 12692 A RTAU MODULE Figure 517 1 RTAU Mounting Position in the Soneplex Broadband Chassis 2 62 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 518 Page 1 of 2 RLX ALARM LEVEL SETTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for assigning RLX alarm levels to each field Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the R key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed fiel
166. Remove the Streaker module from its protective packaging Following the polarity markings on the battery holders install four fresh AAA alkaline batteries in the battery holders on the PC board Press the top of the voltage switch as shown in Figure 571 1 to select BATTERY onboard operation or press the bottom to select 48 VOLT FEED Dropping resistors and zener diode reduce the 48 VDC to approximately 6 VDC before it is applied to the indicators In addition the 48 VDC input line is protected by a 0 5 amp fuse on the PCB Align the card edges of the module with the mounting slot card guides then slide the module into a chassis slot until it contacts the backplane connector Use the ejector lever to seat the module in the connector If difficulty is experienced when inserting or seating this module remove the module and check that the batteries are properly seated in the holders also check for other obstructions or misalignment in the chassis Refer to Figure 571 2 When the module is seated press the LMP TEST lamp test pushbutton switch all front panel indicators should light yellow If the indicators do not light check that the batteries are installed properly or if you have selected 48V replace the module Stop You have completed this procedure 2 229 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance
167. Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Set Alarm Levels from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return 3 Select Set HLX Alarm Levels from the Set Alarm Levels Menu Press Enter or Return An HLX Alarm Levels screen is shown in Figure 562 1 4 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 5 Move to the Slot toggle field Select slot number 1 2 3 or 4 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier 6 Move to the Equipment Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL CR MAJOR MJ MINOR MN EVENT EV or NOT RPTD not reported for each field that you wish to change M Note Abbreviations of the alarm field options except RPTD will appear in the Active Alarms and Alarm History screens In addition what options you select at any alarm level setting screen will determine whether you will be notified of the alarm Reference DLP 552 Alarm Event Notification Level Setting 7 Move to the DS1 Facility Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR EVENT or NOT RPTD for each field that you wish to change 2 196 6 2000 ADC Telec
168. Reversal SNR Exceeded BER Exceeded Pulse Attn 0 0 0 0 SNR margin 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11374 B Note The SNR and PA values are only updated when the HDSL loop is active If the HDSL loop has never been activated the SNR value will be set to 71 and the PA value will be set to 0 Note Figure 548 5 provides a key to the HRX status column headings shown in this figure Figure 548 3 HLX HRX Status Screen MPU V5 3 With Two HRXs REPR REPC NEND FEND LOOP 1 LOOP 1 HLXC HLXR LOOP2 LOOP 2 NEND FEND TO NETWORK REPR REPC TO CUSTOMER 2 KEY NEND means at the HLXC looking toward the customer HLXR FEND means at the HLXR looking toward the network HLXC REPC means at the HRX looking toward the customer HLXR REPR means at the HRX looking toward the network HLXC PM Reports C SIDE Display Status LINE 1 REPC PM Reports R SIDE Display Status LINE 2 9450 B Note NEND and FEND are not reported in HLX HRX Status screens Figure 548 4 HDSL HLXC HLXR C SIDE and R SIDE Locations MPU V5 1 With HRX 2 163 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance Page 5 of 5 CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 NEND FEND Lb q lt CVR 4 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 HLXC HLXR LOOP 2 LOOP 2 LOOP 2 lt
169. State the loopback remains active until either the 16 bit deactivation code or disarm code 5 bit inband or ESF data link is received Transition from Loopup to Armed State A single inband 16 bit deactivate control code sequence is a command to all HDSL units to move from the loopup state into the armed state All HDSL units use the same deactivation sequence The deactivation sequence lasts a minimum of five seconds When the units are back in the armed state they still respond to activation sequence control codes HDSL units move from the loopup state into the armed state when the selected loopup time out value is reached The loopup time out is programmable via the MPU Transition from Loopup to Disarmed State HDSL units can be commanded to move from the loopup state into the disarmed state all at the same time by using the standard 5 bit inband disarming sequence or by using the ESF data link sequence 2 262 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 103 Page 1 of 3 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTING LOCATIONS Summary Performance Monitoring PM information for both 1251 and HDSL is found on the MPU s main menu under Performance Monitoring The following information is designed to show where the PM information is being reported from that is Near End NEND and Far End FEND PM report locations Refer to Figure 103 1 for a drawing of the Soneplex
170. T Inserts a 225 to 450 ft LBO in the DS3 circuit DS1 Loopback Toggle C bit A type of stuff indicator bit based on TR C BIT Mode TSY 000009 A C bit is used to provide a loopback signal S bit A type of stuff indicator bit invented by NEC An S bit is used to provide a loopback signal FEAC FEAC Far End Alarm and Control is a 16 bit code based on GR 499 CORE used to send alarm or status information 053 Framing Display 13 or C bit This field displays what DS3 path framing None Format Status only format has been detected Paths with the M13 format have their performance monitored for near end transmissions paths with C Bit Parity format have their performance monitored for both near and far end transmissions Note The loopback type configured in this field involves the DS3 MUX only 2 95 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 530 Page 1 of 3 0052 MODULE CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for establishing initial ODS2 configurations viewing and or editing existing ODS2 configurations for each ODS2 module in the Soneplex Broadband system 4 5 Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an
171. TAD 100 0052 Moduls Status 6 8 DLP 547 Performance Monitoring Reporting Locations TAD 103 Pertasmamce Monitoring Reports DesoDIDTIDE 102 Monitonng Reports Retrieval err m RR DLP 565 LED TOS Sd eR EORR GP QUE cele ae a RUP DLP 538 REX and RLXIOR Simus DEII eee ee ee ee ed DLP 509 SAR IS 00 pde dcc DLP 550 continued 2 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance IXL 001 Page 3 of 4 TASK INDEX LIST continued Find Your Job in the List Below Then Go To MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES continued NTP 005 ST SD BENI add 22 0 aude das x did addc usd adds qa DLP 545 chee hh he ee ERU TAD 101 2s o Ee dE PX DE PE QE QE quA DLP 570 TAU be tet eee Paes Hee du dod dai au qus duda DLP 575 DLP 576 TOROS Menace 6500 cs dedu EG
172. TEM OR CIRCUIT PROVISIONING PROCEDURES Summary This procedure tells how to provision turn up a new Soneplex system or circuit using the Craft Interface The procedure assumes the equipment in the Soneplex chassis and the equipment at the other end of the circuit has been installed and has passed all local and end to end tests Some procedures may not be required and will depend upon how the system is equipped This procedure must be performed before attempting to operate the entire circuit or system that will be using this equipment Do Items Below 1 xe 10 11 12a 12b 13 2 14 Log on to the Craft Interface Clear Alarm History required only for a new installation Set system date and time and enter the Target Identifier Set Craft Interface port configuration e Craft Port on MPU or Port 2 e X 25 Port Edit Menu Security set privilege levels Edit User Accounts set user IDs and passwords Assign names to Housekeeping Alarm contacts Configure the 053 MUX as required set service state and set protect status If required insert Line Build Out on the transmit side of the DS3 signal If present equip ODS2 modules assign service state and line code for each 1251 on the ODS2 module If present equip Version C D E or G HLXC modules and provision HDSL circuits If present equip DLX modules and provision DS1 circuits If present equip RLX modules and provision DS1 c
173. TP 010 DLX CONFIGURATION UON GU LECCE OUT DLP 532 DLX INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 521 DLX OR RLX EQUIPPED CIRCUIT END TO END TESTS DLP 522 DLX STATUS DISPLAY CREE d DLP 553 D 1 PM DLP 556 083 MUX ALARM LEVEL SENTING 2 4 4 ROCA ER CR s DLP 560 DSS MUX APS TEST iua aee dor dE CR UE 9 DLP 512 DS3 MUX DLP 529 DS3 MUX FORCED SWITCH 5 DLP 511 DS3 MUX INSTALLATION AND TESTING DLP 505 DSS MUX SERTUS DISPLAY vapeur RECEN DLP 546 DUAL REPEATER INCOMPATIBILITY 515 TAP 104 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR AND ADAPTER CLEANING AND MATING INSTRUCTIONS DLP 507 FOROR APS COMMANDS e aie bal ia ewe aa me eee ae DLP 537 HDSL PM DLP 557 HDSL EQUIPPED CIRCUIT CROSS CONNECTS DLP 515 HLX ALARM LEVEL SETTING 2 22 4 5 24 24 2
174. Telecommunications Inc Attn Technical Assistance Center Mail Station 77 Box 1101 Minneapolis MN 55440 1101 U S A ADC Telecommunications Inc 0 Box 1101 Minneapolis Minnesota 55440 1101 In U S A and Canada 1 800 366 3891 Outside U S A and Canada 952 938 8080 Fax 952 946 3292 Page ii LIST OF CHANGES ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface The technical changes incorporated into this issue are listed below SECTION FM FM Old Sections 1 3 4 and 5 IDENTIFIER Cover Title page Related Publications List of Acronyms and Abbreviations TAD 101 Various Various TRADEMARK INFORMATION DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE Removed list of contents Added new publications Added new acronyms and abbreviations Turned specifications into a TAD Combined Version D HLXC tables and Version E HLXC information into one table Changed to NID Removed and transferred sections on system description and front panel interface to 61 472 Soneplex Description Design and Application Manual Added information on dual repeater functionality Version E HLXC Version E HLXR HLXR 3192 and RLXIOR throughout manual Removed NTP 006 empty page and renumbered successive NTPs Changed DLP 524 Access Identifier to TAD 106 and renumbered successive DLPs Removed DLP 532 empty page and renumbered successive DLPs Added TAD 102 Loopback Process Descript
175. ULE FORCED SWITCH TEST THROUGH THE CRAFT INTERFACE Summary This procedure provides instructions for verifying that the force to protect feature of the ODS2 module is working Both working online and protect offline ODS2 modules are tested Warning Do not insert module edge connectors into the chassis connectors before connecting the optical fiber to the module Exposure to invisible laser radiation may occur if the module edge connectors are allowed to connect with the chassis connectors before connecting the optical fiber to the module Verify that all indicators are dark off and the module is not engaged with the chassis connectors before proceeding A Warning Verify that module is completely disconnected from the chassis connectors before removing the optical fiber from the module Verify that the far end transmitter is off before proceeding Exposure to invisible laser radiation from the optical fiber is possible if the far end transmitter is transmitting Verify that all indicators are dark off A Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat 1 Set up the chassis and a remote QFLC or QLX chassis then perform end to end tests
176. Verify that all alarm indicators the chassis are off and the DS3 test set with 251 option is receiving error free data the 1251 signal selected for test Repeat Steps 10 and 11 for all DS1 circuits to be tested Stop You have completed this procedure DSX 3 CROSS CONNECT SONEPLEX BROADBAND DS3 TEST SET MON CHASSIS DSX 1 SONEPLEX CROSS CONNECT OFFICE EQUIPMENT B CHASSIS DS1 TEST SET 6186 B Figure 522 1 Test Setup 2 73 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 523 Page 1 of 2 ASSIGNMENT RECORDS Summary This procedure provides instructions for recording circuit and facility names along with the associated group slot numbers Each circuit in the Soneplex Broadband system is identified by signal type and location Signal types are either T1 T2 or T3 Each circuit or system is also assigned a slot number when installed 1 An example of the circuit line assignment record that may be useful when troubleshooting is shown in Figure 523 1 Chassis slot numbers are shown in Figure 523 2 2 Record circuit or system name and the associated slot number on your record assignment form Stop You have completed this procedure HIGH SPEED UNITS LOW SPEED UNITS HSW HSP MXW TAU 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU
177. WORK CUSTOMER NETWORK CUSTOMER gt A A gt B B CIRCUIT CIRCUIT UNDER TEST UNDER TEST SPLTF SPLTE SIGNAL PRESENCE TEST SIGNAL DETECTOR GENERATOR QRS o TEST SIGNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR PRESENCE DETECTOR 11869 B Figure 570 11 2 226 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc SPLTF and SLPTE END OFFICE A TRANSMISSION PATH B B TRANSMISSION PATH E EQUIPMENT NETWORK F FACILITY CUSTOMER ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance INTEROFFICE FACILITY DROP CUSTOMER INSERT CUSTOMER DROP NETWORK INSERT NETWORK DLP 570 Page 17 of 18 OFFICE Z ZEND INSERT CUSTOMER SIGNAL PRESENCE DETECTOR TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR OR UNFRAMED QRS gt TERMINATED SIGNAL CPE SPLTE 11870 B Figure 570 12 Typical Point to Point Test Configuration EQUIPMENT E NETWORK FACILITY F CUSTOMER 4 CIRCUIT UNDER TEST SPLTFL SIGNAL PRESENCE DETECTOR gt TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR EQUIPMENT E NETWORK FACILITY F CUSTOMER A B CIRCUIT UNDER TEST SPLTEL TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR SIGNAL PRESENCE DETECTOR Figure 570 13 SPLTFL and SPLTEL 11871 B 2 221 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance
178. X Status from the Display Status menu Press Enter or Return Display RLX Status screen is shown in Figure 509 1 2 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 3 Move to the Slot toggle field Select slot number 1 2 3 or 4 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier Stop You have completed this procedure RLX STATUS Group 1 Circuit ID DS1 Lpbk Active NO Customer LOS NO Network LOS NO DS1 Line Code AUTO NR B8ZS DS1 Frame Format AUTO NR ESF DS1 BER Thresh Exceeded NO Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6180 B Figure 509 1 RLX Status Screen Typical 2 45 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 510 Page 1 of 2 0052 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND QFLC QLX CHASSIS END TO END TESTS Summary This procedure provides instructions for performing end to end system tests on the equipment in a Soneplex ODS2 distribution system to an QFLC or QLX chassis Two telephone technicians may be required to perform this test one at the near end and one at the far end of the system The installation must be complete and the equipment operating properly If you are unfamiliar with the Craft Interface system refer to the Task Index List IXL 001 found earlier in this manual 2 46 Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensur
179. X only Refer to Table 529 1 for switch settings for the or 1 DS3 MUX and 053 CAM Communications Channel Access Module channels Channels 2 5 6 and 7 are available on both the DS3 MUX and the DS3 CAM for communication between the central office chassis and the remote control chassis Although the 053 and the DS3 both have the same channels please note that their switch settings are different Refer to Figure 529 1 for a detailed drawing of the switch When or DI DS3 MUX is used with a DS3 Soneplex Remote Control system the DIP switches on the D53 MUX board must be set to the correct communications channel To assure proper operation the same channel must be selected on the 053 MUX as well as on 053 CAM installed in the remote control chassis Figure 529 2 shows the location of the switch on the 053 MUX Note For more information on the D1 DS3 MUX refer to the Soneplex DI 053 MUX Installation Instructions manual which is listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual Use the arrow keys to select Unit Configuration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return The Unit Configuration menu appears as shown in Figure 529 3 Use the arrow keys or number keys to select MUX Configuration from the Unit Configuration menu Press Enter or Return 053 MUX Configuration screen is shown in Figure 529 4 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Sect
180. X2 11375 B Figure 544 3 HDSL NEND and FEND Locations LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND DS1 Ti DS1 gt gt gt DLX DS1 DS1 NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER 4 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLTTLLLLLLL LIZ Z L ZZLZLzL ALA gt means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites 10455 A Figure 544 4 DLX NEND Locations 2 153 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 544 Page 4 of 4 LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND lady DS1 QLX OR bil dan QFLC DS1 NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites 10456 A Figure 544 5 0052 NEND Locations LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 FEND NEND DS1 T1 DS1 gt C gt Span RLX Repeater DS1 T1 DS1 55 FEND NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites FEND means ESF PM information collected at the opposite end of spans from the affected circuit and returned to the system via ESF datalink The framing format must be ESF in order for FEND information to be displayed 10265 A Figure 544
181. XC configuration settings on the HLXR UNIT SWITCH 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 0 Sets the in decibels for Version E and dB or 22 5 dB Version D HLXC 0 0 dB Loop Power Setting Toggle UNIT SWITCH Defaults to the Loop Power hardware Version C HLXC configuration settings on the Version C HLXC UNIT SWITCH only Refer to DLP 516 for more information Version E and about the Version C HLXC s unit switch Version D HLXC ENABLED ENABLED When loop powering is on and an HRX is not connected to the HLXC 130 VDC span power is supplied over the HDSL loops by the HLXC When loop powering is on and an HRX is connected to the 130 VDC power is supplied over the HDSL loops ENABLED must be selected if an HRX is used DISABLED No loop power is supplied D1 HLXR is the only HLXR with a local powering option other HLXR modules must be loop powered Loop 2 Operationt Toggle UNIT SWITCH Defaults to the Loop 2 hardware configuration Version C HLXC settings on the Version C HLXC UNIT SWITCH ENABLED Channels 1 12 are transmitted on Loop 1 and Version E and channels 13 24 are transmitted on Loop 2 Version D HLXC ENABLED DISABLED Single loop operation is enabled by blocking 12 of the 24 DSO channels 13 24 within the 1 signal Single loop operation is used primarily when only one loop is available to provide service Note HLXC and HLXR Switch Settings HLXC DSX 1 EQ HLXR LBO Loop Power Loop 2 Operati
182. a looped SF or ESF framed data signal Transition from Armed to Disarmed State The standard 5 bit inband disarming sequence used for CPE smartjack loopdown is a command for all HDSL units to go from the armed state into the disarmed state Each HDSL unit disarms after receiving the command for five seconds The ESF data link disarming sequence used for CPE smartjack loopdown is a command for all HDSL units to go from the armed state into the disarmed state The ESF disarm sequence is repeated four times HDSL units go from the armed state into the disarmed state when the default time out value of two hours is reached 2 261 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 102 Page 5 of 5 Loopup State The selected HDSL unit provides continuous loopup of the DS1 signal in the loopup state At the same time the data flow is monitored for the inband deactivation sequence the inband disarming sequence and the ESF data link disarming sequence A loopup time out event forces a return to the armed state No other control code sequences are detected in the loopup state Transition from Loopup State to Loopup No Time out State A single inband 16 bit control code commands all HDSL units to go from the loopup state to the loopup no time out state This loopup time out disable code must be received for at least three seconds When a unit is in the Loopup No Time out
183. ada or 952 046 3223 outside U S A and Canada A telephone consultation can sometimes resolve a problem without the need to repair or replace the ADC Product If during a telephone consultation ADC determines the ADC Product requires repair ADC will authorize the return of the affected Product by the issue of a Return Material Authorization number and complete return shipping instructions If service is affected ADC can arrange to ship a replacement Product when available from designated inventory In all cases the defective Product must be carefully packaged to eliminate damage and returned to ADC in accordance with issued ADC instructions Page 3 1 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 3 General Information 3 REPAIR CHARGES If the defect and the necessary repairs are covered by warranty Buyer s only obligation is the payment of all transportation and associated costs in returning the defective Product to the location designated by ADC ADC at its option will either repair or replace the Product at no charge and return the Product to Buyer with transportation costs paid by ADC only when ADC contracted carriers are used Requested return of Product by any other means will be at Buyer s cost Buyer is responsible for all other associated costs in return of Products from ADC If Product is Out of Warranty or NTF no trouble found ADC will charge a percentage of the current Product list p
184. ance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Use the arrow keys to select Reset LED Test Commands from the System Maintenance menu Press Enter or Return A Reset indicator Test Commands screen is shown in Figure 538 1 Use the arrow keys to move to the desired module s Group Slot selection field Reference 106 Access Identifier To perform an LED test use the space bar to select L The LED test turns all the indicators yellow on the module s selected A yellow indicator verifies that the module is functional To perform a Reset use the space bar to select R Resets performed through the Craft Interface are soft A soft reset on the MPU causes a system restart and logs off all current users on all ports A soft reset on the D53 MUX ODS2 HLXC DLX and RLX modules allows the current configuration to be left in place but the collection of data is stopped for several seconds Any soft reset will not affect traffic 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 538 Page 2 of 2 4 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return If Reset is selected a pop up appears as shown below Are You Sure y n Press Y for yes or N for no Stop You have completed this procedure RESET LED TEST Low Speed Units Group Slot Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6664 D Figure 538 1 Reset LED Test Screen 2 127 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications
185. aracters must be alpha or numeric middle characters can be alpha numeric or hyphens Unit Equip State UNEQUIPPED continued 2 115 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 534 Page 3 of 6 Table 534 1 RLX Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT OOS Unit Service State IS In Service Places the unit in service and allows equipment alarm reporting by the MPU Must be set to IS for reporting of equipment alarms OOS Out Of Service Removes unit from service and stops equipment alarm reporting by the MPU Provision Toggle YES Brings up T1 default settings and allows configuration changes No configuration changes allowed Service State Toggle 1 this field at OOS at this time to avoid undesirable reporting of alarms Set this field to IS after completing the configuration of the remaining fields Line Code Toggle AUTO When the RLX line code is set to AUTO the module senses the line code and switches from AMI to B8ZS if an encoded signal is detected After switching to B8ZS the RLX stays locked in this line code until an LOS is detected at both DS1 inputs B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Framing Format Toggle AUTO The system automatically detects establishes and displays AUTO NR and the correct frame format UNFRAMED FT ONLY SF or ESF S F Network DS1 Sou
186. are required to perform this procedure Host computer system with VT 100 emulation PC communication software with VT 100 emulation and with file transfer capability e MPU Version 5 3 application software and download software provided on diskette e Straight through EIA 232 cable for Craft port on MPU or null modem cable for Port 2 or 3 on chassis back panel 2 Connect the host computer to chassis port configured as the Craft port Turn the power on 3 Insert the diskette with MPU Version 5 3 software and the database equalization software into the computer disk drive 4 Logon to the Craft Interface system 5 Download the MPU Version 5 3 software program and verify that transfer is successfully completed 6 If no additional operations are required log off from the Craft Interface For Details Go To DLP 504 DLP 526 DLP 551 DLP 564 2 19 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 008 Page 1 of 1 MPU CONFIGURATION DATA SAVE AND TRANSFER PROCEDURES Summary This procedure is used to save the configuration data from an installed MPU and then transfer it to another MPU A host computer containing software that can emulate a VT 100 terminal and perform XMODEM file transfers is required Do Items Below in the Order Listed 2 20 Note Any configuration database from an MPU with Version 3 1 or later soft
187. asurement in progress as if the Measurement field had been set to STOP RUNNING Measurement active display Waiting on Display This parameter is displayed to the right of the Measurement Sync only field when the Measurement field is set to START The WAITING ON SYNC message is display only it only shows up when the RTAU is waiting for either frame or pattern sync Examine the status section to determine what sync is needed Mode Toggle DISABLE To end the test session restore the tested circuit to normal DISABLE operation by selecting DISABLE 2 223 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 14 of 18 BIPOLAR ACCESS DS3 MUX RTAU FRONT DS1 TEST PANEL PATTERN GEN DETECTOR 053 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER OPTIONAL FACILITY 14869 A MONITOR SPLIT Figure 570 6 RTAU Test Configuration Block Diagram EQUIPMENT E FACILITY F EQUIPMENT E FACILITY F NETWORK CUSTOMER NETWORK CUSTOMER 8 CIRCUIT CIRCUIT UNDER TEST UNDER TEST MONF MONE SIGNAL SIGNAL PRESENCE PRESENCE DETECTOR DETECTOR 11865 B Figure 570 7 MONF and MONE 2 224 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 5
188. back STATUS CUSTOMER Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9700 A Figure 541 11b DLX Network Loopback Screen Low Speed Loopback Status Commands DS1 3 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type LPBK RQ NETWORK CUSTOMER lt LPBK RQ Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14848 A Figure 541 11 DLX SEND LPBK Screen 2 143 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 15 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 1 DS1 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS CUSTOMER Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9493 C Figure 541 12a RLX Customer Loopback Screen Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 1 DS1 1 Unit Location LOCAL REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS CUSTOMER Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9494 B Figure 541 12b RLX Network Loopback Screen 2 144 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 16 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 5 DS1 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type LPBK RQ NETWORK CUSTOMER LPBK RQ Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMIN
189. be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits can be saved into the configuration database after each change is made in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL for help information on moving around and editing fields Note Be sure to configure the line card to be tested before setting up test access Note The RTAU s status can also be displayed using the Shelf Status screen where the letter in the TAU slot column means an RTAU is present Reference DLP 545 Shelf Status Display Refer to Figure 570 1 Check the RTAU front panel for the STATUS LED lighted green indicating that the module is operating normally Log on to the Craft Interface The Main Menu screen appears Reference DLP 526 Craft Interface Logon Use the arrow or number keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return The Syste
190. bels or 22 5 dB Programmable Toggle ENABLED Enables response to programmable DISABLED Loopback loopback codes DISABLED Disables response to programmable loopback codes NID Loopback Toggle SWITCH Disables loop up response to NID arming ENABLED code The loopback armed state transitions to Armed when the NID arming code is received ENABLED Enables response to NID loopback codes DISABLED Disables loop up response to NID arming code The loopback armed state transitions to Armed when the NID arming code is received Note The RLXIOR configuration field default values shown in this manual are valid for systems with an MPU installed Note Although unit switch settings Pulse Equalization Span Power NID Loopback and LBO are shown at the bottom of the configuration screen none of the displays are meaningful for the RLXIOR First there are no on board switches for Pulse Equalization NID Loopback and LBO In addition although the RLXIOR has an on board Line Power switch the Span Power unit switch setting display is locked at DISABLED continued 2 112 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc FIELD Loopback Activation Code Loopback Deactivate Code Lpbk Timeout Disable Code Loopback Timeout Period Network Keep Alive DSO Channel Unit Service State Service State ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 533 Page 5 of 5 Table 533 1 R
191. chassis and ensures that data passes through the online ODS2 module only 11 Perform end to end test and verify error free data Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End to End Tests 12 Using the ejector press the offline ODS2 module into the chassis until it is properly seated 13 Verify that STATUS indicator on offline ODS2 module is green and ONLINE indicator is extinguished Stop You have completed this procedure 2 52 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 514 Page 1 of 2 0052 MODULE APS TEST Summary This procedure provides instructions for verifying that the APS Automatic Protection Switching feature of the ODS2 module is working Both working online and protect offline ODS2 modules are tested Warning Verify that module is completely disconnected from the chassis connectors before removing the optical fiber from the module Verify that the far end transmitter is off before proceeding Exposure to invisible laser radiation from the optical fiber is possible if the far end transmitter is transmitting Verify that all indicators are dark off A Warning Do not insert module edge connectors into the chassis connectors before connecting the optical fiber to the module Exposure to invisible laser radiation may occur if the module edge connectors are allowed to connect with the chassis connectors before connecting
192. cts the unit arming and smartjack loopup sequence without disturbing the detection by the smartjack the smartjack loopup response needs a minimum of five seconds The arming sequence requires that the smartjack does the loopup and all HDSL units go from the disarmed state into the armed state No other control code sequences are detected while in the disarmed state The ESF data link sequence that arms the loopback capability of all HDSL units at the same time is the standard 16 bit ESF data link sequence used for CPE smartjack loopup The ESF arm sequence is repeated four times Note If the HLXR is provisioned as NID enabled then the arming sequence will cause the HLXR to loop back in response to this NID i e smartjack loop up code In the same manner as described above for the inband code the HDSL unit detects the unit arming and smartjack loopup sequence without disturbing the detection by the smartjack For example the ESF arm sequence causes the smartjack to loopup and all HDSL units move from the disarmed state into the armed state No other ESF data link control code sequences are detected in the disarmed state Note If the HLXR is provisioned NID enabled then the arming sequence will cause the HLXR to loop back in response to this NID i e smartjack loop up code Armed State The HDSL unit continues to be transparent to data flow in the armed state However the units monitor the inband data flow for activation an
193. d a message appears to indicate whether the download was successful or unsuccessful If successful the MPU will reboot automatically to ensure that the configuration database takes effect Stop You have completed this procedure If unsuccessful repeat Steps 3 through 6 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Force APS Commands Reset LED Test Commands Execute ACO Alarm Cut Off Loopback Status Commands Display Inventory Display Circuit IDs Upload Download Commands Test Access Unit Commands 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 5323 A Figure 555 1 System Maintenance Menu UPLOAD DOWNLOAD COMMANDS Execute Configuration Data Upload Execute Configuration Data Download Execute Software Download Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9449 A Figure 555 2 Upload Download Commands Menu 2 179 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 556 Page 1 of 3 DS1 PM CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for assigning thresholds for each 1251 in the Soneplex Broadband system You can also view or edit the DS1 Performance Monitoring configuration for each 1251 in the Soneplex Broadband system from this screen Not all modules support Performance Monitoring Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press t
194. d at OOS at this time to avoid undesirable reporting of alarms Set this field to IS after completing the configuration of the remaining fields Provision Toggle Brings up default settings and allows configuration changes No configuration changes allowed Service State Toggle this field at OOS at this time to avoid undesirable reporting of alarms Set this field to IS after completing the configuration of the remaining fields and after configuring the Unit Service State field Line Code Toggle AUTO When the RLX line code is set to AUTO AMI the module senses the line code and switches from AMI to B8ZS if an encoded signal is detected After switching to B8ZS the RLX stays locked in this line code until an LOS is detected at both 1 inputs B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Framing Format Toggle AUTO The system automatically detects AUTO establishes and displays AUTO NR and the correct frame format UNFRAMED FT ONLY SF or ESF UNFRAMED Unframed data pattern Ft ONLY Used for SLC framing R F Network DS1 Toggle NRZ This tells the Craft that the network 251 NRZ Broadband chassis Source source is at the backplane only BIPOLAR This tells the Craft that the network 251 BIPOLAR locked field source is at the extender card interface If in Loop Extender this option is selected and there is no chassis only extender card the DS1 signal is cut off In the Loop Extender chassis this f
195. d disarming sequences and the ESF data link for the disarming sequence Note The ESF data link does not directly command a loopup of the HDSL units A unit returns to the disarmed state after an arming time out occurs or a disarm code is received 2 260 2000 Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 102 Page 4 of 5 Transition from Armed to Loopup State A specific HDSL unit moves from the armed state into the loopup state when commanded by an inband control code sequence There is a unique 16 bit activation control code sequence for each HDSL unit as shown previously in Table 102 1 As part of the loopup activation process each of the HDSL units will respond with a loopup identification signature that consists of a burst of bit errors in the looped payload Upon receiving three or more seconds of the specific activation code sequence the addressed HDSL unit will respond as follows Loopback of the received payload data for five seconds A burst of bit errors in the looped payload Continued loopback of the received payload The number of bit errors returned in this loopup identification signature is specific to each HDSL unit as follows HLXC 231 bit errors HRX 10 bit errors HLXR 20 bit errors Note The bit errors inserted for the loopup identification signature may occur in the frame bit position as well as the payload in
196. d is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved in one of two ways 1 Press arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen The message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen if the entries have been accepted Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Set Alarm Levels from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return 3 Select Set RLX Alarm Levels from the Alarm Levels menu Press Enter or Return An RLX Alarm Levels screen with default values is shown in Figure 518 1 4 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 5 Move to the Slot toggle field Select slot number 1 2 3 or 4 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier 6 Move to the Equipment Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL CR MAJOR MJ MINOR MN EVENT EV o
197. defined is specified the command syntax description 2 218 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 105 Page 3 of 8 It should be noted that if no data block parameters are required for a command the colon separating the correlation block from the data block may be omitted Trailing commas in the data block that is commas used as position place holders that have no parameter values following them may also be omitted This action selects default values and can only be used after the last required parameter For example RTRV ATTR TI SONEPLEX 1 2 3 1 123 RTRV ATTR T1 SONEPLEX 1 2 3 1 123 Because of the trailing commas rule the expression d implies b c d TL1 Response Syntax TL1 output has three distinct types of messages 1 Fullresponse messages sent to indicate completion or denial of a request 2 Acknowledgment output sent when a full response may not be sent within 2 seconds 3 Autonomous messages that are sent without an associated command request Full Response Syntax TL1 responses consist of four components header identification of output text block end of output A header consists of the following format cr If If SID YY MM DD HH MM SS cr If 1 SID Source identification of the Network Element 2 YY MM DD Year Month
198. dure 2 151 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 544 Page 2 of 4 2 152 ALARM HISTORY Legend Access ID Identifier Shelf Grp Slot Site 1 Lcl 2 Rmt Loop 1 Lp 1 2 Lp 2 Locn Circuit ID Condition 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 1 03 95 L 1 03 95 1 6 1 2 1 03 95 1 6 1 Page 1 of Press CONTROL A for assistance E i rj t 1 RECOVERY LOF RECOVERY RECOVERY RECOVERY RECOVERY RECOVERY DC CONTINUITY RECOVERY RECOVERY E E 1 6 1 1 6 1 1 6 1 1 6 1 1 6 1 1 6 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HB od da da da da 2 Ge 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 eG 5888888 6677 Figure 544 1 Alarm History Screen Typical LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 DS1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 DS1 7 2 8 FEND HLXR FEND DS1 CERE 2 LOOP2 DS1 5 54 H 54 TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER I M I SI LL lL lel T1111 11 A 1 2 gt KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites FEND means ESF PRM information collected at the opposite ends of spans from the affected c
199. e complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 4 Use the arrow keys or number keys to select Unit Configuration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Use the arrow keys to select RLX Configuration from the Unit Configuration menu Press Enter or Return An RLX Configuration menu is shown in Figure 534 1 Starting at the top of Table 534 1 and working your way to the bottom configure the RLX fields for the group and slot selected Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each RLX module installed in the chassis Stop You have completed this procedure 2 114 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Group 1 Unit Equip State Unit Service State T1 Provision 1 Service State Line Code Framing Format BER Threshold
200. e 2 of 8 The routing block contains a target identifier parameter with parameter name Target Identification TID The TID may be any valid simple or compound TL1 identifier or text string and is limited to 20 ASCII characters A valid text string or the TID is defined as letters numbers and hyphens within double quotes TIDs are configurable items that can be defined using TL1 provisioning driven messages The TID is the destination code for the command For a Network Element NE to accept the command the TID must be the same as the NE s system identification which the user sets through the SET SID command null TID entry for any TL1 command defaults to the system identification The access block identifies the circuit T1 T2 T3 or HDSL or equipment related to the command function For commands that relate to the system itself rather than a specific circuit or equipment no access block entry is required or permitted When using the command modifier ALL the access block must be null For commands that relate to a specific circuit access point an access identification AID is required Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier The fourth required block is called the message correlation block and contains one parameter to serve as a Correlation Tag CTAG The CTAG parameter correlates an input command with its associated output response s The user assigns a CTAG value and it is the responsibility of the NE to copy this value into the a
201. e 541 7b HLXR Network Loopback Screen 2 138 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 10 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 4 DS1 1 Unit Location REPEATER COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9499 D Figure 541 8a HRX Customer Loopback Screen HRX Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 4 DS1 1 Unit Location REPEATER COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9500 C Figure 541 8b HRX Network Loopback Screen HRX 2 139 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 11 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 1 DS1 4 Location LOCAL REPEATER1 REPEATER2 REMOTE Loopback STATUS Unit Type Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11384 A Figure 541 9a HRX1 Customer Loopback Screen Two HRXs Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 1 DS1 4 Location LOCAL REPEATER2 REMOTE Loopback STATUS Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11380 A Figure 541 9b HRX1 Network Loopback Screen Two HRXs 2 1
202. e Performance Monitoring Reports menu A sample DS1 PM Reports selection screen is shown in Figure 565 3 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Move to the Circuit toggle field Select slot number 1 2 3 or 4 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier If you selected DS1 PM Reports move to the Site toggle field Select LOCAL or REMOTE If you selected HDSL PM Reports move to the Loop toggle field Select 1 or 2 Move to the Report Type toggle field Select one of the following report types 15 Minute Performance Monitoring Report This report displays the Mon Type PM data for the current 15 minute period and the previous thirty two 15 minute periods e Daily Performance Monitoring Report This report displays the Mon Type PM data for the current day and the previous seven 24 hour periods e Summary Performance Monitoring Report This report displays the Mon Type PM data for the current 15 minute period previous 15 minute period current day and previous day Press Enter or Return to display the report Note At this time the only output format available is on the screen Reference TAP 102 Performance Monitoring Reports Description Stop You have completed this procedure 2 202 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 565 Page 2 of 3 PERFORMANCE MONITORING 1 PM Configuration 2 PM Report
203. e ends of spans from the affected circuit and returned to the system via the ESF Datalink both at local and remote sites The framing format must be ESF in order for FEND information to be displayed Note For Site 1 FEND information is at A for Site 2 FEND information is at 2 11377 A Figure 101 6 T1 HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations 2 296 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 11 of 13 REPR REPC NEND FEND LOOP 1 LOOP 1 XCVR XCVR gt HLXC HRX HLXR LOOP 2 a 2 lt gt xcvr EN nion m NEND FEND TO NETWORK REPR REPC TO CUSTOMER KEY NEND means at the HLXC looking toward the customer HLXR FEND means at the HLXR looking toward the network HLXC REPC means at the HRX looking toward the customer HLXR REPR means at the HRX looking toward the network HLXC REPR PM Reports C SIDE Display Status LINE 1 TL1 REPC PM Reports R SIDE Display Status LINE 2 TL1 9450 B Figure 101 7 HDSL HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations MPU V5 1 CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 NEND FEND dB Be LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 HLXC HLXR LOOP2 LOOP2 LOOP2 4 4 4 NEND FEND TO NETWORK CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 TO CUSTOMER mn c gt KEY NEND means at the HLXC looking toward the customer HLXR FEND means at the HLXR looking toward the netw
204. e that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat The following tools and equipment are required to perform this test e Anti static wrist strap e DS3 digital transmission test set with DS1 option e DSI digital transmission test set Patch cords to connect test sets and patch panel At the chassis location connect 1253 test set with DS1 option to the DSX 3 cross connect or to the DS3 RX and TX connections at the rear of the chassis See Figure 510 1 Identify the ODS2 working and protect pair corresponding to the 1251 circuit to be tested Identify the remote QFLC or QLX working and protect pair corresponding to the 1 circuit to be tested At the QFLC or QLX location connect 051 test set to the DS1 circuit to be tested at the QFLC or QLX DS1 input and output connections the DS1 patch panel or at the 1 See Figure 510 1 At both ends of the circuit to be tested make necessary cross connects so that both ends of the circuits are connected end to end Using the Craft Interface verify that the 053 MUX is EQUIPPED and IN SERVICE Reference DLP 529 053 MUX Configuration Using the Craft Interface verify that the ODS2 module to be tested is EQUIPPED and is IN SERVICE and the DS1 to be tested is PROVISIONED and IN SERVICE Reference DLP 530 ODS2 Module Configura
205. e the space bar to select 8 or 7 Move the cursor to the Craft Port Stop Bits toggle field Use the space bar to select 1 or 2 Move the cursor to the Craft Port Flow Control toggle field Use the space bar to select XON XOFF or NONE Craft Port defaults to NONE Note Some VT 100 terminal emulation programs for personal computers not 100 11 12 13 14 15 16 VT 100 compatible and irregularities in XON XOFF flow control implementation may cause communication problems with the Soneplex MPU If this occurs configure the Flow Control field for the serial port in use to NONE Before exiting the VT 100 terminal emulation program log off the Craft Interface Move the cursor to the Craft Port Keyboard Timeout toggle field After a specified period of keyboard inactivity the user is logged off Use the space bar to select 1 5 10 15 30 or 45 minutes 1 hr or NONE The time out feature is active only after a port is configured as Craft and takes effect only after you log off the Craft Interface and then logon again Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Repeat Steps 6 through 12 for Port 1 2 and Port 3 If a serial port was defined for TBOS operation move the cursor to the TBOS Mode toggle field and select EXPANDED default or COMPRESSED If COMPRESSED TBOS mode was selected in Step 14 move the cursor to the Display 1 Response Address input field Set the address for TBOS compressed display 1 t
206. e time the request is made A valid inventory display may not be available for up to a minute after the initial MPU startup Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Display Inventory from the System Maintenance Menu Press Enter or Return The Inventory Status screen is shown in Figure 540 1 Stop You have completed this procedure Unit Identifier MPU W BOOT CODE INVENTORY STATUS TID ADC ADC Catalog Serial Date S W CLEI Code Version Code MPU APPLICATION S W DS3MUX WORKING PROTECT LIU 1 1 LOCAL REMOTE LIU 1 2 LOCAL REMOTE LIU 1 3 LOCAL REMOTE LIU 1 4 LOCAL Page 1 Press CONTROL A for assistance 6766 B Figure 540 1 Inventory Status Screen Typical 2 129 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 1 of 16 LOOPBACK STATUS COMMANDS Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying the currently active loopbacks for all circuits in the system and for enabling disabling loopbacks Caution Do not perform a DS3 loopback when the Soneplex Broadband chassis is connected to a DS3 CAM unit in the Soneplex CCAS system Note Edits can be made the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is
207. eans PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites 10456 A Figure 102 10 0052 NEND Locations 2 309 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 11 of 11 LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 FEND DS1 T1 DS1 Span RLX Repeater DS1 T1 DS1 A A FEND NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER 4 3 32 4 4 de KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites FEND means ESF PM information collected at the opposite end of spans from the affected circuit and returned to the system via ESF datalink The framing format must be ESF in order for FEND information to be displayed 10265 A Figure 102 11 RLX NEND and FEND Locations 2 310 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 103 Page 1 of 1 LOCAL CRAFT INTERFACE CONNECTION TROUBLESHOOTING This TAP describes how to troubleshoot local Craft Interface connections 1 Verify that you have the correct cable and connectors for the port you intend to use A straight through RS 232 25 pin D sub female connectorized cable is required to connect to the MPU null modem RS 232 25 pin D sub female connectorized cable is required to connect to chass
208. ears as shown in Figure 570 4 Note If the neither the or TAU are plugged into the chassis the Test Access Unit Status Commands screen shown in Figure 570 5 can still be accessed from the System Maintenance menu But in this case it cannot be configured However if the TAU is plugged into the chassis the Test Access Unit Status Commands screen can be configured after accessing it from the System Maintenance menu Refer to the Soneplex Test Access Unit Installation Instructions listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual for more information about the TAU 6 To prepare the RTAU for operation set the parameters shown on the RTAU Config screen Refer to Figures 570 6 through 570 14 for test diagrams and mode schematics Refer to Table 570 1 for details regarding parameter options Use the arrow keys to move from field to field Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return 2 213 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 4 of 18 7 To start a test set the Measurement field to START The waits for pattern sync or frame sync for framed patterns before beginning measurement see Figure 570 15 After syncing the test begins and the Measurement display changes to RUNNING 8 As a test progresses the results are displayed on the RTAU Config screen in the Error Counts and Elapsed Time columns 9
209. ecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 8 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 4 DS14 1 Unit Location LOCAL REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type gt CUSTOMER Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11382 A Figure 541 6b HLXC Network Loopback Screen Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 1 51 4 REPEATER1 REPEATER2 REMOTE Loopback STATUS Unit Type Programmable Loopback Armed State UNARMED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11406 A Note The SEND LPBK command can be executed with 0 1 or 2 HRXs Figure 541 66 HLXC Send Loopback Screen 2 137 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 9 of 16 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 4 DS1 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11383 A Figure 541 7a HLXR Customer Loopback Screen Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Group 6 51 1 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type net cust Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9491 D Figur
210. ed status LED indicator on the module If operating the system through the Craft Interface display the Active Alarms screen and look for modules with a COMM FAIL or BOARD FAIL condition Push the Reset switch on the module in question or perform a module reset through the Craft Interface If these actions fail to restart the module unplug and reseat the module in question Reseating the module can correct a contact problem and avoid the return of a good module for repair Use caution when unplugging modules ensuring that protection switching is available for the module being removed Electrostatic Discharge ESD Protection Considerations Modules can be damaged by static electricity that builds up in work areas especially in areas with low relative humidity The static buildup in work areas on work surfaces people and clothing is produced by the rubbing of objects together to produce an electrical charge AN Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded 2 247 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 100 Page 2 of 2 personnel handling mod
211. ee Virtual Circuits including two Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs each assigned to a separate TL1 or Craft interface and one Switched Virtual Circuit SVC The X 25 interface operates only on Port 3 The PVC ID default assignments are shown in Table 558 2 Other Network Parameters Other supported network parameters set values configurable options and defaults are shown in Table 558 3 Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database be saved after each change in of two ways 1 by pressing an arrow key and then the Enter or Return key once or 2 by pressing the Enter or Return key twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Select X 25 Configuration and press Enter or Return An X 25 Configuration screen is shown in Figure 558 1 3 Use the arrow keys to move to each toggle field and the space bar to make each selection X 25 Configuration field defaults and options a
212. eld type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 2 120 Use the arrow keys to select System Administration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Use the arrow keys to select Edit User Accounts from the System Administration menu Press Enter or Return An Edit User Accounts menu is shown in Figure 535 1 Move the cursor to the User Number field The number 1 appears A number from 1 to 25 can be selected The Craft Interface database allows up to twenty five users to be entered Use the space bar to select the user number stopping when no user name appears on the screen Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the User Name field Enter the user name 1 l
213. ely Errored Second Path Note DS1 Path Parameters are collected at the HLXC for both directions as shown in Figure 102 7 SF framing format this is a second in which there occurred more than eight FE events one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects ESF framing format this is a second in which there occurred more than some user specified value of CVP errors one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects Note Far end parameters are not derived from defects detected in the incoming signal but rather from the PRM Performance Report Messages embedded in the incoming signal from the far end A Remote Alarm Indication condition disallows reception of a valid PRM The framing format must be ESF for FEND information to be transmitted and displayed Note For complete information on counts refer to ANSI T1 231 continued 2 302 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 4 of 11 Table 102 1 051 Mon Type Descriptions continued MON TYPE MEANING LOCATION DESCRIPTION UASP Unavailable Second NEND count of second s in which the 1251 signal is not Path available A signal becomes unavailable upon the completion of ten consecutive SESPs A signal becomes available again at the completion of ten consecutive seconds with no SESPs When a path is unavailable no other PM counts are maintained FCP FE Failure Count Path
214. embedded None or leave blank hyphens are allowed set for each T1 Remote Pulse Toggle 0 133 ft 133 226 ft The 51 signal output provides standard DSX 0 133 ft Equalization 226 399 ft 399 533 ft signal levels which can be compensated for at 533 655 ft or NOT various distances i e cable length APPL Remote Frame Fixed Locked at NOT APPL NOT APPL Format Remote PPS Path Fixed Locked at NOT APPL NOT APPL Protection Switch Threshold T2 Service State Toggle IS In Service Places facility in service and allows T2 alarm OOS reporting by the MPU OOS Out Of Service Removes facility from service and stops T2 alarm reporting by the MPU Service State set Toggle 15 In Service Places facility in service and allows T1 alarm OOS for each T1 reporting by the MPU OOS Out Of Service Removes facility from service and stops T1 alarm reporting by the MPU 2 98 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 531 Page 1 of 7 HLX CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for using this menu to view or edit the configuration for each HLX module in the chassis This menu can also be used to equip provision assign thresholds and assign service state Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and se
215. ent 15 minute period and the previous thirty two 15 minute periods Daily Performance Monitoring Report This report displays the Mon Type PM data for the current day and the previous seven daily periods Summary Performance Monitoring Report This report displays the Mon Type PM data for the previous 15 minute period current 15 minute period previous day and current day Performance Monitoring Reports are shown in Figure 102 1 DS1 15 Minute Figure 102 2 DS1 Daily Figure 102 3 DS1 Summary Figure 102 4 HDSL 15 Minute Figure 102 5 HDSL Daily and Figure 102 6 HDSL Summary Retrieve the Performance Monitoring Report that you wish to view Reference DLP 565 Performance Monitoring Reports Retrieval Mon Types The MPU evaluates the current counts and derived parameters for threshold violations once per second There are 15 minute and daily threshold settings for all counts and derived parameters These thresholds define the number of errors that constitute a 15 minute or daily threshold violation when exceeded These 15 minute and daily thresholds may be set for any one or all the Mon Types Mon Types and descriptions are given in Tables 102 1 and 102 2 For descriptions of locations where thresholds are monitored such as FEND NEND REPC REPR CRP and refer to Figure 102 7 system Figure 102 8 HDSL system Figure 102 9 DLX system Figure 102 10 ODS2 system and Figure 102 11 RLX system 2 300 20
216. ep 7 If No continue to Step 8 Clear trouble in the fuse and alarm panel or chassis backplane Using a multimeter measure and record the DC voltages Measure voltage by placing one probe on the positive contact and the other probe on a solid frame ground Observe DC polarity when taking voltage measurements e Measure the A power feed bus voltage at the fuse holder Measure the B power feed bus voltage at the fuse holder Measure the voltage across the 48 A and RTN A terminals on the chassis backplane e Measure the voltage across the 48 RTN B terminals on the chassis backplane Was the voltage measured at all points between 42 5 VDC and 56 5 VDC If Yes Stop You have completed this procedure If No continue to Step 10 The problem is in the fuse and alarm panel the power feed cabling or at the chassis Inspect and repair as necessary Stop You have completed this procedure 2 44 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 509 Page 1 of 1 RLX AND RLXIOR STATUS DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying the status of the RLX or RLXIOR modules installed in the selected chassis Note The RLXIOR is displayed as RLX in the Craft Interface menus and screens Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select Display RL
217. er DLP 512 0052 Module Forced Switch Test through the Craft Interface DLP 513 0052 Module APS WS iuc det COR ORE EROR DLP 514 nterrios uuu uu ua ace eoa bore x oto 7 DLP 564 Assignment lob ob E bo ob obs DLP 523 SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT PROVISIONING PROCEDURES 5 2 3 abren t Reb Re Rh Ra RR e Er ees NTP 004 Craft interface System LOGON be DAC RO POP DLP 526 Alarm History Clear anco a Ebor xoc abd orders arab DLP 527 System TIDi Date Time Setting iiec ce dace Gace DLP 528 otia Pott COITU BI 2 2 3b a eh DLP 549 X85 Port eae DLP 558 IU dip DLP 536 continued 2 5 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance IXL 001 Page 2 of 4 TASK INDEX LIST continued Find Your Job in the List Below Then Go To SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT PROVISIONING NTP 004 Deer Account Ed a uu ba PERPE bu bbb bud dee dubai
218. er connector cleaning procedures performed before installation This procedure provides instructions for cleaning and mating optical fibers 1 2 42 Assemble the following required cleaning materials as shown in Figure 507 1 e Lint free laboratory wipes e Cotton tipped swabs e Isopropyl alcohol in a pressurized dispenser e Lint free pipe cleaners e Clean dry oil free compressed air 1178 A Figure 507 1 Cleaning Materials Clean connectors by moistening a lint free wipe with alcohol then wipe completely around the connector ferrule twice and several times across the tip Use a lint free dry wipe to wipe completely around the connector ferrule twice Also wipe several times across the tip Blow across the end of the ferrule with clean dry compressed air Visually inspect the connector tip for cleanliness If the tip does not appear to be thoroughly cleaned repeat Steps 2 3 and 4 SC and FC adapters are cleaned by using a pipe cleaner moistened with alcohol Insert the pipe cleaner into either end of the adapter and rotate so the inside surface of the adapter is wiped by the pipe cleaner Repeat this procedure for the opposite end Blow the adapter dry with clean compressed air Clean attenuators with clean dry compressed air only Do not use a moistened wipe or pipe cleaner Mate the SC and FC connectors by inserting the connector into the adapter and aligning the connector key with the adapter key slot
219. eration Remove an MPU from an existing chassis install it in another chassis and verify stand alone operation Install and test APU module Install and test the working 053 MUX module in the MXW slot of the Soneplex Broadband chassis If required install the protect DS3 MUX in the MXP slot In an unprotected system the 3 MUX module must be installed in the working slot Install and test Version C D E or G HLXC module s Perform end to end tests between the HLXC and the HLXR Install and test DLX module s Perform DLX equipped circuit end to end tests Install and test RLX module s AND OR Install and test RLXIOR module s Perform RLX equipped circuit end to end tests Install and test ODS2 module s Install the Working ODS2 module first then the Protection module In an unprotected system the ODS2 module must be installed in the working slot Install and test the Remote Test Access Unit 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc For Details Go To DLP 501 DLP 508 DLP 502 DLP 519 DLP 503 DLP 505 DLP 516 DLP 520 DLP 521 DLP 522 DLP 525 DLP 524 DLP 522 DLP 506 DLP 517 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 002 Page 3 of 3 Do Items Below in the Order Listed For Details Go To Note For information about installing and testing the Remote Test Access Unit which is used with MPU Software Version 5 3 refer t
220. erence DLP 520 HLXC HLXR End to End Tests Reference DLP 522 DLX or RLX Equipped Circuit End to End Tests Stop You have completed this procedure 2 48 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 512 Page 1 of 2 DS3 MUX APS TEST Summary This procedure provides instructions for verifying that the APS Automatic Protection Switching feature of the DS3 MUX module is working Both working online and protect offline DS3 MUX modules are tested 10 Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Identify the offline DS3 MUX Its STATUS indicator is green and its ONLINE indicator is extinguished Slide the offline DS3 MUX part way out This disconnects the DS3 MUX from the Soneplex Broadband system and ensures that data passes through the online DS3 MUX only Perform end to end test and verify error free data Set up the Soneplex Broadband system and to perform end to end tests between chassis and remote unit Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End to End Tests Reference DLP 520 HLXC and HLXR End to End Tests
221. ern Type field this field displays 32 dashes Frame Format Toggle UNFRAMED Unframed data pattern UNFRAM ED Ft ONLY Used for SLC framing Extended Super Frame continued 2 220 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 11 of 18 Table 570 1 RTAU Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT SIGNAL GENERATOR SETUP FIELDS continued Loop Code OVERVIEW The Mode field must be set to a SPLT option before the Loop Code field can be configured Loop codes will be transmitted until the RTAU detects a change in the signal being received At that time the pattern selected before the loop code was set will be transmitted For example when sending a Loop Up code the will restore the original pattern after it receives the loop code it is transmitting indicating that the circuit is looped up Note that the Loop Code bits are displayed in the Loop Code bit field as each code is selected This is provided as a convenience to the operator who may not know the name chosen for the loop code but does know the pattern Line Loop Up 10000 Line Loop 100 Down 4 Bit Loop Up 1100 4 Bit Loop 1110 Down 5 Bit Loop Up 11000 5 Bit Loop 11100 Down ESF CSU OEFF 0000 1110 1111 1111 Loop Up ESF CSU 38FF 0011 1000 1111 1111 Loop Down ESF NI Loop 12FF 0001 0010 1111 1111 Up ESF NI Loop 24FF 001
222. essive zeros EXZ in the DS1 signal Note The maximum rate of indications across HDSL loops that the far end can report is 166 7 BPV per second 10 000 per minute LOSS Loss Of Signal second in which one or more Loss Of Signal defects Second occurred ESL Errored Second Line NEND second in which there occurred one or more BPVs one or more EXZs or one or more LOS defects SESL Severely Errored NEND second in which more than some user specified Second Line value of CVLs or one or more LOS defects occurred FCP Failure Count Path NEND A count of Loss Of Frame LOF or Alarm Indication Signal AIS failures within the interval A failure is counted when the failure condition transitions from OFF to ON Failure count is independent of the duration in seconds of the failure condition CVP Code Violation Path NEND Count of FE Frame sync Errors in SF format or count of CRC errors in ESF format AISSP AIS Second Path NEND second containing one or more AIS defects SASP SEF AIS Second Path NEND A second containing one or more AISSPs or one or more SEF Severely Errored Framing OOF defects ESP Errored Second Path NEND SF framing format this is a second in which there occurred one or more FE events one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects ESF framing format this is a second in which there occurred one or more CVP errors one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects SESP Sever
223. est Reference DLP 572 Version D or Later HLXC to HLXR Voltage and Current Test 9 Repeatentire procedure for each HLXC module Stop You have completed this procedure 2 57 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 516 Page 3 of 6 SWITCH FUNCTION POSITION 6 LOOP POWER ON ENABLED OFF DISABLED 5 UNUSED 4 LOOP2 ON ENABLED OFF DISABLED 3 2 1 LINE LENGTH 3 2 1 0 133 FT OFF OFF OFF 133 266 FT OFF OFF ON 266 399 FT OFF ON OFF CONFIGURATION SWITCHES 399 533 FT OFF ON ON COMPONENT SIDE VIEW 533 655 ON OFF OFF DEFAULT SWITCH SETTINGS 6 5 4 ON 3 2 1 OFF Figure 516 1 Version C HLXC Module Configuration Switches 2 58 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 516 Page 4 of 6 1to 28 HLXC UNITS HSW HSP MXW 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU 66 HEE 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 4 V 6181 B DS3 MUX RTAU UNITS MODULE Figure 516 2 HLXC Module Locations Table 516 1 051 Signal Routing GROUP DS1 GROUP 081 GROUP 051 GROUP SLOT
224. ex Broadband system from this screen Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field M Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select Performance Monitoring from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return A Performance Monitoring selection menu appears 2 Use arrow keys to select HDSL PM Configuration from the PM Configuration menu Press Ente
225. ffice make necessary cross connects at the Main Distribution Frame or other facility in accordance with local practice At the remote location make necessary cross connects at the remote distribution frame or other facility in accordance with local practice 6 Re install the HLXC module s in their mounting slots Stop You have completed this procedure 2 55 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 516 Page 1 of 6 HLXC INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for installing the Version C D E or G HLXC module which mounts in the half height slots located in the middle of the chassis A typical HDSL Loop Extension HLX system consists of an HLXC module installed in the chassis and an HLXR module installed at a remote location There is no protection for the module or signal when using HDSL circuits Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Note When using HLXC modules in a group NEVER install ODS2 modules in any of the unused slots in the group 1 Select the HLXC module If it is not already
226. form APS test on 053 MUX module At both ends of the circuit make any necessary cross connects at the DSX Log off from the Craft Interface system Complete assignment forms and update office records as required by local procedures 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc For Details Go To DLP 527 DLP 528 DLP 529 DLP 534 or DLP 533 DLP 567 DLP 522 DLP 337 DLP 511 DLP 512 DLP 569 DLP 564 DLP 523 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 500 Page 1 of 1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS INSPECTION Summary This procedure provides instructions for opening the shipping cartons verifying that the correct components and quantities were received and checking for damages Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat 1 The following tools and equipment are required for unpacking wristband e Box cutter 2 Open the shipping carton and carefully unpack the equipment from the protective packing material 3 Check each component against the packing list to verify that the correct catalog numbers and quantities were received Verify that all parts are received before d
227. forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Usethe arrow keys to select Set Alarm Levels from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return 3 Select Set MUX Alarm Levels from the Set Alarm Levels menu Press Enter or Return A 053 MUX Alarm Levels screen is shown in Figure 560 1 4 At the Equipment Alarms toggle fields select CRITICAL CR MAJOR MJ MINOR MN EVENT EV or NOT RPTD not reported for each field that you wish to change M Note Abbreviations of the alarm field options except RPTD will appear in the Active Alarms and Alarm History screens In addition what options you select at any alarm level setting screen will determine whether you will be notified of the alarm Reference DLP 552 Alarm Event Notification Level Setting 5 Mo
228. g T1 signals both at local and remote sites 10456 A Figure 101 10 ODS2 NEND Locations 2 298 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND FEND DS1 T1 DS1 Span RLX Repeater DS1 T1 DS1 A A FEND NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER nL de KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites FEND means ESF PM information collected at the opposite end of spans from the affected circuit and returned to the system via ESF datalink The framing format must be ESF in order for FEND information to be displayed 10265 A Figure 101 11 RLX NEND and FEND Locations TAP 101 Page 13 of 13 2 299 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 1 of 11 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS DESCRIPTION The Craft Interface provides 15 Minute Performance Monitoring PM Daily PM and Summary PM reports when you select Performance Monitoring at the Main Menu Performance Monitoring reports are based on the data stored in the MPU memory Note Parameters that do not apply to a given module have a hyphen replacing the numeric value in all PM reports 15 Minute Performance Monitoring Report This report displays the Mon Type PM data for the curr
229. gain Range is from 1 to 65535 When 65535 1s reached the value returns to The output code identifies the nature of the output message Values for the output code are REPT ALM REPT EVT REPT INITZN REPT STAT The output code may have a modifier T1 EQPT Refer to individual message syntax descriptions REPT ALM Report alarm e REPT EVT Report event REPT INITZN Report initialization of NE e REPT STAT Report status Autonomous Messages Autonomous messages are used to report information that is not a direct response to a specific command Autonomous messages are REPT ALM Report alarm REPT EVT Report event REPT INITZN Report initialization REPT STAT Report status TL1 Commands The TL1 commands supported by Version 5 MPU software are listed in Table 105 1 2 281 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 105 Page 6 of 8 Table 105 1 TL1 Commands continued 2 282 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 105 Page 7 of 8 Table 105 1 TL1 Commands continued SECU SECU SECU ED EQPT continued gt 3 c 2 5 AHEHE 2 283 2000 ADC Te
230. hardware configuration settings Loopback Activation 16 binary characters These codes can be set to any 16 bit binary 1101 0011 1101 0011 Code 075 and 175 must be value except all Os all 1s or a value that is entered already used in another 16 bit code The signal is sent inband RLX units go to loopup state when they are in an armed state Loopup is activated for selected units Detection time is 3 secs Loopback Deactivate The signal is sent inband Units 1001 0011 1001 0011 Code state go back to armed state Detection time is 5 secs Lpbk Timeout This disables the loopup time out Active 1101 0101 1101 0110 Disable Code loopbacks stay up until deactivation or disarm code is received Detection time is 3 Secs Loopback Timeout Enter a number from 0 This represents the minutes the loopback 30 minutes Period to 255 remains in effect before reverting to the non loopback state Setting the loopback time out period to 0 disables the time out feature Network Keep Alive Toggle AIS If the system detects a LOS Loss of Signal AIS from the customer an AIS is sent to the network DS1 CUTOFF If the system detects a LOS from the customer the signal is cut off and no signal is transmitted to the network Note Unit switch settings Pulse Equalization Span Power NID and LBO are shown on the bottom of the configuration screen Note The UNIT SWITCH option appears on screen for both RLX types but is onl
231. he key to view and select the previous option input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 2 180 Use the arrow keys to select Performance Monitoring from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return A Performance Monitoring menu appears Use the arrow keys to select 051 PM Configuration from the PM Configuration menu Press Enter or Return A DS1 PM Configuration screen is shown in Figure 556 1 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Move to the Slot toggle field Select slot number 1 2
232. he DS1 toggle field Select 1251 number 1 2 3 or 4 Use the arrow keys to move to one of the Local Repeater Repeater1 Repeater2 or Remote Loopback command toggle fields Select ACT NET ACT CUST SEND LPBK at Local field only or DEACTIVATE at each field Press Enter or Return Refer to Table 541 1 for loopback toggle field options A blank field indicates no selection 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 2 of 16 Note The ACT CUST and ACT NET options create customer and network loopbacks on the HLXC and HLXR cards The SEND LPBK option does not apply to loopbacks on the local HLXC or HLXR cards Instead the SEND LPBK option sends a request out to the DS3 MUX and into the network to request that a loopback be established on the associated DS1 facility at the other end of the network connection This request is denoted graphically by the text lt LPBK that appears on loopback screens The corresponding 1251 on the other side of the network connection should respond to this request by establishing a loopback on the corresponding remote unit The receipt of this request via the DS3 network interface is denoted graphically by the text LPBK that appears on loopback screens Note The SEND LPBK option is only available in the Soneplex Broadband system It can only be executed from the Local command toggle field o
233. he cursor to the TID field and type the TID Note The TID label can be 1 to 20 characters with no spaces or periods allowed Only ASCII alpha numeric or hyphen characters are allowed The first character must be an alpha character middle characters can be alpha numeric or hyphens and the last character must be either alpha or numeric If a TID of more than 20 characters is entered all characters after the twentieth are cut off The TID should be changed only when necessary The current TID is shown on the System Configuration menu Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Date field Enter the two digit number for the month and press the right arrow key Enter the two digit number for the date and press the right arrow key Enter the two digit number for the year and press the right arrow key 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 528 Page 2 of 2 5 Move the cursor to the Time field Enter 00 to 23 for the hour and press the right arrow key Enter 00 to 59 for the minutes The Time field is updated each time the screen is refreshed 6 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure SYSTEM TID DATE TIME TID ADC Date 06 05 04 Time 00 11 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6121 B Figure 528 1 System TID Date Time Screen Typical 2 91 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Is
234. highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 4 5 Use the arrow keys or number keys to select Unit Configuration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Use the arrow keys to select DLX Configuration from the Unit Configuration menu Press Enter or Return A DLX Configuration menu is shown in Figure 532 1 Starting at the top of Table 532 1 and working your way to the bottom configure the DLX Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each DLX module installed in the chassis Stop You have completed this procedure 2 106 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 532 Page 2 of 3 DLX CONFIGURATION Group 5 Unit Equip State Unit Service State 1 Provision 1 Service State 1 Line Code Pulse Equalization T1 BER Threshold Loopback Timeout Period Circuit ID Slot 1 EQUIPPED IS YES 005
235. hrough the entries one line at a time Use the right arrow key to move down one screen at a time Use the left arrow key to move up one screen at a time Press CONTROL R to refresh screen and poll the system for the 112 most current alarm occurrences The first Date and second Time columns on the screen display the date and time respectively of the alarms stored in the history file The third column Access ID identifies an entity in the Soneplex Broadband system to which the alarm condition pertains Different alarm conditions result in different types of AIDs Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier The fourth column Locn displays NEND FEND REPC or REPR indicating the location of the alarm Figure 544 2 Tl HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND locations Figure 544 3 HDSL HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations Figure 544 4 DLX NEND locations Figure 544 5 ODS2 NEND locations and Figure 544 6 RLX NEND and FEND Locations show FEND NEND REPC and REPR locations and descriptions for HLXC HRX HLXR DLX ODS2 and RLX systems The sixth column Circuit Identifier displays the circuit or facility name assigned in the configuration menu The seventh column Condition displays the alarm condition present on the circuit Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting The eighth column St or Status displays CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm EV event or CL alarm has cleared Stop You have completed this proce
236. ield is locked at BIPOLAR BER Threshold Toggle Range of 1073 to 1079 The average Bit Error Ratios of both the incoming 1251 signals are monitored by the RLX By monitoring BERs the RLX is capable of triggering a minor alarm when any of the monitored signals degrades below the BER threshold level Note The RLXIOR configuration field default values shown in this manual are valid for a system with an MPU installed continued 2 111 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 533 Page 4 of 5 Table 533 1 RLXIOR Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Span Power Toggle UNIT SWITCH Stops span power on the RLXIOR ENABLED Setting ENABLED Enables span power using the on board switch settings 130V or 130V The default switch setting is 130V DISABLED Stops span power on the RLXIOR Pulse Toggle UNIT SWITCH Selecting this option on the RLXIOR UNIT SWITCH Loop Equalization creates a setting of 0 133 ft Extender chassis only 0 133 ft 133 266 ft The 51 signal output provides standard NOT APPL locked field 266 399 ft 399 533 ft DSX signal levels which can be in Broadband chassis or 533 655 ft compensated for various distances only LBO Setting Toggle UNIT SWITCH Selecting this option on the RLXIOR UNIT SWITCH creates a setting of 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 7 5 15 0 Sets the LBO in deci
237. ields continued TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT HLXR NID Toggle HLXR Activation Input Code Code is equivalent to Programmable Programmable Toggle Lpbk One HRX in system Input only HRX or Activation Code Activation Code is equivalent to Programmable Code 2 236 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc UNIT SWITCH ENABLED DISABLED 16 binary characters 0 s and 175 must be entered ENABLED DISABLED 16 binary characters 0 s and 175 must be entered Version E HLXR only Selects NID setting enabled for the HLXR Version D or earlier HLXR Selects NID setting either enabled default or disabled on the HLXR When the HLXR is provisioned to function like an NID it supports inband and out of band loopback codes Enables response to NID loopback codes and overrides hardware configuration settings Disables response to NID loopback codes and overrides hardware configuration settings 16 bit codes can be programmed to any 16 bit binary value except all Os all Is or a value that is already used in another 16 bit code The signal is sent inband HDSL units go to loopup state when they are in armed state Loopup is activated for selected units Detection time is 3 secs Enables response to programmable loopback codes and overrides hardware configuration settings Disables response to programmable loopback c
238. ign and Integration Testing System Turn Up and Testing Network Monitoring Upstream or Downstream Power Monitoring and Remote Surveillance Service Maintenance Agreements Systems Operation BBG Technical Assistance Center Technical Information Extension 3223 System Network Configuration E Mail technical adc com Product Specification and Application Training Product Specific Installation and Operation Assistance Troubleshooting and Repair Field Assistance Product Return Department ADC Return Authorization number and instructions must Extension 3748 be obtained before returning products E Mail repair amp return 2 adc com Product information may also be obtained using the ADC web site at www adc com or by writing ADC Telecommunications Inc P O Box 1101 Minneapolis MN 55440 1101 U S A Contents herein are current as of the date of publication ADC reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice In no event shall ADC be liable for any damages resulting from loss of data loss of use or loss of profits and ADC further disclaims any and all liability for indirect incidental special consequential or other similar damages This disclaimer of liability applies to all products publications and services during and after the warranty period This publication may be verified at any time by contacting ADC s Technical Assistance Center at 1 800 366 3891 extension 3223 in U S A or Canada or 952
239. ill set the alarm bit for the incompatible HRX2 and report OLD HRX IN in the serial number of field of the HRX2 inventory The MPU should activate the Version Mismatch alarm and display the corrupted serial number HRX3 A third HRX is always incompatible This situation is diagnosed by the HRX2 As a result systems with three HRXs when the HRX2 is a Version A cannot be diagnosed The HRX2 will set the serial number in the HRX2 inventory data to 3RD HRX IN The HLXC will set the alarm bit for the incompatible HLXR The MPU should activate the Version Mismatch alarm and display the corrupted serial number If the HLXC is a Version D or earlier the alarm bit for dual repeater incompatibility cannot be set Thus the MPU can only display the corrupted serial number Dual Repeater Compatibility Indicators Table 104 1 shows the various configurations that should be tested for dual repeater compatibility issues legal configurations require extensive testing 2 313 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 104 Page 3 of 3 2 z z 2 SINGLE INCOMPATIBILITIES Old Z Z 2 Z Z z O Z z NCC CUN RECEN pul ae NEU Ei
240. in Figure 524 3 excessive resistance is encountered remove the module and check for obstructions or improper alignment 2 76 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 524 Page 2 of 5 Figure 524 1 Repeater Loop Extender Intelligent Office Repeater RLXIOR Module With Configuration Switches Shown 2 77 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc 2 18 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 524 Page 3 of 5 SPAN BLOCK VOLTAGE CODE 11657 B Figure 524 2 RLXIOR Configuration Switches With Default Settings 1to 28 RLXIOR UNITS HSW HSP MXW 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU a 66 mmm rixior slots eps RTAU MODULE Figure 524 3 RLXIOR Module Locations 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 524 Page 4 of 5 4 Observe the front panel LED indicators as shown in Figure 524 4 Following insertion of the RLXIOR module into the chassis assuming power is available the STATUS LED turns red indicating the start of self test diagnostics All L
241. installing or modifying telephone lines disconnect lines on the network side before working with uninsulated lines or terminals Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT Class A The Soneplex Broadband system has been certified to comply with the requirements for class A computing devices per part 15 of the FCC regulations A Warning This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference to TV and radio reception in which case the user at their own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference This equ
242. intenance DLP 525 Page 2 of 6 7 2 82 Note The Version B RLX switches be enabled or disabled by the MPU if the jumpers are in place But the switches jumper settings themselves FFhex or 7Fhex for the Channel Blocking Idle switch 130V or 5130 for the Line Power switch cannot be overridden by the MPU Note The B1 RLX factory default setting for the Channel Blocking Idle Code jumper is 7Fhex the RLX factory default setting for the Line Power jumper is 130 VDC B2 RLX factory default setting for the Channel Blocking Idle Code jumper is FFhex the B2 RLX factory default setting for the Line Power jumper is 130 VDC A missing jumper in the Channel Blocking Idle Code causes a default to FFhex A missing jumper in Line Power causes a default to no voltage output Note If the Line Power jumper is set it must also be enabled which is done through software Reference DLP 534 RLX Configuration Refer to your work order to determine which RLX slots are to be used Slot locations are illustrated in Figure 525 4 Chassis slots 1 1 through 7 4 correspond to 051 signals 1 through 28 as shown in Table 525 1 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier Align the RLX module with the slots and slide it into the chassis Use the ejector to press the RLX module into the backplane connector until it is properly seated If there is excessive resistance to insertion remove the unit and check for improper alignment or ob
243. ion Moved TBOS Daisy Chaining from TBOS section created DLP 574 from it Moved TBOS interface description information from TBOS section created TAD 104 from it Moved TL1 interface description information from TL 1 section created TAD 105 from it ADC and Soneplex are registered trademarks of ADC Telecommunications Inc CLEI is a trademark of Bellcore SLC 96 is a trademark of AT amp T Technologies Inc SLC is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies Inc Page iii 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 6 Page iv 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Preface TABLE OF CONTENTS Page FRONT MATTER ABOUT HIS ERR GR Qe RC CR QU CR ER OR Ed Lac d OR d awe EGER ix RELATED PUBLICATIONS ua dcc mm III ECKE ERAI HEIC RR ix ADMONISHMENES 1 ped d dapes opor dog dopo X GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS REGERE OE 41 4 X FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT 4 4 4 4 4 4 444 xi MPR 0100 SIANDAHDS IA ede det edad LIST OF ACRONYMS ABBREVIATIONS xii SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 224804002644 Gada lade todd 1 1 USING THECRAFTINTERFADE
244. ion 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 514 Page 2 of 2 7 Verify that the STATUS indicator on the online ODS2 module is green and that its ONLINE indicator is green 8 If the online ODS2 module APS indicator is red hold the ENABLED button down and momentarily press LMPTST APS to extinguish the APS indicator and enable APS 9 Initiate an Automatic Protection Switch APS on the offline ODS2 module using one of the following methods Slide the online ODS2 module part way out to simulate online board failure e Disconnect fiber cable from the online ODS2 module RX to simulate RX LOS Slide the online QFLC or QLX partway out to simulate a far end module failure e Disconnect the fiber cable from the online QFLC RX to simulate far end RX LOS 10 Verify that ODS2 that was offline is now online its ONLINE indicator is green 11 Perform end to end test and verify error free data Reference DLP 510 ODS2 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End to End Tests 12 Using the ODS2 module ejector press the module into the chassis until it is properly seated 13 Verify that STATUS indicator on offline ODS2 module is green and its ONLINE indicator is extinguished 14 Repeat Steps 8 through 13 for each APS simulation given in Step 9 Stop You have completed this procedure 2 54 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 515 Page 1 of 1 HDSL EQUIPPED
245. ion 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 529 Page 2 of 4 4 Starting at the top of Table 529 2 and working your way to the bottom configure the DS3 MUX fields 5 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure Table 529 1 C1 and 01 053 MUX and 053 CAM DIP Switch Settings for 053 Soneplex Remote Control System C1 AND D1 053 MUX SWITCH DS3 CAM SWITCH Note The default setting is channel 7 for both the and D1 053 MUX and the DS3 CAM Note The CLOSED OPEN position indicates that the switch is depressed in that direction e e e e e az L e E CLOSED e ON Ae SN e N All switches shown are in the OFF position 10509 A Figure 529 1 C1 and D1 DS3 Figure 529 2 C1 and D1 053 MUX Channel MUX DIP Switch Detail Selection DIP Switch Location 2 93 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 529 Page 3 of 4 UNIT CONFIGURATION MUX Configuration ODS2 Configuration OLX Configuration HLX Configuration DLX Configuration RLX Configuration Display Edit All MUX Configuration Parameters Press CONTROL A For Assistance 8105 B Figure 529 3 Unit Configuration Menu DS3MUX CONFIGURATION Unit Equip State EQUIPPED Unit Service State OUT OF SERVICE MUX Protect Status UNPROTECTED Facility Service State OUT OF SERVICE Transmit LB
246. ion Status ACO OPTICAI NO OPTICAI NO AIS NO LOF NO T BE NO 5 NO F NO BE NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO UU Qd Press CONTROL A for assistance 6675 B Figure 101 1 Active Alarms Screen MPU V5 1 Sample ACTIVE ALARMS Legend Access ID Identifier Shelf Grp Slot Site 1 2Lcl 2 Rmt Loop 1 Lp 1 2 Lp 2 Access ID Locn Circuit ID Condition Status ACO GRP 2 MISMATCH OPTICAL LOF AIS LOS NET LOOPED BACK NCOMPATIBLE T SNR LOF T BER T SNR RECOV LOF T BER T SNR LOF T BER T SNR NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 2 0 4 4 2 2 2 2 422 4 515 8 585 5 8 5 5 5 8 5 5 8 Press CONTROL A for assistance 11376 A Figure 101 2 Active Alarms Screen MPU V5 2 Sample 2 290 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 5 of 13 ALARM HISTORY Legend Access ID Identifier Shelf Grp Slot Site 1 Lcl 2 Rmt Loop 1 Lp 1 2 Lp 2 Access ID Locn Circuit ID Condition 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 03 95 E RECOVERY LOF RECOVERY RECOVERY RECOVERY RECOVERY RECOVERY DC
247. ion to the DSX 3 cross connect or to the RX and TX connections at the rear of the chassis Adjust the test set for the particular 1 to be tested See Figure 522 1 At the far end of the circuit identify the DS1 pair that corresponds to the circuit to be tested At the far end of the circuit connect a 1251 test set to the circuit to be tested at the 1 input and output connections the DS1 patch panel or at the DSX 1 module Adjust the test set for the particular DS1 to be tested See Figure 522 1 At both ends of the circuit to be tested make necessary cross connects so that the circuit s is connected end to end Using the Craft Interface verify that the modules are EQUIPPED and IN SERVICE Reference DLP 529 053 MUX Configuration Reference DLP 532 DLX Configuration Reference DLP 533 RLXIOR Configuration Reference DLP 534 RLX Configuration At the chassis location insert a test signal into the DS1 to be tested using the DS3 test set with DS1 option Verify that all alarm indicators on the chassis are off and the DS1 test set at the far end DS1 output is receiving error free data for the selected DS1 test signal Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for all DS1 circuits to be tested 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc 10 11 12 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 522 Page 2 of 2 At the far end of the circuit insert a DS1 test signal into the DS1 input using the DS1 test set
248. ions must be followed at all times These warnings are flagged by use of the triangular alert icon seen below and are listed in descending order of severity of injury or damage and likelihood of occurrence Danger Danger is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will cause severe personal injury death or substantial property damage if the hazard is not avoided Warning Warning is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause severe personal injury death or substantial property damage if the hazard is not avoided Caution Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Page x AN AN AN A Danger To avoid electric shock be careful when working near HDSL loop connections or telecommunications circuits An electrical potential of 130 volts exists on HDSL loop connections and telecommunications circuits Coming in contact with this high electrical potential will result in death or severe personal injury Danger Do not look into the ends of any optical fiber or look directly into the module fiber connectors Exposure to invisible laser radiation may result which can damage the retina of the eye An optical power meter should be used to verify active fibers Warning To prevent electrical shock never install telephone equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm When
249. ipment does not exceed Class A limits for radio emission for digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulation of the authorization methods of Industry Canada Operation in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to TV and radio reception requiring the owner or operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference This product conforms to all applicable standards of 21 CFR 1040 CERTIFICATION UL Listed The Soneplex Broadband system is compliant with UL 1459 Second Edition STANDARDS The following listing is a bibliography of applicable documents ANSI T1 231 Layer In Service Digital Performance Monitoring CB 149 Maintenance Standards for Digital Transmission Systems Issue 4 November 1 1989 GR 63 CORE Network Equipment Building NEBS Generic Equipment Requirements Physical Protection Issue 1 October 1995 GR 487 CORE Generic Requirements for Electronic Equipment Cabinets Issue 1 June 1996 GR 499 CORE Transport Systems Generic Requirements TSGR Common Requirements Issue 1 December 1995 GR 1089 CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunication Equipment Issue 2 November 1997 Revision 1 February 1999 Page xi 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 6 TA NWT 001210 TR TS Y 000827 Generic Requirements for High Bit Rate Digital Subscriber Lines HDSL Issue 1 Oct
250. ircuit and returned to the system via the ESF Datalink both at local and remote sites The framing format must be ESF in order for FEND information to be displayed Note For Site 1 FEND information is at A for Site 2 FEND information is at B 10263 A Figure 544 2 T1 NEND and FEND Locations 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 544 Page 3 of 4 CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 NEND FEND LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 HLXC HLXR LOOP2 LOOP2 LOOP2 gt FEND TO NETWORK MUX CRP1 RRP1 CRP2 RRP2 TO CUSTOMER ee mm KEY NEND means at the HLXC looking toward the customer HLXR FEND means at the HLXR looking toward the network HLXC CRP1 means at the central office side of the HRX1 looking toward the network HLXC RRP1 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX1 looking toward the customer HRX2 HLXR CRP2 means at the central office side of the HRX2 looking toward the network HRX1 HLXC RRP2 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX2 looking toward the customer HLXR Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 1 TL1 RRP1 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 2 TL1 CRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 3 TL1 RRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 4 TL1 NOTE CRP2 and RRP2 are not present when there is no HR
251. ircuits AND OR If present equip RLXIOR modules and provision DS1 circuits Assign performance monitoring thresholds for each 1251 in the system 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc For Details Go To DLP 526 DLP 527 DLP 528 DLP 549 DLP 558 DLP 536 DLP 535 DLP 550 DLP 529 DLP 530 DLP 516 DLP 532 DLP 534 DLP 533 DLP 556 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 004 Page 2 of 2 For Details TO 14 If equipped assign performance monitoring thresholds for each HDSL facility in the system DLP 557 15 Setalarm event notification level DLP 552 16 Set MPU alarm levels DLP 559 17 Set 253 MUX alarm levels DLP 560 18 If equipped set ODS2 alarm levels DLP 561 19 If equipped set HLX alarm levels DLP 562 20 If equipped set DLX alarm levels DLP 563 21 Ifequipped set RLX alarm levels DLP 518 22 Log off the Craft Interface DLP 564 23 Complete assignment forms and update office records as required by local procedures DLP 523 2 15 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 005 Page 1 of 2 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Summary The following procedures can be used for maintenance for a Soneplex Broadband system These procedures use the Craft Interface They do not have to be performed in any particular order except logging on and logging off DoltemsBelowAsRequired 222
252. is Port 2 or 3 Reference DLP 504 Local Craft Interface Connection 2 Verify that the cable length is correct for your application by referring to the EIA 232 protocol The maximum length is 50 feet 3 Verify that the cables and connectors are in good working condition 4 Verify that you are using a control terminal VT 100 or equivalent or a host computer with VT 100 emulation 5 Verify that the MPU is functioning properly by re installing it This procedure is non service affecting Reference DLP 502 MPU Installation and Testing Reference DLP 519 MPU Replacement and Testing 6 If you are using chassis Port 2 or 3 and are unable to logon to the local Craft Interface after following Steps 1 through 5 e Verify that Port 2 or 3 is configured for CRAFT through a connection to the MPU Craft Port Note Ports 2 and 3 must be configured through the Craft Interface first before they can be used because they do not default to CRAFT Reference DLP 504 Local Craft Interface Connection Reference DLP 549 Serial Port Configuration 7 If you are using the MPU Craft Port and are unable to logon to the local Craft Interface after following Steps 1 through 6 e Check your records to see if the MPU has been reconfigured for a different interface than Craft such as a TBOS or TL1 interface Note The MPU Craft Port defaults to CRAFT but can also be configured for TBOS TL1 or NONE Refer to the TBOS and TL1 sections in thi
253. is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Set Alarm Levels from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return 3 Select Set MPU Alarm Levels from the Set Alarm Levels Menu Press Enter or Return An MPU Alarm Levels screen with default values is shown in Figure 559 1 4 At the Equipment Shelf Alarms toggle fields select CRITICAL CR MAJOR MJ MINOR MN EVENT EV or NOT RPTD not reported for each field that you wish to change Note Abbreviations of the alarm field options except NOT RPTD will appear in the Active Alarms and Alarm History screens In addition what options you select at any alarm level setting screen will determine whether you will be notified of the alarm
254. is receiving error free data for the DS1 test signal selected Insert a 1251 test signal into the HLXR module NET IN jack using the DS1 test set Verify that all alarm indicators on the chassis are out and the DS3 test set with 251 option is receiving error free data in the DS1 selected for test Repeat procedure starting at Step 2 for all HLXC modules to be tested Record test results and update office records following local office practices Stop You have completed this procedure 2 68 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance Page 2 of 2 DSX 3 SONEPLEX BROADBAND DS3 TEST SET MON CHASSIS DS1 TEST SET SONEPLEX BROADBAND CHASSIS HAT DS1 TEST SET 6187 D Figure 520 1 Test Set Up Without HRX DSX 3 CHOSS CONNECT SONEPLEX BROADBAND DS3 TEST SET MON CHASSIS DS1 TEST SET SONEPLEX BROADBAND CHASSIS DS1 TEST SET 6658 D Figure 520 2 Test Set Up With HRX 2 69 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 521 Page 1 of 2 DLX INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for mounting DLX modules in the half height slots located in the middle of the chassis A typical DLX installation consists of a DLX installed in a chassis and a channel bank at the other end There is no protection for this signal Caution
255. iscarding the shipping containers and packing material in case a return is necessary 4 Inspect the components for broken or bent wire wrap pins on the chassis backplane Check the BNC connectors on the backplane to ensure that they are securely fastened 5 Inspect each module for broken or damaged indicators and switches 6 Does your work order call for you to store the modules in the chassis If No return the modules to their containers and store them securely for later use e If Yes when the chassis is installed slide the modules loosely into their slot locations on the chassis Do not plug them into the chassis 7 are any damaged or missing parts file a claim with the commercial carrier Contact ADC Telecommunications for replacement parts See the General Information section of this manual for procedures Stop You have completed this procedure 2 21 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 501 Page 1 of 2 CHASSIS INSPECTION Summary This procedure provides instructions for identifying the Soneplex Broadband chassis and module locations The chassis front and locations for modules are shown in Figure 501 1 The chassis backplane is shown in Figure 501 2 1 See Figure 501 1 to identify module locations at the front of the chassis working DS3 MUX module an APU and an MPU are always required The slots identified for lo
256. it ID 1 Circuit ID 1 6 1 1 1 6 2 1 1 6 3 1 1 6 4 1 1 7 1 1 1 7 2 1 21 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6155 B Figure 566 1 Display Circuit ID Screen 2 205 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 567 Page 1 of 2 RLX OR RXLIOR TO REPEATER VOLTAGE AND CURRENT TEST Summary This procedure provides instructions for measuring DC voltage and DC current being supplied by the RLX or RLXIOR module to the span repeater The V V I and I jacks provide monitor access to the voltage and current supplied to the repeater through the 1251 span Measurements are taken at the test jacks on the RLX module front panel across a 10 ohm resistor Measure DC Voltage 1 Refer to Figure 567 1 for an RLX front panel drawing Select VDC on the VOM and if so equipped select a voltage scale of 0 to 200 volts 2 Insert the black test probe into the V test jack and insert the red test probe into the V test jack Record the DC voltage for future reference Measure DC Current 3 Select VDC on the VOM and if so equipped select the millivolt scale The voltage in mV measured between the 1 and I jack is equal to the current in mA 4 Insert the black test probe into the I test jack and insert the red test probe into the I test jack The meter should read approxi
257. l Information SECTION 3 GENERAL INFORMATION 1 WARRANTY SOFTWARE ics codes 3 1 2 REPAIR ADVANCE REPLACEMENT 34 BOUE i cert ege 3 2 4 5 3 2 5 RETURNED MATERIAL LLL ciat ipei ed ule Ru ed e RUE lp RR AGES 3 2 6 CUSTOMER INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCE 3 3 1 WARRANTY SOFTWARE The Product and Software warranty policy and warranty period for all Products of ADC Telecommunications Inc hereinafter referred to as ADC is published in ADC s Warranty Software Handbook Contact the Business Broadband Group BBG Technical Assistance Center at 1 800 366 3891 extension 3223 in U S A or Canada or 952 946 3223 outside U S A and Canada for warranty or software information or for a copy of the Warranty Software Handbook 2 REPAIR ADVANCE REPLACEMENT POLICY repairs of ADC Products must be done by ADC or an authorized representative Any attempt to repair or modify ADC Products without prior written authorization from ADC shall void ADC s warranty If a malfunction cannot be resolved by the normal troubleshooting procedures call the BBG Technical Assistance Center at 1 800 366 3891 extension 3223 in U S A or Can
258. ld space ms options Press the Toggles backward through field options Input Typeany Overwrites the character at the character cursor Press Erases the character at the cursor Delete Toggle or Press If an edit has been made and Enter Input Enter once has already been pressed once Pressing Enter again saves the edit Toggle or No edit has been made and the Input cursor is no longer in that field or The edit has been saved using the arrow keys and pressing Enter once or The edit has been saved by pressing Enter twice Toggle or 5 f no edit has been made Moves Input the cursor to the next field If an edit has been made Enters an edit without saving it and moves the cursor to another field Press If the arrow key has not been Enter once pressed Stops the edit mode and enters the edit without saving it 4 USING A DOCUMENT The procedures in this section are written in the Task Oriented Practice TOP format The TOP method of presenting information provides step by step instructions for the successful completion of the indicated task To find the instructions for performing enclosure installation plug in unit installation and initial turn up and installation troubleshooting tasks follow these steps 1 Find the task to be performed in the Task Index List XL 001 Page 1 5 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 1 Introd
259. lecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 105 Page 8 of 8 Table 105 1 TL1 Commands continued omo wsmemw 2 284 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 106 Page 1 of 2 ACCESS IDENTIFIER Summary Circuits displayed in the Craft Interface are identified by the Access Identifier AID Figure 106 1 shows an example of a circuit with descriptions of each part of the AID The DS3 signal is demultiplexed by 053 MUX into 28 DS1 signals and seven 1252 signals See Table 106 1 for DS1 signal routing details See Table 106 2 for DS2 signal routing details See Figure 106 2 for chassis slot numbering CIRCUIT AID Shelf Number Group Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Site or Loop Number 1 Local or HDSL Loop 1 or 2 Remote or HDSL Loop 2 Circuit Identifier Slot Number 1 2 3 or 4 T1 T2 T8 or HDSL EQUIPMENT AID Equipment Type LIU MPU MXP MXW TAU or EXT and Shelf Number Group Number 1 2 3 4 7 Site or Loop Number 1 Local or HDSL EQPT LIU1 7 2 1 Loop 1 or 2 Remote or HDSL Loop 2 Identifier for Equipment AID Slot Number 1 2 3 or 4 LIU Line Interface Unit MPU Main Processor Unit MXP 53 MUX Protect MXW DS MUX Working TAU Remote Test Access Unit RTAU EXT External 14852 A Figure 10
260. lect Test Access Unit Status Commands from the System Maintenance menu Press Enter or Return A Test Access Unit Status Commands screen appears as shown in Figure 575 2 If a TAU module is installed and a Version B D53 MUX module is in place to support it the TAU Present Status field indicates YES 2 239 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 575 Page 2 of 5 5 Determine the Group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 for the DS1 signal you wish to drop monitor At the Group prompt select the group number Determine the DS1 number 1 through 4 for the DS1 signal you wish to drop monitor At the DS1 prompt select the DS1 signal Use the arrow keys to move to the Drop Direction Command toggle field Select blank field NONE CUSTOMER or NETWORK Press Enter or Return The following confirmation message appears This Command Could Be Service Affecting Are You Sure y n 8 Press Enter or Return then observe the indications on the monitoring equipment Note The Drop Direction Status field displays NONE the default CUSTOMER or NETWORK 9 To drop other DS1 signals repeat Steps 1 through 8 making different selections in Steps 5 Group and 6 DS1 Number Note All possible DS1 Drop and Insert configurations using TAU module are illustrated in Figure 575 3 for reference Note The Intrusive Test indicator on the f
261. lect the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys or number keys to select Unit Configuration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys or number keys to select HLX Configuration from the Unit Configuration menu Press Enter or Return The HLX Configuration menu is shown in Figure 531 1 3 Select HLX Unit Configuration from the HLX Configuration menu Press Enter or Return The HLX Unit Configuration menu is shown in Figure 531 2 4 Starting at the top of Table
262. lected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites 10456 A Figure 542 5 0052 NEND Locations LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND FEND T1 DS1 DS1 7 r Span RLX Repeater DS1 T1 DS1 amp FEND NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites FEND means ESF PM information collected at the opposite end of spans from the affected circuit and returned to the system via ESF datalink The framing format must be ESF in order for FEND information to be displayed 10265 A Figure 542 6 RLX NEND and FEND Locations 2 149 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 543 Page 1 of 1 ALARM SUMMARY DISPLAY Summary Use this command to display a summary of the current alarms for the Soneplex Broadband chassis selected Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields Note Pressing the R key clears the screen and displays only the current alarm status 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Display Alarm Summary from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return Display Alarm Summary screen is shown in Figure 543 1 Note Each time the shelf status changes the screen i
263. lf Housekeeping Labels screen is shown in Figure 550 1 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the Condition Label input fields You may type over any existing alarm condition names or pressing the space bar to erase the text Condition label names can be 1 to 16 characters in length The first character must be an alpha character middle characters can be alpha numeric or hyphens and the last character must be either alpha or numeric 4 Assign the entry by pressing Enter or Return 5 Repeat Steps 3 through 4 for each alarm contact Stop You have completed this procedure 2 168 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 550 Page 2 of 2 SHELF HOUSEKEEPING LABELS at Condition Label 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6143 A Figure 550 1 Shelf Housekeeping Labels Screen 2 169 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 551 Page 1 of 3 MPU SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMAND Summary This procedure is used to download the MPU software into an MPU module This involves the transfer of two files It requires 12 to 17 minutes to transfer both files depending on the type of host computer and the communication program used A Caution You must use a Version 5 X module with the Version 5 3 software Caution Perform a configuration upload first Refer to DLP 5
264. ll APU indicators light If any indicator does not light replace the APU Stop You have completed this procedure 2 32 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 504 Page 1 of 2 LOCAL CRAFT INTERFACE CONNECTION Summary This procedure provides instructions for accessing the Craft Interface It can be accessed locally from a VT 100 compatible terminal or a host computer connected to either the front or rear of the Soneplex Broadband chassis 1 a 6 Locate the port that will be used to connect the control terminal or host computer to the Craft Interface The MPU Craft port is located on the front of the MPU as shown in Figure 504 1 and is configured as a DCE connection Ports 2 and 3 are located on the chassis rear panel and are configured as DTE connections Select the cable that is required for connecting the terminal or computer to the chassis Maximum length of the cable is specified by the EIA 232 protocol A straight through 25 pin connectorized EIA 232 cable is required to connect the terminal or computer to the MPU Craft port Pin out information for the MPU Craft port is shown in Table 504 1 A null modem cable or adapter is required to connect the terminal or computer to Port 2 or Port 3 Ports 2 and 3 provide an EJA 232 interface and use 25 pin D subminiature female connectors for the cable connections Connect one end of the cable to the
265. m Maintenance screen appears as shown in Figure 570 2 2 211 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 2 of 18 ut RTAU STATUS 8825 AMI LINE CODE INTRUSIVE 5 BIPOLAR ACCESS RX 1 TX 12693 Figure 570 1 RTAU Front Panel SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Force APS Commands Reset LED Test Commands Execute ACO Alarm Cut Off Loopback Status Commands Display Inventory Display Circuit IDs Upload Download Commands Test Access Unit Commands 1 2 3 4 Bis 6 7 8 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 5323 A Figure 570 2 System Maintenance Menu 2 212 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 3 of 18 4 Usethe arrow or number keys to select Test Access Unit Commands Press Enter or Return The RTAU Configuration screen appears as shown in Figure 570 3 RTAU CONFIGURATION 1 RTAU Unit Configuration 2 User Pattern Definition Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14868 A Figure 570 3 RTAU Configuration Menu Note The User Pattern Definition screen is not available for the MPU 5 3 release 5 Use the arrow or number keys to select RTAU Unit Configuration from the RTAU Configuration menu Press Enter or Return The RTAU Config screen app
266. mately 600 mV 60 mA Stop You have completed this procedure 2 206 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 567 Page 2 of 2 14864 A 11784 A Version A2 RLX Version B RLX RLXIOR Figure 567 1 RLX Module Front Panel Layouts 2 207 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 568 Page 1 of 2 VERSION C HLXC VOLTAGE TO HLXR TEST Summary This procedure provides instructions for measuring DC voltage and DC current being supplied by the Version C HLXC to the HLXR The V I and I jacks provide monitor access to the voltage and current supplied to the HLXR through the HDSL span These measurements are taken at the HLXC s test jacks across a 10 Ohm resistor Measure DC Voltage 1 Select VDC on the VOM and if so equipped select a voltage scale of 0 to 200 volts 2 Refer to Figure 568 1 for a front panel drawing of the HLXC Insert the black test probe into the test jack and insert the red test probe into the V test jack A typical meter reading should be approximately 130 volts depending on the cable length in the loop Measure DC Current 3 Select VDC on the VOM and if so equipped select the millivolt scale The voltage in mV measured between the 1 and I jack is equal to the current in mA 4 Insert the black test probe into the I test jack and i
267. minute 10 minute 15 minute 30 minute 45 minute 1 hour SVC Craft Address Up to 15 contiguous digits each 0 to 9 or blank SVC TL1 Address Up to 15 contiguous digits each 0 to 9 or blank These are user programmable parameters through the Craft Interface X 25 CONFIGURATION Data Link LAPB Parameters Address Field Assignment Window Size Frame Size 2104 bits Network Layer Parameters Circuit Type Logical Channel Application Packet Size Window Size D bit Support Keyboard Timeout N A 30 MIN SVC Craft Address SVC TL1 Address Press CONTROL A For Assistance Figure 558 1 X 25 Port Configuration with Default Settings 2 188 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc CONFIGURABLE DEFAULT See Table 558 2 8 5 6148 D ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 559 Page 1 of 2 MPU ALARM LEVEL SETTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for setting MPU Alarm Levels Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field
268. n backplane 0 0 YELLOW HSKP alarm names can be configured in the Shelf Housekeeping Labels screen described in DLP 550 CONDITION gt n 1 continued 2 293 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 8 of 13 Table 101 1 Alarm Descriptions Conditions continued DS3 MUX ALARMS AID EQPT MXW EQPT MXP COMM FAIL CONFIG MISMATCH BOARD FAIL Fatal hardware or software error COMM FAIL MPU unable to communicate with ODS2 CONFIG MISMATCH Configuration mismatch with mate module or remote module or RMT Housekeeping alarm detected at remote end QFLC or QLX HSKP2 PROTECT COMM FAIL Unable to communicate with mate module Working Protect OPTICAL COMM FAIL Unable to communicate with remote module VERSION MISMATCH Incompatible software versions with mate module or remote module 0052 ALARMS AID 1 CONDITION DESCRIPTION LOOPED BACK Signal looped back at either ODS2 or remote RECEIVE LOS Loss Of Signal detected at remote end QFLC or QLX TRANSMIT LOS Transmit Loss of Signal detected at remote end QFLC or QLX hardware failure 0052 ALARMS AID T2 T BER Bit Error Rate exceeds user defined threshold continued 2 294 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 9 of
269. n be displayed on your screen Reference DLP 526 Craft Interface System Logon To silence any audible alarms use the arrow or number keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu and execute an Alarm Cut Off ACO Reference DLP 539 ACO Alarm Cut Off Command Use the arrow or number keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return The Alarms menu will be displayed on your screen Use the arrow or number keys to select Display Active Alarms or Display Alarm History from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return The screen you selected will appear Active Alarms screens are shown in Figure 101 1 MPU Software Version 5 1 and Figure 101 2 V5 2 Alarm History screens are shown in Figure 101 3 V5 1 and Figure 101 4 V5 2 Note If the date and time of the alarm are important to your diagnosis select the Alarm History screen The Alarm History screen displays the date and time of the alarms stored in the history file Screen Navigation A maximum of 112 entries is displayed on the screen Use the following for description of keys that can be used to navigate the screen KEY ACTION Up Arrow Scrolls display up 1 line Down Arrow Scrolls display down one line Left Arrow Scrolls display up 1 page Right Arrow Scrolls display down one page Control R Queries the database and refreshes the screen 6 Column Descriptions There are six columns that appear on the Active Alarms screen Access Identifier Locn
270. n of the T1 repeater The A2 RLX s maximum span power is 8 watts Table 101 8 Broadband Power Characteristics with Version B RLX RLXIOR VERSION B RLX NO OF RLXS IN MAX POWER MAX POWER MAX CURRENT DRAIN CONFIGURATION CHASSIS CONSUMPTION DISSIPATION AT 48 VDC 130 VDC With Span Power 23 4 watts 6 6 watts 487 mA 130 VDC 1 28 1 Note Power characteristics for fully configured chassis include common equipment APU 7 5 watts MPU 5 watts and two DS3 MUX modules 8 watts each for a total of 28 watts Note If a T1 repeater is powered by the RLX Broadband power characteristics will change depending on the power consumption of the T1 repeater The Version B RLX RLXIOR s maximum span power is 8 watts at 2130 VDC and 16 watts at 130 VDC 2 257 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 102 Page 1 of 5 LOOPBACK PROCESS DESCRIPTION Summary The HDSL loopback process is similar to other T1 intelligent repeater methods For Version D and later HLX modules the HLXC loopback is like an intelligent office repeater loopback The HLXR loopback and HRX loopback are like an intelligent inline T1 repeater loopback The HDSL loopback operation is described by the diagram in Figure 102 1 The four states are Disarmed Armed Loopup Loopup Time Out Disable DISARMED STATE ARMING TIME OUT ARM ACTIVATION LOOPUP
271. n the Loopback Status Commands screen when the DS1 Loopback Mode field the DS3 MUX Configuration screen is configured as C Bit parity Reference DLP 529 DS3 MUX Configuration Note The DEACTIVATE command can be performed at any field that does not display and will deactivate all loopbacks You must deactivate the currently active loopback to activate another loopback Note Only applicable loopback actions for the unit will be displayed 8 The following message appears Modifying LOOPBACK status Are You Sure y n 9 Enable your selection by pressing Y for yes or cancel your selection by pressing N for no When you press Y the screen will disappear for a few seconds The screen will then display the currently active loopback Note The Programmable Loopback Armed State read only field displays either ARMING DISABLED or ARMED loopback arming TAP Reference DLP 573 HLX Loopback Configuration Note At the MPU 5 2 Craft Interface when both loops on any HDSL loop segment down no loopbacks at units downstream of the condition may be activated The Loopback screen will show N A under the name of any affected unit s column 1 LOCAL REPEATER REPEATER REPEATER2 or REMOTE HDSL loop segments that may be affected include the loops between e the HLXC and the HLXR no repeater e the HLXC and the HRX one repeater e the HRX and the HLXR one repeater e the HLXC and
272. n the front panel of the RLXIOR light yellow This indicates that the LEDs are functional If all LEDs do not light yellow the module is defective replace the module then repeat Steps 1 through 6 Note The MPU must be installed in the chassis for Step 6 to work 7 Repeatthis entire procedure for each RLXIOR module Stop You have completed this procedure 2 80 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 525 Page 1 of 6 RLX INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for installing Version A RLX or Version B RLX B1 RLX and B2 RLX modules in the chassis and verifying that each unit is functioning A typical installation consists of an RLX module installed in a chassis that is connected to a repeater or a series of line repeaters There is no protection for this signal Version A RLX modules provide an APU interface and can function without an MPU There is no APU interface for either Version B RLX module and an MPU must be installed to enable configuration and alarm reporting for these modules Other differences between Version A and Version B RLX modules are described below A Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When wo
273. nd QLX Configuration selections The MPU software installed is used with either the Soneplex Broadband system or the Soneplex Loop Extender QLX modules are not used in the Broadband chassis 5 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure 2 122 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 536 Page 2 of 2 EDIT MENU SECURITY Menu or Command Privilege Menu or Command Privilege Edit Menu Security System TID Time Date Serial Port Configuration X 25 Configuration Shelf Housekeeping Alarms Force APS Commands Reset LED Test Commands Execute ACO Loopback Status Commands Upload Configuration Data Download Configuration Data Download Application Software DS1 Perf Mon Configuration HDSL Perf Mon Configuration Test Access Unit Commands Clear Alarm History Set MPU Alarm Levels Set MUX Alarm Levels Set ODS2 Alarm Levels Set OLX Alarm Levels Set HLX Alarm Levels Set RLX Alarm Levels Set DLX Alarm Levels MUX Configuration ODS2 Configuration QLX Configuration HLX Configuration RLX Configuration DLX Configuration Edit User Accounts 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 UJ tO UJ UJ Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14854 A Figure 536 1 Edit Menu Security Screen with Defaults 2 123 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61
274. nd allows T1 alarm reporting by the MPU and enables DS1 PM data collection OOS Out Of Removes facility from service and stops alarm Service reporting by the MPU Input Enter up to 30 Enter additional information in the space provided Blank alphanumeric characters Note HLXC Switch and HLXR Switch Setting fields display the switch settings of the module being configured 2 105 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 532 Page 1 of 3 DLX CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for establishing initial configuration of DLX module s or view and or edit the configurations for each DLX module in the Soneplex Broadband system Equip provision assign thresholds as required and assign service state Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is
275. nits Detection time is 3 secs Enables response to programmable loopback codes and overrides hardware configuration settings Disables response to programmable loopback codes and overrides hardware configuration settings 16 bit codes can be set to any 16 bit binary value except all Os all 1s ora value that is already used in another 16 bit code The signal is sent inband Units in loopup state go back to armed state Detection time is 5 secs 16 bit codes can be set to any 16 bit binary value except all Os all 1s ora value that is already used in another 16 bit code This disables loopup time out Active loopbacks stay up until deactivation or disarm code is received Detection time is 3 secs This number represents the minutes that the loopback will remain in effect before reverting to the normal non loopback state Setting the loopback time out period to 0 zero disables the time out feature This field reflects the condition of the NID enable disable jumper wire on the HLXR edge card connector pins 6 and 8 If no jumper wire is present between these pins the display will show ENABLED If a jumper wire is present between these pins the display will shown DISABLED If the HLXR does not have an NID jumper wire option the display will show ENABLED DLP 573 Page 6 of 6 TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT 1100 0111 0100 0010 MPU V5 1 DISABLED MPU V5 ENABLED No HRX NOT APPL 1001 0011 1001 0
276. nput 16 binary characters 0 s 16 bit codes can be set to any 16 bit 1101 0011 1101 0011 Code and 1 s must be entered binary value except all Os all 15 or Activation Code is a value that is already used in another equivalent to 16 bit code The signal is sent Programmable inband HDSL units go to loopup Code state when they are in armed state Loopup is activated for selected units Detection time is 3 secs HLXC Programmable Toggle ENABLED Enables response to programmable MPU V5 1 Lpbk loopback codes and overrides DISABLED hardware configuration settings DISABLED Disables response to programmable MPU V5 2 loopback codes and overrides ENABLED hardware configuration settings ESF Inband Loopback Toggle ENABLED Version E HLXC Enables ESF Version E HLXC inband loopback ENABLED DISABLED Version E HLXC Disables ESF Version D or earlier inband loopback HLXC N A N A Version D or earlier HLXC only this field cannot be configured n order for the ESF Inband Loopback field to be configured some HLX Unit Configuration screen fields must be configured as follows Unit Equip State EQUIPPED Unit Service State IS Provision YES TI Service State IS and Framing Format ESF continued 2 235 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 573 Page 5 of 6 Table 573 1 HLX Loopback Configuration F
277. ns HLXC HLXR MPU SOFTWARE STATUS STATUS STATUS LOCATION SYSTEM TYPE VERSION SCREEN LOCATIONS DESCRIPTIONS One HRX V5 1 HLX HRX Figure 548 2 C SIDE Figure 548 4 Status R SIDE One or two V5 2 HLX HRX Figure 548 3 Figure 548 5 HRXs Status CRP2 RRP2 Note If one or no HRX is present in a two repeater system or no HRX is present in a one repeater system the screens will show N A in the related HRX column 2 160 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 548 Page 2 of 5 Table 548 2 HLX and HRX Status Field Displays STATUS FIELD MODULE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION DS1 Loopback ACTIVE A loopback is active or has been deactivated at INACTIVE the HLXC HRX or HLXR DS1 LOS YES NO A loss of signal has occurred at the HLXC HRX or HLXR DS1 Line Code AMI B8ZS AUTO See DLP 531 for descriptions of related HLX N A configuration fields DS1 Frame Format UNFRAMED See DLP 531 for descriptions of related HLX Ft ONLY configuration fields ESF SF N A AUTO Loop Reversal YES NO N A A loop reversal has occurred at the HLXC HRX or HLXR HSKPI HSKP2 YES NO N A Housekeeping alarms 1 and or 2 have occurred at the HLXC HRX or HLXR PWRI PWR2 YES NO N A Power alarms 1 and or 2 have occurred at the HLXC HRX or HLXR STATUS FIELD HDSL LOOPS DISPLAY DESCRIPTION HDSL Start Up IP YES NO N A MPUS 2 softwa
278. ns and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 2 6 U Enter or Return U menu Press Enter or Return The HLX Configuration menu is shown in Figure 573 1 U se the arrow or number keys to select Unit Configuration from the Main Menu Press se the arrow or number keys to select HLX Configuration from the Unit Configuration se the arrow or number keys to select Loopback Configuration from the HLX Configuration menu Press Enter or Return HLX Loopback Configuration screens are shown in Figure 573 2 MPU V5 1 without an HRX Figure 573 3 MPU V5 1 with one HRX and Figure 573 4 MPU V5 2 with two HRXs Starting at the top of Table 573 1 and working your way to the bottom configure the HLX for the group and slot selected Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each HLX module installed in the chassis Stop You have completed this procedure 2 232 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 573 Page 2 of 6 HLX CONFIGURATION 1 HLX Unit Configuration 2 Loopback Configuration Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6765 A Figure 573 1 HLX Configuration Menu HLX LOOPBAC
279. nsert the red test probe into the I test jack The meter should typically read between 550 and 900 mV 55 to 90 mA Stop You have completed this procedure 2 208 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 568 Page 2 of 2 Figure 568 1 Version C HLXC Module Front Panel 2 209 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 569 Page 1 of 1 RLX EQUIPPED CIRCUIT CROSS CONNECTS Summary RLX modules can be configured to supply span power over the 1251 pairs to power the repeater modules To remove current from the pairs before making cross connects partially withdraw each RLX module from the chassis so that electrical contact with the rear connector is broken Make necessary cross connects then re install the RLX modules AN Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded 1 Open the chassis cover 2 Use the ejector at the bottom of each RLX front panel to carefully disengage the module from its connector 3 Partially withdraw each RLX module from its mounting sl
280. o any number from 0 through 7 The chassis will return TBOS Display 1 data when it receives a TBOS request for that address If COMPRESSED TBOS mode was selected in Step 14 move the cursor to the Display 2 Response Address input field Set the address for TBOS compressed display 2 to any number from 0 through 7 The chassis will return TBOS Display 2 data when it receives a TBOS request for that address Note The Display 2 Response Address must be different from the Display 1 Response 17 2 166 Address Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 549 Page 3 of 3 18 If you made changes to port configurations log off and then log back on to the system to implement the changes Reference DLP 564 Craft Interface System Logoff Reference DLP 526 Craft Interface System Logon Stop You have completed this procedure SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION Port Label Application Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Flow Control Keyboard Timeout NOT APPL TBOS CONFIGURATION TBOS Mode EXPANDED Display 1 Response Address NOT APPL Display 2 Response Address NOT APPL Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6142 A Figure 549 1 Serial Port Configuration Screen Table 549 1 Serial Port Default Settings PARAMETER DCE DTE Flow Control NONE NONE Keyboard Timeout 30 MIN NOT APPL
281. o the Soneplex Remote Test Access Unit Installation Instructions manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual 18 Install and test the Streaker STK module if present DLP 571 19 Complete assignment forms and update office records as required by local procedures DLP 523 20 Close the chassis front cover when installation of modules is complete The chassis may remain powered up unless otherwise directed in the work order 2 11 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 003 Page 1 of 2 0052 MODULE AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES Summary This procedure tells how to connect a Craft Interface device to the Soneplex equipment and configure ODS2 modules It also tells how to connect test equipment and how to perform an end to end test of a Soneplex system with ODS2 modules Protection switching tests are also provided in case protect modules are employed in the system The procedure assumes the equipment in the Soneplex chassis and at the remote Fiber Loop Converter has been installed and has passed local tests It also assumes that fiber has been installed at both ends and the circuit connection is complete This procedure must be performed before attempting to operate the entire circuit or system that will be using this equipment A Danger Do not look into the ends of any optical fiber or look directly in
282. ober 1991 OTGR Generic Operations Interfaces Non OSI Communications Architecture Sections 11 1 and 11 3 Issue 1 LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS The acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual are detailed in the following list ADM AIS ALM AMI ANSI APS APU ATAG AWG B3ZS B8ZS BB BBC BER BIP BPS BPV CAM CCAS CEV CGA CLEI CO CPE CPM CR CRC CRP CSA CSU CTAG CV DCE Page xii 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Add Drop Multiplexer Alarm Indication Signal Alarm Alternate Mark Inversion American National Standards Institute Automatic Protection Switching Alarm Processor Unit Autonomously Generated Correlation Tag American Wire Gauge Bipolar Three Zero Substitution Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Broadband Broadband Chassis Bit Error Rate Bit Interleaved Parity Bits Per Second Bipolar Violation Communications Access Module Communication Channel Access System Controlled Environmental Vault Carrier Group Alarm Customer Interface Craft Interface Circuit Common Language Equipment Identifier Central Office Customer Premises Equipment Craft Performance Monitor module used in a Remote Terminal cabinet Critical Cyclic Redundancy Code Repeater Central Office network side MPU version 5 2 and 5 3 Carrier Serving Area Channel Service Unit Correlation Tag Code Violation Data Communication Equipment DFMS DLP DLX DS1 DS2 DS3 DS3 MUX
283. ocal power at remote DI HLXR 28 1 1 28 1 28 294 watts 16 9 amps 5 5 watts 115 mA 7 0 watts 292 mA 5 5 watts 115 mA 5 5 watts 182 watts 14 0 watts 420 watts Span Power OFF 5 5 watts Local power at remote DI HLXR No power values because HRXs require span power Note Power values for a fully configured chassis 28 HLXCs include the power of the common equipment APU 7 5 watts MPU 5 watts and two 053 MUX modules 8 watts each for a total of 28 watts 2 256 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 9 of 9 Table 101 6 Broadband V5 Power Characteristics with ODS2 Modules NO OF 00525 MAX POWER MAX CURRENT DRAIN IN CHASSIS ONSUMPTION DISSIPATION AT 48 VDC Note Power characteristics for fully configured chassis include common equipment APU 7 5 watts MPU 5 watts and two DS3 MUX modules 8 watts each for a total of 28 watts Table 101 7 Broadband Power Characteristics with A2 RLX A2 RLX MAX CURRENT DRAIN CONFIGURATION IN CHASSIS CONSUMPTION DISSIPATION AT 48 VDC Note Power characteristics for fully configured chassis include common equipment APU 7 5 watts MPU 5 watts and two DS3 MUX modules 8 watts each for a total of 28 watts Without Span Power Note If a T1 repeater is powered by the RLX Broadband power characteristics will change depending on the power consumptio
284. ode Toggle Alternate Mark Inversion AMI B8ZS Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Pulse Equalization Toggle 0 133 ft 133 266 ft The DS1 signal output provides 0 133 ft 266 399 ft 399 533 ft or standard DSX signal levels which 533 655 ft can be compensated for various distances T1 BER Toggle BER Threshold can be set between When the Bit Error Rate threshold 107 Threshold 107 and 1079 is exceeded an alarm is triggered Loopback Input Enter a number from 0 to 255 This field represents the number of 30 Timeout Period minutes that the loopback remains in effect before reverting to the normal non loopback state Setting the loopback time out period to 0 disables the time out feature Circuit Identifier Input Up to 20 characters This represents the customer s None circuit ID The first and last characters must be alpha or numeric middle characters can be alpha numeric or hyphens Service State Toggle IS In Service Allows alarms to be reported to 5 the MPU OOS Out Of Service Prevents T1 alarms from being reported to the MPU 2 108 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 533 Page 1 of 5 RLXIOR CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for configuring the RLXIOR module The RLXIOR configuration process assumes that the MPU is installed and the Craft Interface is operating Config
285. odes and overrides hardware configuration settings 16 bit codes can be programmed to any 16 bit binary value except all Os all Is or a value that is already used in another 16 bit code The signal is sent inband HDSL units go to loopup state when they are in armed state Loopup is activated for selected units Detection time is 3 secs MPU V5 1 UNIT SWITCH MPU V5 2 ENABLED MPU V5 1 1100 0111 0100 0010 MPU V5 1100 0111 0101 0100 DISABLED 1100 0111 0100 0001 No HRX NOT APPL continued ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance Table 573 1 HLX Loopback Configuration Fields continued Second HRX in system only HRX2 Activation Code Activation Code is equivalent to Programmable Code Toggle HRX in system only HRX Programmable Lpbk Common Deactivate Code Lpbk Timeout Disable Code Display Lpbk Timeout Period HLXR NID Loopback Switch Setting 16 binary characters 0 s and 175 must be entered ENABLED DISABLED 16 binary characters 0 s and 175 must be entered 16 binary characters 0 s and 175 must be entered Enter a number from 0 to 255 ENABLED or DISABLED 16 bit codes can be programmed to any 16 bit binary value except all Os all Is or a value that is already used in another 16 bit code The signal is sent inband HDSL units go to loopup state when they are in armed state Loopup is activated for selected u
286. ogon The system allows a one character minimum and ten character maximum Only ASCII alpha numeric or hyphen characters are allowed Single word User Names in all upper or lower case are easiest to remember If there is already a user name assigned a new user name can be entered replacing the existing user name This field is case sensitive Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Password field A maximum of ten characters can be entered in this field A minimum of two characters with one character being a number is required Only ASCII alpha numeric or hyphen characters are allowed At the Password field type the password If there is already a password assigned a new password can be entered replacing the existing password This field is case sensitive 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 535 Page 2 of 2 6 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Privilege Level field Use the space bar to select the privilege level The lowest security level is 1 and the highest level is 5 e Users assigned Level 5 have access to all menu selections Level 5 is assigned to the system administrator e Level 3 is often assigned to the operating technician these users have access to Levels 1 2 and 3 e Level 2 is normally assigned to a local technician these users have access to Levels 1 and 2 e Users assigned Level 1 have access to only those menus as
287. ommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 562 Page 2 of 3 8 Move to the HDSL Facility Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR EVENT or NOT RPTD for each field that you wish to change Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting 9 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure HLX ALARM LEVELS Equipment Alarms COMM FAIL RIMARY POWI LOOP REVERSAL 1 ECONDARY POWER TP RNG REVERSAL 1 ERSION MISMATCH DS1 Facility Alarms CUSTOMER LOOPBACK MINO NETWORK LOOPBACK MINO HDSL Facility Alarms DC CONTINUITY T BERP FE T SNR FE LOF FE T BERP NE T SNR NE LOF NE T PA FE RECOVERY Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6153 C Figure 562 1 HLX Alarm Levels Screen with Default Values 2 197 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 562 Page 3 of 3 Table 562 1 HLX Alarm Level Defaults DC CONTINUITY 2 198 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 563 Page 1 of 2 DLX ALARM LEVEL SETTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for setting DLX Alarm Levels Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that i
288. on and HLXR Simplex Power of the module being configured are displayed at the bottom of the screen The Version D and later HLXC module can be provisioned to provide fractional service by deactivating one of the HDSL loops Loop 2 or by selectively blocking specified channels See the DSO Channel and Blocked Channel Pattern fields continued 2 102 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 531 Page 5 of 7 Table 531 1 HLXC Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Half AIS Feature Toggle ENABLED This selection activates the Half AIS mode An DISABLED Alarm Indication Signal all 1s is generated on the outgoing 1251 path only when both HDSL loops are in a LOSW Loss of Synch Word state In Half AIS mode when only one HDSL loop is in a LOSW state the transmitted DS1 signal will continue to the payload containing transparent data in the 12 channels related to the operating loop all 1s pattern will fill the remaining 12 channels associated with the loop in the LOSW state DISABLED This selection activates the Full AIS mode An AIS signal is generated on the outgoing DS1 path whenever either one or both HDSL loops are in a LOSW state HDSL Service State Toggle IS In Service Allows HDSL alarms to be reported to the MPU and enables HDSL PM data collection Must be set to IS for reporting of equipmen
289. on the chassis for connecting the ESD wrist band Ensure that all modules removed from the equipment or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Remove D1 053 MUX from protective packaging Refer to Figure 505 1 for D53 MUX module locations Using the ejectors fully seat the DI DS3 MUX in the slot labeled MXW Because of the large connector on the back of this module a significant amount of force is required to properly seat the module in the backplane connector Verify the following e The STATUS indicators first appeared red turned yellow and now remain green The ONLINE indicator is lighted green The DS3 LOS indicator is lighted red indicating a lack of DS3 signal If these three conditions are met continue to Step 5 If not replace the D1 053 MUX and return to Step On the APU press LMPTST APS switch If all DS3 MUX indicators light continue to Step 6 If not replace the D1 053 MUX and return to Step If this system is to be configured as DS3 Protected continue to Step 7 If not Stop You have completed this procedure Remove a D1 053 MUX from protective packaging and inspect the module for damage Note The online indicator will not light green for the Protect 053 MUX Only one module at a time can be online Install the D1 DS3 MUX in the chassis slot labeled MXP 2 3
290. onditions SF ESF SLC96 and unframed Input Signal Level 0 dB to 33 dB Clock recovery range for loop timing Output Signal LBO Settings 0 0 7 5 15 0 and 22 5 dB Output Signal Range Up to 3 000 feet 914 4 meters Up to 6 000 feet 1 828 8 over 22 AWG wire meters depending on cable characteristics 60 mA 140 VDC maximum Up to 8 or 16 watts System Input Voltage Range 42 5 to 56 5 VDC 48 VDC nominal 7 isaMpezomumus 007 continued 2 253 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 6 of 9 Table 101 1 Soneplex Broadband System V5 Specifications continued Line Rate 1 544 Mbps 130 ppm max O Alam 06 2 254 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 7 of 9 Table 101 2 053 MUX Power Characteristics MAX POWER MAX CURRENT DRAIN CONSUMPTION DISSIPATION AT 48 VDC Note Two DS3 MUXs one working and one protect are used per chassis in Broadband V5 applications Table 101 3 Broadband V5 Power Characteristics with DLX NO OF DLXS IN MAX POWER MAX CURRENT DRAIN CHASSIS CONSUMPTION DISSIPATION AT 48 VDC Note Power characteristics for fully configured chassis include common equipment APU 7 5 watts MPU 5 watts and two 053
291. onnects an SPD to the line incoming from the F direction and a TSG to the line outgoing in the F direction similar to SPLTF mode The signal in the E direction is looped back The LOOPE mode is a full split of both A and B transmissions paths The incoming line in the E direction is connected to the SPD and this line is connected to the outgoing line in the E direction The circuit will be looped in one direction The outgoing line in the F direction non test direction will be connected to a QRSS source and the line incoming from the F direction is terminated by the nominal characteristic impedance of the line The LOOPF mode is a full split of both A and B transmissions paths The incoming line in the F direction is connected to the SPD and this line is connected to the outgoing line in the F direction The circuit will be looped in one direction The outgoing line in the E direction non test direction will be connected to a QRSS source and the line incoming from the E direction is terminated by the nominal characteristic impedance of the line DISABLE When DISABLE is selected no monitor or split access can take place Setting the Mode field to DISABLE also stops any measurement in progress as if the Measurement field described below had been set to STOP SIGNAL GENERATOR SETUP FIELDS Pattern Type Toggle OVERVIEW If the desired pattern type is not available select the User Code option to enter a pattern 32 bits or less QRS Quasi
292. oopback Status Commands Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6132 A Figure 541 2 Loopback Status Commands Menu 2 133 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 5 of 16 DS3 MUX LOOPBACK SELECTION FIELD High Speed Loopback Status Commands Unit Location COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type DS3MUX Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6665 C Note Do not perform a DS3 loopback when the Soneplex Broadband chassis is connected to 053 CAM unit in Soneplex CCAS system Figure 541 3 High Speed 083 MUX Loopback Status Commands Screen HLXC LOOPBACK HRX LOOPBACK HLXR LOOPBACK SELECTION FIELD SELECTION FIELD SELECTION FIELD Low Speed Loopback Status Commands 51 4 Unit Location REPEATER REMOTE COMMANDS Loopback STATUS Unit Type Programmable Loopback Armed State ARMING DISABLED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 11379 A Figure 541 4 Low Speed Loopback Status Commands Screen 2 134 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 6 of 16 Table 541 1 Loopback Selection Field Options FIELD UNIT TYPE LOOPBACK TYPE OPTION SHOWN IN DS3 MUX HIGH SPEED HDSL SYSTEM WITH ONE HRX LOW SPEED HDSL SYSTEM WITH TWO HRXS LOW SPEED FIBER OPTIC SYSTEM W
293. or assistance 6651 B Figure 102 1 DS1 15 Minute Performance Monitoring Report DS1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS Circuit 1 Site LOCAL Report Type DAILY Circuit ID FCP FCP FE ESP FE CSSP FE ESL FE SESP FE SEFSP FE PERIOD STATUS CVP FE UASP FE 01 01 93 NE NA FE NA Press CONTROL A for assistance 6652 B Figure 102 2 DS1 Daily Performance Monitoring Report 2 305 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 7 of 11 DS1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS Site LOCAL Report Type SUMMARY Circuit 1 Circuit ID FCP SESL SASP FCP FE ESP FE CSSP FE ESL FE SESP FE SEFSP FE PERIOD STATUS CVP FE UASP FE 01 01 93 Press CONTROL A for assistance 6653 B Figure 102 3 051 Summary Performance Monitoring Report HDSL PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS Group 1 Circuit 2 Loop 1 Report Type 15 MINUTE Circuit ID PERIOD 0 0 0 0 Press CONTROL A for Assistance 6655 B Figure 102 4 HDSL 15 Minute Performance Monitoring Report 2 306 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 8 of 11 HDSL PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS Group 1 Circuit 2 Loop 1 Report Type Circuit ID PERIOD LOCN STAT SESP SEFSP 06 01 98 NEND COMPL FEND COMPL REPR COMPL REPC COMPL Press CONTROL A for Assistance 11391 A
294. ork HLXC CRP1 means at the central office side of the HRX1 looking toward the network HRX2 HLXR RRP1 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX1 looking toward the customer HLXC CRP2 means at the central office side of the HRX2 looking toward the network HLXR RRP2 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX2 looking toward the customer HRX1 HLXC CRP1 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 1 TL1 RRP1 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 2 TL1 CRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 3 TL1 RRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 4 TL1 NOTE CRP2 and RRP2 are not present when there is no HRX2 11375 A Figure 101 8 HDSL HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations MPU V5 2 2 297 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 101 Page 12 of 13 LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND 1 DS1 DLX DS1 T1 DS1 q NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites 10455 A Figure 101 9 DLX NEND Locations LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND lal irn DS2 DS1 QLX OR bis dius 051 5 NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER m MM KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incomin
295. orting by the MPU Toggle IS In Service Places facility in service and allows T1 alarm reporting by the MPU OOS Out Of Service Removes facility from service and stops alarm reporting by the MPU Note The RLXIOR configuration field default values shown in this manual are valid for systems with an MPU installed Blocking a channel causes the blocking pattern FFhex or 7Fhex set up via the onboard DIP switch to be transmitted in both directions Places the unit in service and allows equipment alarm reporting by the MPU Must be set to IS for reporting of equipment alarms 2 113 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 534 Page 1 of 6 RLX CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for establishing initial configuration of Version A RLX and Version RLX RLX and B2 RLX modules viewing and or editing the configurations for each RLX module in the Soneplex Broadband system Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If th
296. ot to break electrical contact with the backplane connector Note The RLX can be configured to supply span power over the DS1 pairs to supply power to the repeater modules Partially withdrawing the RLX ensures that current is not present when cross connects are installed 4 At the central office make necessary cross connects at the Main Distribution Frame or other facility in accordance with local practice 5 Atthe remote location make necessary cross connects at the remote distribution frame or other facility in accordance with local practice 6 Insert the RLX modules into their mounting slots Stop You have completed this procedure 2 210 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 1 of 18 RTAU OPERATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for operating the Remote Test Access Unit can be used to drop or insert DS1 signals either toward the network 053 interface or the customer interface i e the DS1 distribution modules for monitoring or intrusive testing 2 Note A toggle field type means you can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means you must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot
297. ottom of the front panel to press the HLXC module into the chassis If there 18 excessive resistance to insertion remove the module and check for improper alignment or obstructions 6 Perform the initial start up test detailed in Figure 516 3 observing the front panel LEDs and verify that each LED operates as specified Refer to Figure 516 4 for front panel layouts of the different HLXC versions STATUS LED is green following self test proceed to Step 7 If the STATUS indicator is red the HLXC module has failed self test diagnostics Remove and then reinsert the HLXC module and then wait while the HLXC module again performs self test diagnostics If the STATUS indicator turns red at the end of the second self test the HLXC module is defective Remove and replace the HLXC and then repeat Steps 1 through 6 7 Press the LMPTST switch on the APU to verify that the all the indicators on the HLXC module front panel light yellow This indicates that each indicator is functional e If each indicator is yellow continue to Step 8 or 9 e If each indicator is not yellow the HLXC module is defective Remove and replace the and then repeat Steps 1 through 7 8 Version C HLXC only if the Loop Power option is selected in Step 3 measure DC voltage and DC current being supplied to the HLXR The Version E and Version D HLXC defaults to loop power enabled Reference DLP 568 Version C HLXC to HLXR Voltage and Current T
298. ovides instructions for performing end to end tests between the DLX modules and the remote system Performing an end to end test includes connecting the cross connect jumper wires and then sending a test signal between the chassis and the network equipment This procedure assumes that the T1 facility between the Soneplex Broadband chassis and network equipment e g DLC channel bank etc is functional and that the DLX modules to be tested have already been installed This procedure must be performed before attempting to operate the entire circuit or system that will be using this equipment AN Warning prevent electrical shock never install telephone equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm When installing or modifying telephone lines disconnect lines on the network side before working with uninsulated lines or terminals A Caution Electronic modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling modules wear an anti static discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components Place modules in anti static packing material when transporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded Do Items Below in The Order Listed For Details Go To 1 Obtain the following tools and equipment e Anti static wrist strap e DS3 test set with 051 option for central office end of the circuit e DSI test set for remote end of the ci
299. oward the customer HLXR FEND means at the HLXR looking toward the network HLXC CRP1 means at the central office side of the HRX1 looking toward the network HLXC RRP1 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX1 looking toward the customer HRX2 HLXR CRP2 means at the central office side of the HRX2 looking toward the network HRX1 HLXC RRP2 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX2 looking toward the customer HLXR Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 1 TL1 RRP1 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 2 TL1 CRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 3 TL1 RRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 4 TL1 NOTE CRP2 and RRP2 are not present when there is no HRX2 11375 B Figure 102 8 HDSL HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations 2 308 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 10 of 11 LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND DS1 051 DLX DS1 T1 DS1 NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER LLLI e KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites 10455 A Figure 102 9 DLX NEND Locations LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND i c DS2 DS1 QLX OR 25 ps2 QFLC DS1 NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER e KEY NEND m
300. ower NOT APPL Loop 2 Op NOT APPL LBO 0 0 db Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9818 A Figure 531 2 HLXC Unit Configuration Screen 2 100 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 531 Page 3 of 7 Table 531 1 HLXC Configuration Fields Group Toggle 1 2 3 4 5 6 077 Specifies the module s group number designated 1 on the chassis Slot Toggle 1 2 3 or 4 Specifies the module s slot number within the 1 group number designated on the chassis Enter up to 20 This represents the customer s circuit ID The first Blank characters character must be alpha or numeric middle characters can be alpha numeric or hyphens and the last character must be either alpha or numeric Note This field can be configured only after the Provision field described below is set to YES Unit Equip State Toggle Equipped Establishes communication with MPU Module UNEQUIPPED must be set to EQUIPPED before remaining selections are allowed UNEQUIPPED No communication with MPU Unit Service State Toggle Leave this field at OOS at this time to avoid undesirable reporting of alarms Set this field to IS after completing the configuration of the remaining fields Provision Circuit Identifier Brings up T1 default settings and allows configuration changes No configuration changes allowed Service State Toggle Leave this field at O
301. port 2ND HRX IN in the serial number in its inventory data to 2ND HRX IN Note In addition when Version and HLXRs are used the HRX2 must shut off power to the HLXR to avoid damage The MPU should activate the Version Mismatch alarm and display the HRX inventory with the corrupted serial number HRX1 An incompatible HRX1 is any Version HRX that has another HRX between it and the HLXR This is diagnosed by the HLXC when it finds an 2 in the system If the HLXC is a Version D or earlier it cannot set the alarm bit for the incompatible HRXI or corrupt the serial number The HLXC will set the alarm bit for the incompatible HRX1 and report OLD HRX IN in the serial number field of the HRX1 inventory Thus a Version D or earlier HLXC with a Version A HRX in the first position HRX1 cannot be diagnosed at all The MPU should also activate the Version Mismatch alarm and display the corrupted serial number If the HLXC is a Version D or earlier the alarm bit for dual repeater incompatibility cannot be set Thus the MPU can only display the corrupted serial number 2 312 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 104 Page 2 of 3 HRX2 An incompatible HRX2 is a Version A HRX that has another HRX between it and the HLXC This is diagnosed by the HRX1 As a result systems with two incompatible HRXs cannot be diagnosed The HLXC w
302. ppropriate field of the output response s associated with that input command The value of a CTAG must either be 11 1 identifier or decimal numeral consisting of no more than six characters An example of a valid CTAG is 123 in the following command REPT STAT 123 The data block contains all parameters that are required by the NE to complete the command The data block is command specific and is described in each specific command and response Parameters are separated by commas Parameter grouping is allowed for some parameters to provide a nonsequential series of singly defined data items An ampersand amp is used to separate each item An example of parameter grouping is shown in the following command RTRV ATTR T1 SONEPLEX 1 2 3 1 123 LOS 8 LOF parameters are either position or keyword defined Position defined parameters are defined by the location or order that they are entered White space or nothing between two commas indicates a null value selection for the parameter defined in that position Keyword defined parameters may be entered in any position in the block by entering the keyword and an equal sign followed by the value being selected A missing keyword implies selection of a null value for that parameter usually the default value No extra commas may be entered to imply a null default selection and no keyword may be entered without a value being entered All parameters are position defined unless key word
303. r NOT RPTD not reported for each field that you wish to change Note Abbreviations of the alarm field options except NOT RPTD will appear in the Active Alarms and Alarm History screens In addition what options you select at any alarm level setting screen will determine whether you will be notified of the alarm Reference DLP 552 Alarm Event Notification Level Setting 2 63 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 518 Page 2 of 2 7 Move to the DS1 Facility Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR EVENT or NOT RPTD for each field that you wish to change Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting 8 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure RLX ALARM LEVELS Group 1 Slot Equipment Alarms COMM FAIL DS1 Facility Alarms MAJOR MAJOR MINOR YELLOW EVENT CUSTOMER LOOPBACK MINOR NETWORK LOOPBACK MINOR Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6118 D Figure 518 1 RLX Alarm Levels Screen with Default Values 2 64 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 519 Page 1 of 3 MPU REPLACEMENT AND TESTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for installing a previously configured MPU in a chassis whether provisioned or not and verifying that the MPU is functioning When an MPU from a
304. r or Return An HDSL PM Configuration menu is shown in Figure 557 1 3 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 4 Move to the Slot toggle field Select slot number 1 2 3 or 4 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier 5 Move to the Mon Type Threshold toggle fields Enter the value for each field that you wish to change based on ranges and default values for each Mon Type listed in Table 557 1 Ranges are also listed on the HDSL PM Configuration screen Reference 102 Performance Monitoring Reports Description 2 183 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 557 Page 2 of 3 6 Moveto the Mon Type Alarms toggle fields The following selections are possible Critical Allows notification of all Critical alarms as they occur e Major Allows notification of all Major and Critical alarms as they occur Minor Allows notification of all Minor Major and Critical alarms as they occur Event Allows notification of all alarms and events as they occur Reference TAP 101 Alarm Troubleshooting 7 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return 8 Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each HDSL facility in the chassis Note Pressing CONTROL C and confirming with Y removes all threshold values and alarm level information from the database for the group and slot selected Stop You have completed this procedure
305. ransporting or storing When working on modules always place them on an approved anti static mat that is electrically grounded Note Two technicians are required to perform this procedure one at the central office and one at the remote location Turn up tests for the remote HLXR module should be done at the remote site following completion of stand alone testing at the central office Do Items Below in The Order Listed For Details Go To 1 Obtain the following tools and equipment e Anti static wrist strap e DS3 test set with 051 option for central office end of the circuit e DSI test set for remote end of the circuit e 100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software 2 Coordinate test with a technician located at the remote end of the circuit and ensure test procedures there have been completed 3 Open the chassis front cover 2 21 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 009 Page 2 of 2 Do Items Below in The Order Listed 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 2 22 Momentarily press the LMPTST switch on the APU front panel and verify that all indicators light Connect terminal equipment to Craft port on the front of the MPU Log on to the Craft Interface Clear Alarm History Enter Target Identifier and set date and time now or during provisioning the turn up process Config
306. ration DIP Version A only UNIT SWITCH LBO setting on the Version A SWITCH RLX 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 0 Version A only Overrides the hardware Version B only 0 0 dB dB or 22 5 dB configuration DIP SWITCH setting Sets the LBO in decibels Version B only Sets the LBO in decibels Programmable Toggle ENABLED Enables response to programmable DISABLED Loopback loopback codes and overrides hardware configuration settings DISABLED Disables response to programmable loopback codes and overrides hardware configuration settings Note Unit switch settings Pulse Equalization Span Power NID and LBO are shown on the bottom of the configuration screen Note The UNIT SWITCH option appears on screen for both RLX types but is only functional for Version A continued 2 117 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 534 Page 5 of 6 Table 534 1 RLX Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT NID Loopback Toggle UNIT SWITCH Selects NID setting either enabled default Version A only or disabled on the Version A RLX When UNIT SWITCH the Version is proyisioned to function Version B only like an NID it supports inband and out of DISABLE band loopback codes ENABLE Enables response to NID loopback codes and overrides hardware configuration settings DISABLE Disables response to NID loopback codes and overrides
307. rce Toggle NRZ This tells the Craft that the network DS1 source is at the backplane from the DS3 MUX BIPOLAR This tells the Craft that the network DS1 source is at the bipolar 1251 interface If you select this option when you are in a Broadband chassis you will cut off the 1 signal This option is used in the Loop Extender system See Section 4 of this manual for information about the Extender Card 2 116 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc continued ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 534 Page 4 of 6 Table 534 1 RLX Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT BER Threshold Toggle Range of 1073 to 107 The average Bit Error Ratios of both the 107 incoming 051 signals are monitored by the RLX By monitoring BERs the RLX is capable of triggering a minor alarm when any of the monitored signals degrades below the BER threshold level Span Power Setting Toggle SWITCH Defaults to the span power hardware Version A only UNIT configuration DIP SWITCH setting on the SWITCH Version A RLX only ENABLED Allows span power on the Version B RLX Version B only To activate this selection its jumper must be set to either 130V or 130V as shown in Figure 525 2 or Figure 525 3 DISABLED Stops span power on the Version B RLX Pulse Equalization Locked at NOT APPL Setting t Toggle UNIT SWITCH Defaults to the hardware configu
308. rcuit e VT 100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software 2 Coordinate test with a technician located at the remote end of the circuit and ensure test procedures there have been completed 3 Open the chassis front cover 4 Momentarily press the LMPTST switch on the APU front panel and verify that all indicators light 5 Connect terminal equipment to Craft port on the front of the MPU DLP 504 6 Logon to the system DLP 526 2 23 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 010 Page 2 of 2 Do Items Below in The Order Listed 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 24 Clear Alarm History Enter Target Identifier and set date and time now or during provisioning the turn up process Configure DS3 MUX as required Configure DLX modules as required Connect the test equipment at both ends of the system and perform an end to end test If the DS3 MUX protect module is installed e Execute Force APS commands through the Craft Interface e Perform Manual Force Switch to Protect test on DS3 MUX module e Perform APS test on DS3 MUX module Make any necessary cross connects at the DSX Log off from the Craft Interface system Complete assignment forms and update office records as required by local procedures 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc For Details Go To DLP 527 DLP 528 DLP 529
309. re listed in Tables 558 1 558 2 and 558 3 2 186 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 558 Page 2 of 3 4 Repeat Step 3 for each field that you wish to change 5 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return 6 Momentarily press RESET on the MPU front panel or perform a soft reset in order to re initialize the X 25 configurations Reference DLP 519 MPU Replacement and Testing Reference DLP 538 Reset LED Test Commands Stop You have completed this procedure 558 1 Data Link Layer LAPB Parameters SET CONFIGURABLE DATA LINK PARAMETER VALUE DEFAULT pre oreas wes ormes Fame Size Bis 23 7 C 2 T4 not supported are user programmable parameters through the Craft Interface Table 558 2 Virtual Circuit Default Assignments VIRTUAL CIRCUIT LOGICAL CIRCUIT TYPE CHANNEL APPLICATION P ve Note Autonomous messages are always sent except when inhibited by the TL1 INH MSG command N A 2 187 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 558 Page 3 of 3 Table 558 3 Network Layer X 25 Packet Parameters NETWORK PARAMETER Keyboard Time Out N A for TL1 0 minute minute 5
310. re or later no HRXs or MPU 5 1 software NRM DIS LSW MPU 5 2 software or later Normal Disabled or Loss of Synch Word at Loop 1 or Loop 2 at the T R Reversal YES NO N A SNR Thresh Exceeded YES NO N A See DLP 531 for GD of related HLX configuration fields BER Thresh Exceeded YES NO N A See DLP 531 for descriptions of related HLX configuration fields Pulse Attn dB Range of 1 to 0 See DLP 531 for descriptions of related HLX configuration fields SNR margin dB Range of 10 to 30 See DLP 531 for descriptions of related HLX configuration fields 2 161 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 548 Page 3 of 5 HLX HRX STATUS Circuit ID DS1 Loopback INACTIVE INACTIVE DS1 LOS YES YES DS1 Line Code DS1 Frame Format N A N A Loop Reversal N A NO HSKP1 HSKP2 N A PWR1 PWR2 N A CRP1 LP1 LP2 LP1 1 2 HDSL LP STAT N A N A N A N A N A T R Reversal N A N A N A N A N A SNR Exceeded NO N A N A N A N A N A BER Exceeded NO N A N A N A N A N A Pulse Attn 0 N A N A N A N A N A SNR margin 426 N A N A N A N A N A N A Press CONTROL A For Assistance 14858 A Note The SNR and values are only updated when the HDSL loop is active If the HDSL loop has never been activated the SNR value will be set to 71 and the PA value will be set to 0
311. rice To obtain the percentage factor for Out of Warranty or NTF Product contact the ADC Product Return Department at 1 800 366 3891 extension 3000 in U S A or Canada or 952 946 3000 outside U S A and Canada If a service affecting advance replacement Product is requested the current list price of a new Product will be charged initially A customer purchase order is required to ship an advance replacement Product Upon receipt of the defective Product there will be no credit issued by ADC to the buyer for any returned Product found to be Out of Warranty ADC will credit buyer eighty percent 80 of Product price charged for In Warranty Product under the Program terms Products must be returned within thirty 30 days to be eligible for any advance replacement credit If repairs necessitate a field visit by an ADC representative a customer authorization purchase order must be obtained prior to dispatching a representative ADC will charge the current price of a field visit plus round trip transportation charges from Minneapolis to the customer s site 4 REPLACEMENT SPARE PRODUCTS Replacement parts including but not limited to button caps and lenses lamps fuses and patch cords are available from a special order basis Contact the Technical Assistance Center at 1 800 366 3891 extension 3223 in U S A or Canada or 952 946 3223 outside U S A and Canada for additional information Spare Products and acces
312. rking with modules always place the module on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Note NEVER install an RLX in the same quad group with ODS2 modules 1 Locate the configuration switches on the Version A RLX module shown in Figure 525 1 or the jumpers on the Version B RLX module in Figure 525 2 B1 and Figure 525 3 B2 2 Setthe configuration switches or jumpers as specified in the work order Version A RLX only The following operating parameters are switch selectable Span line Power On or Off Transmit Line Buildout 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 0 dB or 22 5 dB of attenuation NID Loop Code Recognition Enable or Disable Line Equalization for the DSX 0 133 feet 133 266 feet 266 399 feet 399 533 feet and 533 655 feet Note When the Span Power switch is placed in the On closed position RLX supplies 130 VDC simplex power to the line Note The MPU can override or select the Version RLX hardware switch settings These switch settings do not need to be set if the unit provisioning is being performed through the software Reference DLP 534 RLX Configuration Version B RLX only b1 only The following operating parameters are jumper selectable Channel Blocking Idle Code FFhex or 7Fhex Line span Power 130 only on the B1 RLX 130 VDC or 130 VDC on the B2 RLX 2 81 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Ma
313. ront panel of the TAU module will light red during any intrusive Insert tests Note Press the TAU s Line Code pushbutton switch as necessary to select either B8ZS which lights the B8ZS indicator or AMI for the DS1 bipolar interface 10 To insert a Network or Customer DS1 signal 11 12 a Perform Steps through b Patch the front panel RX jack to the TX jack c Move to the Insert Direction Command field on the screen Select blank field NONE CUSTOMER or NETWORK Press Enter or Return To insert an external DS1 signal a Perform Steps through 6 b Patch the external test equipment to the RX jack c Move to the Insert Direction Command field on the screen Select blank field NONE CUSTOMER or NETWORK Press Enter or Return When you are finished using the TAU module change the Drop Direction Command and Insert Direction Command fields to NONE then disconnect any patch cords from the front panel RX and TX jacks Stop You have completed this procedure 2 240 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 575 Page 3 of 5 STATUS 25 5842 Figure 575 1 TAU Module Front Panel TEST ACCESS UNIT STATUS COMMANDS Group 1 DS14 1 Drop Direction Insert Direction Status Command TAU Present Status YES Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6188 B Figure
314. rovide command points for chassis groups 1 through 7 respectively see Figure 104 4 Scan Displays Compressed The MPU provides two Compressed Scan Displays as shown in Figure 104 5 Compressed Scan Display 1 and Figure 104 6 Compressed Scan Display 2 for a total of 126 scan bits plus two reserved bits Both displays are assigned a different display response address in the range 0 through 7 through the MPU Craft Interface 2 267 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 3 of 11 Table 104 1 051 Signal Routing GROUP SLOT NUMBER GROUP SLOT NUMBER 081 SIGNAL D SIG 1 NAL 15 GROUP SLOT NUMBER GROUP SLOT NUMBER Las o om 10 Table 104 2 TBOS Abbreviations and Acronyms ABBREVIATION ACRONYM ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION ACRONYM DESCRIPTION ACO Alarm Cut Off LPBK Loopback ALM a z EQPT L R LSP LSW MPU MX MXP XW NET OOS HSKP Housekeeping HSP High Speed Protect Module R X HSW High Speed Working Module SIG HLXC HLXR HDSL Terminal Unit CO Side HDSL Terminal Unit Remote Side L Low Speed Slot RE SN SW oos 5 R DS3 MUX or DS3MAP Working Module Unequipped LCL LOC LOCK 2 268 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Signal to Noise Ratio WWG ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2
315. rred on the HDSL loop and than or equal to some user specified value and no LOSW defects occurred SEFSP Severely Errored NEND FEND REPC A second in which one or more LOSW Framing Second Path REPR CRP RRP defects occurred on the HDSL loop has never been activated this value will be set to 0 SNR L Signal to Noise Ratio NEND FEND REPC Lowest SNR detected on the HDSL loop Low Path REPR CRP RRP within the interval This value is only updated when the HDSL loop is active PA Pulse Attenuation NEND FEND REPC Highest Pulse Attenuation value detected High Path REPR CRP RRP on the HDSL loop within the interval This value is only updated when the HDSL loop is active If the HDSL loop If the HDSL loop has never been activated this value will be set to 71 For descriptions of locations where thresholds are monitored such as FEND NEND REPC REPR CRP and RRP refer to Figure 102 7 T1 system Figure 102 8 HDSL system Figure 102 9 DLX system Figure 102 10 ODS2 system and Figure 102 11 RLX system 2 304 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 102 Page 6 of 11 DS1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS Circuit 1 Site LOCAL Report Type 15 MINUTE Circuit ID FCP SESL SASP FCP FE ESP FE CSSP FE CVL LOSS AISSP ESL FE SESP FE SEFSP FE PERIOD STATUS CVP FE UASP FE 00 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 Press CONTROL A f
316. rrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Use the arrow keys to select Alarm Event Notification Level from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return An Alarm Event Notification Level screen is shown in Figure 552 1 Use the space bar to scroll through the options and stop at the selection you wish to enter Select EVENT to allow notification of all alarms and events as they occur Select MINOR to allow notification of all Minor Major and Critical alarms as they occur Select MAJOR the default to allow notification of all Major and Critical alarms as they occur Select CRITICAL to allow notification of all Critical alarms as they occur Select DISABLED to disable the notification of all alarms and events as they occur Assign the selection by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure 2 173 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 552 Page 2 of 2 SET ALARM EVENT NOTIFICATION LEVEL Level MAJOR Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6144 A Figure 552 1 Alarm Event Notification Level 2 174 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 553 Page 1 of 1 DLX STATUS DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying the status of the DLX modules installed in the selected chassis Note Press CO
317. s Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9448 A Figure 565 1 Performance Monitoring Menu PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS 1 DS1 PM Reports 2 HDSL PM Reports Press CONTROL A For Assistance 10389 A Figure 565 2 Performance Monitoring Reports Menu 2 203 2000 Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 565 Page 3 of 3 DS1 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS Circuit 1 Site LOCAL Report Type 15 MINUTE Circuit ID Modify Fields Above To Select Desired Report Then Press RETURN 10391 A Figure 565 3 Sample 081 Performance Monitoring Reports Selection Screen 2 204 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 566 Page 1 of 1 CIRCUIT ID DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying the Access ID AID Circuit ID and the Unit Type for each module installed in the Soneplex Broadband chassis Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Usethe arrow keys to select Display Circuit IDs from the System Maintenance menu Press Enter or Return A Display Circuit ID menu is shown in Figure 566 1 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier Stop You have completed this procedure DISPLAY CIRCUIT ID MENU Circu
318. s Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 506 Page 4 of 5 22 Repeat Steps 5 through 17 for the protection ODS2 module then go to Step 23 23 Repeatthe entire procedure for each ODS2 module to be installed Stop You have completed this procedure 1to 14 WORKING AND PROTECT ODS2 UNITS TOP ROW ONLY HSW HSP MXW 1 1 1 3 2 1 23 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU 52 009 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 V 6184 B DS3 MUX RTAU UNITS MODULE Figure 506 1 0052 Module Locations Table 506 1 DS2 Signal Routing DS2 051 GROUP SLOT GROUP SLOT SIGNAL SIGNALS NUMBER NUMBER WORKING UNIT PROTECT UNIT 2 40 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 506 Page 5 of 5 RECEIVE TRANSMIT CONNECTOR CONNECTOR LO o 2170 A Figure 506 2 0052 Transmit and Receive Connector Locations 2 41 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 507 Page 1 of 2 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR AND ADAPTER CLEANING AND MATING INSTRUCTIONS Summary The performance of an optical fiber system is largely dependent on the fib
319. s Below in The Order Listed For Details Go To 1 Obtain the following tools and equipment e Anti static wrist strap e DS3 test set with 051 option for central office end of the circuit e DSI digital transmission test set T Berd 211 or equivalent e 100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software 2 Coordinate test with a technician located at the remote end of the circuit and ensure test procedures there have been completed 3 Open the chassis front cover 4 Momentarily press the LMPTST switch on the APU front panel and verify that all indicators light 5 Connect terminal equipment to Craft port on the front of the MPU DLP 504 6 Log on to the system DLP 526 2 25 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 011 Page 2 of 2 Do Items Below in The Order Listed 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 26 Clear Alarm History Enter Target Identifier and set date and time now or during provisioning the turn up process Configure DS3 MUX as required Configure RLX or RLXIOR modules as required Check RLX voltage to repeater Connect the test equipment at both ends of the system and perform an end to end test If the DS3 MUX protect module is installed e Execute Force APS commands through the Craft Interface e Perform Manual Force Switch to Protect test on DS3 MUX module Per
320. s described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Set Alarm Levels from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return 3 Select Set DLX Alarm Levels from the Set Alarm Levels Menu Press Enter or Return A DLX Alarm Levels screen with default values is shown in Figure 563 1 4 Move to the Group toggle field Select group number 1
321. s is the number of the group in the chassis where the module is located 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 The Group number does not apply when the identifier is T3 Slot Number This is the number of the slot within the group where the module is located 1 2 3 or 4 The Slot number does not apply when the identifier is T3 Site or Loop Number 2 288 If HDSL appears in the first column of the access identifier and a 1 appears in this location there is a problem on HDSL Loop 1 If HDSL appears in the first column of the circuit and a 2 appears in this location there is a problem on HDSL Loop 2 If T1 2 T3 or appears in the first column of the circuit and a 1 appears in this location there is a problem at the local site If 2 3 or appears in the first column of the circuit and a 2 appears in this location there is a problem at the remote site The Locn Location column displays FEND NEND REPC and RRP indicating the location of the alarm Figure 101 6 system Figure 101 7 HDSL system with one HRX Figure 101 8 HDSL system with two HRXs and Figure 101 9 DLX Figure 101 10 ODS2 system and Figure 101 11 RLX system show locations and descriptions of FEND NEND REPR REPC CRP and RRP 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 10
322. s manual for additional information Reference DLP 549 Serial Port Configuration 2 311 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAP 104 Page 1 of 3 DUAL REPEATER INCOMPATIBILITY DIAGNOSIS Summary This TAP describes how to diagnose dual repeater software MPU V5 2 incompatibilities for HLXCs HLXRs and HRXs and also describes how they are reported Except where noted system configurations are assumed to include two HRXs and the HLXCs are assumed to be compatible with MPU V5 2 HLXC An incompatible HLXC is any Version D or earlier HLXC without software support for a second HRX In such a case the HRX1 will detect the incompatible HLXR set the alarm bit and report 2ND HRX IN in the serial number in its inventory data to 2ND HRX IN If the HLXC is a Version D or earlier and the HRX1 is a Version A incompatibilities are not detectable Note Version C or earlier HLXCs do not support any HRXs However a Version B HRX in the HRXI position will set an alarm bit for an incompatible HLXR The MPU should activate the Version Mismatch alarm and display the HRX inventory with the corrupted serial number Reference DLP 540 Inventory Display HLXR An incompatible HLXR is any Version D or earlier HLXR without software support for a second HRX In such a case the HRXI will detect the incompatible HLXR set the alarm bit and re
323. s slot Use the injector at the bottom of the front panel to press the MPU into the chassis If there is excessive resistance to insertion remove the module and check for improper alignment and obstructions Note If you are not sure that MPU s database is cleared contact ADC Technical Assistance Center at 1 800 366 3891 ext 3223 or 1 612 946 3223 for more information Use the screw provided to secure the MPU to the top edge of the chassis Observe the STATUS LED as shown in Figure 519 2 Initially the status LED will be yellow while the MPU performs self test diagnostics When the self test diagnostics are successfully completed the STATUS LED will turn green STATUS LED is green continue to Step 6 If the STATUS LED is red the MPU has failed self test diagnostics Press the MPU RESET switch and then wait while the MPU again performs self test diagnostics If the STATUS LED turns red at the end of the second self test the MPU is defective Remove and replace the MPU and then repeat Steps 2 through 5 Press the LMPTST switch on the APU to verify that the STATUS LED on the MPU front panel lights yellow This indicates that the LED is functional If the STATUS LED does not light yellow the MPU is defective Remove and replace the MPU and then repeat Steps 2 through 5 Connect a VT 100 or equivalent control terminal or host computer to the MPU Craft port Reference DLP 504 Local Craft Interface
324. s updated When the screen is full the oldest status line scrolls off the screen Stop You have completed this procedure ALARM SUMMARY Legend No Alarm L Local Equipment R Remote Equipment Facility H Housekeeping Alarm s F Local Facility M Multiple Low Speed Units Group Slot 1 XX WP Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6676 B Figure 543 1 Alarm Summary Screen Typical 2 150 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 544 Page 1 of 4 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY Summary This procedure provides instructions for displaying both active and cleared alarms stored in the alarm history Each alarm declaration or alarm clearing creates a separate message in the history buffer However Event level alarms do not show a clearing message Note Press CONTROL A for help information about moving around and editing fields 1 Use the arrow keys to select Display Alarm History from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return An Alarm History screen is shown in Figure 544 1 2 Atthe selection prompt Press Enter or Return Both the active and cleared alarms appear as shown in Figure 544 1 3 Up toa maximum of 112 messages be displayed from this history buffer The messages are displayed in reverse chronological order starting with the most recent If the list is too long to fit on one screen use the up down keys to scroll t
325. signed a Level 1 7 Usethe arrow keys to move to the Expiration Period field Type in a number 0 to 999 to represent how many days remain before the password expires If zero is selected the password has no expiration period and the Number of Days Left field will display N A 8 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure EDIT USER ACCOUNTS User Number User Name SONEPLEX Password SONEPLEX1 Privilege Level 5 Expiration Period 0 Number Days Left N A Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6156 A Figure 535 1 Edit User Account Screen 2 121 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 536 Page 1 of 2 MENU SECURITY EDITING Summary This procedure provides instructions to system administrators for assigning or changing access user privilege levels to the Craft Interface menus Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the R key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward
326. sories can be purchased from ADC Contact Sales Administration at 1 800 366 3891 extension 3000 in U S A or Canada or 952 946 3000 outside U S A and Canada for a price quote and to place your order 5 RETURNED MATERIAL Page 3 2 Contact the ADC Product Return Department at 1 800 366 3891 extension 3000 in U S A or Canada or 952 946 3000 outside U S A and Canada to obtain a Return Material Authorization number prior to returning an ADC Product returned Products must have a Return Material Authorization RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the package The Return Material Authorization number is valid for thirty 30 days from authorization 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 3 General Information 6 CUSTOMER INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCE For customers wanting information on ADC products or help in using them ADC offers the services listed below To obtain any of these services by telephone first dial the central ADC telephone number then dial the extension provided below The central number for calls originating in the U S A or Canada is 1 800 366 3891 For calls originating outside the U S A or Canada dial country code 1 then dial 952 946 3000 Sales Assistance Quotation Proposals Extension 3000 Ordering and Delivery General Product Information Systems Integration Complete Solutions from Concept to Installation Extension 3000 Network Des
327. status indicator is red repeat Step 7 and continue Affix the new version bar code sticker to the ejector tab of the MPU Affix the 2X sticker to the MPU faceplate above and to the left of the STATUS LED below the ADC logo Note For V5 2 or later software this indicates the MPU recognizes and supports two HDSL repeaters Stop You have completed this procedure 2 171 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 551 Page 3 of 3 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Force APS Commands Reset LED Test Commands Execute ACO Alarm Cut Off Loopback Status Commands Display Inventory Display Circuit IDs Upload Download Commands Test Access Unit Commands 1 2 34 4 Bis 6 Ta 8 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 5323 A Figure 551 1 System Maintenance Menu UPLOAD DOWNLOAD COMMANDS 1 Execute Configuration Data Upload 2 Execute Configuration Data Download 3 Execute Software Download Press CONTROL A For Assistance 9449 A Figure 551 2 Upload Download Commands Menu 2 172 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 552 Page 1 of 2 ALARM EVENT NOTIFICATION LEVEL SETTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for filtering the alarm notification pop up based on the criticality of the alarm or event When this feature is used a beep is also heard each
328. structions Observe the front panel LED indicators as shown in Figure 525 5 and verify that each LED operates as specified in the initial start up test Ifthe STATUS LED is green following self test continue to Step 5 Ifthe STATUS LED is red the RLX has failed self test diagnostics Remove and then reinsert the RLX and then wait while the RLX again performs self test diagnostics If the STATUS LED turns red at the end of the second self test the RLX defective Remove and replace the RLX and then repeat Steps 1 through 5 Press the LMPTST switch on the APU and verify that all indicators light yellow If Yes continue to Step 7 e If No replace the RLX module and go to Step 1 Note An MPU must be present for a Version B RLX lamp test The MPU does not need to be present for a Version A RLX lamp test If the Span Power in the Version RLX option or Line Power in the Version B RLX option is selected in Step 1 measure DC voltage and DC current being supplied to the repeater Reference DLP 567 RLX Voltage to Repeater Test 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 525 Page 3 of 6 8 Repeatentire procedure for each RLX module Stop You have completed this procedure SA2 SA3 SA3 1 1 2 3 it 2 3 1 2 3 OPEN OPEN OPEN NOT USED 4 DSX LINE EQUALIZATION
329. sue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 529 Page 1 of 4 DS3 MUX CONFIGURATION Summary This procedure provides instructions for equipping each DS3 MUX as required set its service state and set its protect status 1 2 2 92 Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the R key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the R key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits in the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields or D1 DS3 MU
330. t An optical power meter should be used to verify active fibers Do not look directly into the module fiber connectors Exposure to invisible laser radiation may result Warning Do not insert module edge connectors into the chassis connectors before connecting the optical fiber to the module Exposure to invisible laser radiation may occur if the module edge connectors are allowed to connect with the chassis connectors before connecting the optical fiber to the module Verify that all indicators are dark off and the module is not engaged with the chassis connectors before proceeding Caution The ODS2 module MUST be unequipped when it is in the chassis with the optical loopback patch cord otherwise the Craft Interface will not function properly when accessing the module Before seating the ODS2 module in the chassis check the ODS2 Configuration screen to be sure that the module s Unit Equip State is set to UNEQUIPPED Caution Always allow sufficient fiber length to permit routing without severe bends Fibers may be permanently damaged if bent curved to a radius of less than 1 5 inches 3 81 cm Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used An ESD grounding post is located on the chassis for connecting the ESD wrist band Ensure that all modules removed from the equipment or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material When working
331. t alarms OOS Out Of No HDSL alarms are reported to the MPU Service threshold level HDSL SNR Toggle Enter a number from The lowest Signal to Noise Ratio allowed the Threshold 10 dB to HDSL loop before an alarm is triggered 30 dB HDSL PA Threshold Toggle Enter a number from highest Pulse Attenuation value allowed on 33 dB 1 dB to the HDSL loop before an alarm is triggered 40 dB Network DS1 Source Toggle NRZ This tells the Craft that the network DS1 source is at the backplane from the 053 MUX BIPOLAR This tells the Craft that network 125 1 source is at the Extender Card interface If you select this option when you are not using an Extender Card you will cut off the 1251 signal See Section 4 of this manual for information about the Extender Card continued HDSL BER Toggle Enter a number from average Bit Error Ratios of the incoming 1077 Threshold 1074 to 1079 HDSL signals are monitored by the HLXC By monitoring BERs the HLXC is capable of triggering a minor alarm when any of the monitored signals degrades below the BER 5 dB RZ 2 103 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 531 Page 6 of 7 Table 531 1 HLXC Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Network Keep Alive D2 HLXR only AIS All other HLXRs AIS LOOPBACK DS1 CUTOFF Toggle HLXR Simplex
332. terminal or computer and the other end to the appropriate port Turn on the power to the terminal or computer If using a computer enter the communications software package resident on the computer Serial port default settings are listed in Table 549 1 Reference DLP 549 Serial Port Configuration Press Enter or Return The Logon screen with User Name field should appear Stop You have completed this procedure 2 33 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 504 Page 2 of 2 Table 504 1 MPU Craft Port Wiring CIRCUIT CCITT CIRCUIT EIA FUNCTION AA AA sa Dar m Daa seon 00 Cable uses Type DB 25 Male connector Overall shielding common for all leads Use 26 AWG or larger wire stranded pairs Figure 504 1 MPU Front Panel 2 34 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 505 Page 1 of 2 DS3 MUX INSTALLATION AND TESTING Summary This procedure describes how to install working and protect DI DS3 MUX modules in the Soneplex Broadband chassis as well as how to troubleshoot the installation A 7 8 Caution Modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Before handling any modules ESD protection must always be used An ESD grounding post is located
333. the HRXI two repeaters 2 131 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 3 of 16 the HRXI and the HRX2 two repeaters the HXR2 and the HLXR two repeaters For example if an HDSL loop failure occurs on both loops between the HRX and the HLXR one repeater the REMOTE column will show N A When both loops on an HDSL segment go down and a loopback is already in progress at one of the affected units the loopback will continue to appear as if it is still in progress on the screen although it will no longer function on the loops However the loopback will still need to be deactivated before another loopback can be initiated For descriptions of alarms arising from fault conditions such as HDSL loop failures refer to TAP 101 Alarm Troubleshooting Stop You have completed this procedure 2 132 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 541 Page 4 of 16 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Force APS Commands Reset LED Test Commands Execute ACO Alarm Cut Off Loopback Status Commands Display Inventory Display Circuit IDs Upload Download Commands Test Access Unit Commands 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 Press CONTROL A For Assistance 5323 A Figure 541 1 System Maintenance Menu Loopback Status Commands 1 High Speed Loopback Status Commands 2 Low Speed L
334. tion 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 510 Page 2 of 2 At the chassis location insert a test signal into the DS1 to be tested using the 053 test set with DS1 option Verify that all alarm indicators on the chassis are off and the 1251 test set at the QFLC or QLX 51 output is receiving error free data for the DS1 test signal selected Repeat Steps 9 and 10 for all DS1 circuits to be tested on the ODS2 module selected At the QFLC or QLX location insert a DS1 test signal into the QFLC QLX 251 input using the DS1 test set Verify that all alarm indicators the chassis out and the DS3 test set with DS1 option is receiving error free data in the 051 selected for test Repeat Steps 12 and 13 for all DS1 circuits to be tested on the ODS2 module selected Repeat procedure starting at Step 3 for all ODS2 modules to be tested Record test results and update office records following local office practices Stop You have completed this procedure DSX 3 ree SONEPLEX BROADBAND CHASSIS DS3 TEST SET MON DSX 1 SONEPLEX CROSS CONNECT BROADBAND CHASSIS QFLC or QLX MON 0 DS1 TEST SET 6185 Figure 510 1 Test Setup 2 47 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP
335. tion on moving around and editing fields Note Commands be initiated on more than one unit by using the arrow keys to move to each unit and pressing the space bar to select each unit 1 Use the arrow keys to select System Maintenance from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Force APS Commands from the System Maintenance Menu Press Enter or Return A Force APS Command screen is shown in Figure 537 1 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the Command field Use the space bar to select blank space which means make no changes FORCE TO WORKING FORCE TO PROTECT Enable or Disable APS for each ODS2 pair 053 MUX pair installed in chassis Reference 106 Access Identifier Note Status will only appear for those units that have switching capability and configured as protected 4 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure 2 124 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 537 Page 2 of 2 FORCE APS COMMANDS Online Unit 5 Lockout Status Command WORKING ENABLED UNLOCKED Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6663 B Figure 537 1 Force APS Commands Screen 2 125 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 538 Page 1 of 2 RESET LED TEST COMMANDS
336. to the module fiber connectors Exposure to invisible laser radiation may result which can damage the retina of the eye An optical power meter should be used to verify active fibers A Danger To avoid electric shock be careful when working near HDSL loop connections or telecommunications circuits An electrical potential of 130 volts exists on HDSL loop connections and telecommunications circuits Coming in contact with this high electrical potential will result in death or severe personal injury Do Items Below in the Order Listed For Details Go To 1 Obtain the following tools and equipment e Anti static wrist strap e DS3test set with DS1 option for central office end of the circuit e DSI test set for remote end of the circuit e 100 compatible terminal or computer with terminal emulation software 2 Coordinate test with a technician located at the remote end of the circuit and ensure test procedures there have been completed Refer to the Quad DS1 Fiber Loop Converter B2 B3 D3 User Manual and the Quad Loop Extender QLX Operation and Maintenance Manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual for more information 3 At both ends of the circuit make any necessary cross connects at the optical patch panel if used 4 Open the chassis front cover 2 12 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance Do Items Below in
337. to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen If the entries have been accepted a message Configuration Successful Press Any Key To Continue appears on the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields 1 Usethe arrow keys to select Alarms from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return 2 Use the arrow keys to select Set Alarm Levels from the Alarms menu Press Enter or Return 3 Select Set ODS2 Alarm Levels from the Set Alarm Levels Menu Press Enter or Return An ODS2 Alarm Levels screen is shown in Figure 561 1 4 Move to the Group toggle field
338. toring alarms or clearing trouble the TOP procedure guides you through a series of menu commands using the Craft Interface The Main Menu on the Craft Interface lists all the major functions while sub menus further break down the functions The menu structure is shown in Figure 1 1 Page 1 1 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 1 Introduction 43 6688 SINVIWAOO LINN SS399vV 1531 QVO INMOG 3uVMLJOS 31093X3 QVO INMOG 31093X3 Qvo tldn viva SIHNOO 31n93X3 SQNVIAWOO Sai Lin odio AHOJN3ANI 9 5 1715 39v8dOO 51 S1uOd3u Wd 18 5 1 15 MOV8dOO 1 SH Wd LSA 5 1 15 MOVadoo T S1HOd3U Wd ALNOAXA Wd 1SOH Wd 154 ONVININOO 1531 dq Vl3SaHd Wd ONVININOO SdV 39uOd HINLL SIHL LY SA SISSVHO GNVaavoua X3 1d3NOS GASNNN SN33HOS 1 X10 S I3A31WHuV lV X 1H 650
339. twork HLXC CRP1 means at the central office side of the HRX1 looking toward the network HLXC RRP1 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX1 looking toward the customer HRX2 HLXR CRP2 means at the central office side of the HRX2 looking toward the network HRX1 HLXC RRP2 means at the remote CPE side of the HRX2 looking toward the customer HLXR CRP1 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 1 TL1 RRP1 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 2 TL1 CRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 3 TL1 RRP2 Alarm History PM Reports and Status screens LINE 4 TL1 NOTE CRP2 and RRP2 are not present when there is no HRX2 11375 B Figure 542 3 HDSL HLXC HRX HLXR NEND and FEND Locations LOCAL REMOTE SITE 1 SITE 2 NEND DS1 DS1 gt gt gt DLX DS1 DS1 NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER 4 0 gt KEY NEND means PM information collected directly from incoming T1 signals both at local and remote sites 10455 A Figure 542 4 DLX NEND Locations 2 148 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 542 Page 4 of 4 LOCAL REMOTE SITE 4 SITE 2 NEND DS1 OPTICAL DS2 DS1 A QLX OR DS1 oPrICALDs2 QFLC DS1 A NEND TO NETWORK TO CUSTOMER KEY NEND means PM information col
340. uction Page 1 6 2 Locate the specified director level detail level or trouble clearing procedure All procedures are in numerical order regardless of type The TOP procedures in this manual are of the following four types e Non Trouble Clearing Procedure NTP A director level procedure that lists normal work items to be performed that are not trouble clearing procedures e Trouble Analysis Procedure TAP A director level procedure that provides step by step instructions to locate and fix trouble e Detailed Level Procedure DLP Detailed step by step instructions or procedures e Trouble Analysis Data TAD A trouble clearing aid containing non procedural data Perform all the items in the director level procedure NTP or TAP in the order listed unless sent to another director level procedure When a director level procedure is finished the task is completed When more detailed information is required the reader will be sent to a DLP A DLP may also direct the reader to another DLP Note When a DLP is complete return to the procedure that preceded the DLP Note When sent from one director level procedure to another director level procedure in most instances it will not be necessary to go back to the first director level procedure after competing the second In some procedures it will be necessary to verify that certain responses have occurred If the expected response is not observed refer to the appropriate TAP If
341. ule installation dnd Testing 45 soc aoo 25459553 C303 X 390909 4903 4 3903 448 DLP 506 READ Trstalliton and Nest uie d eec Gene E dag b Wap did asd DLP 517 oio caras ura a ce ego c dorso ao dob DLP 571 TAU Installation and 2 24 2552 52b ba bbb b b br de bh hh hah ha hh hh haha DLP 574 RECAS Ls uu ddl 9 9 3 49 9 4 X 49 9 X3 9 3 6 4 DLP 523 0052 MODULE AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES NTP 003 Local rA EATER COMMISION 4 9 DLP 504 Craft Interface System EROR E RU E d ORARE bebe eB does DLP 526 Aldim Histan Clear 2 a aod sob b a dob oci x or obo deca a bar pate a Ac DLP 527 System TO DAT ime SNG 22 22 2522 DLP 528 BOSE hh rope ops xo baba DLP 529 9052 Module DLP 530 0052 Distribution System and QFLC QLX Chassis End To End Tests DLP 510 COMITIS ace ace cde ER ed Se CER b DLP 537 HOS MOX UD TESE e a aab o eap app deae at aoo ho DLP 511 D53 MUX APS T88l eradan eia pb b
342. ules should take the following precautions 1 2 248 Keep materials that tend to generate static electricity such as plastics nylon clothing and Styrofoam containers away from all modules Read all caution and warning labels on bags and shipping cartons before opening any package Open all modules using properly grounded wrist straps and table mats designed to dissipate static electricity Soneplex chassis are equipped with a grounding jack for connecting anti static ground wrist straps The jack is located in the front on the right side of the chassis If possible wait to remove modules from their protective anti static packaging until it is time to install them into a chassis Never touch module components or connector pins Handle all modules only by the front plate extractor or by the card edges Ensure that all modules removed from the chassis or not installed are properly stored in anti static packing material 2000 Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 101 Page 1 of 9 SPECIFICATIONS Summary This TAD shows technical specifications for the Soneplex Broadband system with MPU Version 5 software in Table 101 1 System Specifications Table 101 2 MUX Power Table 101 3 DLX Power Table 101 4 C1 HLXC Power Table 101 5 Version D and E HLXC Power Table 101 6 ODS2 Power Table 101 7 A2 RLX Power and Table 101 8 Version
343. ulletin 149 CB 149 specifies the detailed requirements of the E2A APR DS1 Signal Routing Each DS1 signal corresponds to a specific mounting slot in the chassis The DS1 signal and the corresponding group slot numbers are shown in Table 104 1 MPU TBOS Interface The MPU TBOS interface is designed to meet AT amp T CB 149 Section B2 Selection of hardware port communication parameters and TBOS display options is performed through the Craft Interface Serial Port Configuration screen Reference DLP 549 Serial Port Configuration Information is transferred between the MPU and chassis modules via a synchronous communication channel in the chassis backplane The MPU polls each module for alarm and status data and stores it into memory until requested by TBOS Additionally commands issued by TBOS are passed through the MPU to the target module across this channel 2 266 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance TAD 104 Page 2 of 11 Table 104 2 TBOS Abbreviations and Acronyms and Table 104 3 Expanded Scan Displays 2 Through 8 Definitions list the definitions of the abbreviations used in the TBOS displays shown in Figure 104 1 Expanded Scan Display 1 Figure 104 2 Expanded Scan Displays 2 through 8 Figure 104 3 Command Display 1 and Figure 104 4 Command Displays 2 through 8 In Figure 104 1 scan point bit 5 indicates a power alarm In Figure 104 4
344. unications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 570 Page 13 of 18 Table 570 1 RTAU Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT BIT ERROR SETUP FIELDS continued Elapsed Time Display None Six digit counter or blank Blank ES only Elapsed Time Display None Six digit counter or blank Blank EFS only Test Timeout in Input 0 to 1440 Timeout counter for test access If the counter is set to a 60 Minutes number higher than 0 and then reaches 0 during test the Mode field will be set to DISABLE automatically If the counter is set to 0 the test timeout will be turned off and the test will have unlimited time Measurement Toggle OVERVIEW Start a measurement by selecting START at the Measurement field The RTAU will wait for pattern sync and frame sync for framed patterns before starting the measurement After synching the measurement display will change to RUNNING Stop any measurement by selecting STOP Refer to Figure 570 15 for an RTAU Config screen showing a test that is starting Note If the Mode is set to MONE MONF LOOPE or LOOPF only frame sync is required before starting the measurement If the pattern is not in sync then the Data Error Counts will read N A until pattern sync is established START Initiate measurement STOP Terminate measurement Note Setting the Mode field to DISABLE also stops any me
345. ure DS3 MUX as required Configure HLXC modules as required Check the HLXC to HLXR voltage and current Version C HLXC to HLXR Voltage and Current Test e Version D or Later HLXC to HLXR Voltage and Current Test Connect the test equipment at both ends of the system and perform an end to end test between the chassis and the remote HLXR If the DS3 MUX protect module is installed e Execute Force APS commands through the Craft Interface e Perform Manual Force Switch to Protect test on 053 MUX module Perform APS test on 053 MUX module Coordinate the test with a technician located at the remote end of the circuit and ensure test procedures there have been completed Refer to the Soneplex Version D HLXR Remote System Operation and Maintenance Manual listed under Related Publications at the beginning of this manual At both ends of the circuit make any necessary cross connects at the distribution frames Log off from the Craft Interface system Complete assignment forms and update office records as required by local procedures 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc For Details Go To DLP 504 DLP 526 DLP 527 DLP 528 DLP 529 DLP 531 DLP 568 DLP 572 DLP 520 DLP 537 DLP 511 DLP 512 DLP 515 DLP 564 DLP 523 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 010 Page 1 of 2 DLX AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES Summary This procedure pr
346. ure each RLXIOR module in the Soneplex Broadband Loop Extender system Equip provision assign thresholds as required and assign service state 4 Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the R key to view and select the previous option An input field type means the user must type an entry in the field according to the parameters described A fixed field is locked and cannot be changed by the user Note Edits can be made in the configuration database in one of two ways 1 If the complete field is highlighted use the space bar to toggle forward or the key to reverse toggle through the options for that field 2 If only the first space or the field is highlighted type in the data that applies to that field Note Edits to the configuration database can be saved after each change in one of two ways 1 Press an arrow key and then Enter or Return once or 2 Press Enter or Return twice after all selections and entries are made in the screen but before leaving the screen Note Press CONTROL A for help information on moving around and editing fields Log on to the Craft Interface The Main Menu appears Use the arrow keys or number keys to select Unit Configuration from the Main Menu Press Enter or Return Use the arrow keys to select RLX Configuration from the Unit Configuration menu Press Enter or Return The RLX
347. us DLP 512 HDSL Equipped Circuit Cross Connects DLP 515 Glatt System LOGON ccc doe en dee eee ee Cae ee LC DLP 564 2 ca eg ae hm dd edd ae he a a ar ee ng ar ar eee ae ae DLP 523 continued 2 7 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance IXL 001 Page 4 of 4 TASK INDEX LIST continued Find Your Job in the List Below Then Go To DLX AND REMOTE SYSTEM END TO END TEST PROCEDURES NTP 010 Local ratto efc ausa Paca aua d ORA SURG EG d qub Eds DLP 504 Grat inteface LOGO 2 uacua ms ERN Ep PTS DLP 526 Alarm History Clearance Command e eye ye hem e woe e e Y OE eee eg DLP 527 Systemi gba aera i ober o osos bos o obe do e dob o ded a bon dod dedo os dos ba DLP 528 BSS MIX Cohfig l quot DLP 529 ish Rut oy oat at Sty apposta dopo DLP 532 DLX or RLX Equipped Circuit End To End Tests DLP 522 Eoo os COMMUN dea bor doin dos ber o d ost doa at a o db bd DLP 537 DSS MIX Forced Tesla aq ER IER I OR IRURE IER HENCE NON DLP 511
348. ve to the MUX Facility Alarms toggle fields Select CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR or EVENT for each field that you wish to change Note Default values are shown in Table 560 1 Reference 101 Alarm Troubleshooting 6 Assign the selections by pressing Enter or Return Stop You have completed this procedure 2 191 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 560 Page 2 of 2 DS3MUX ALARM LEVELS Equipment Alarms PROTECT COMM FAIL MINOR ility Alarms FORCE TO WORKING MINOR FORCE TO PROTECT MINOR APS LIMIT MINOR DS3 LOS MAJOR DS3 LOF MAJOR DS3 AIS MAJOR DS3 YELLOW MINOR DS3 IDLE MINOR DS3 LOOPED BACK MINOR Press CONTROL A For Assistance 6682 B Figure 560 1 053 MUX Alarm Levels Table 560 1 053 MUX Alarm Level Defaults CONDITION COMM FAIL PROTECT COMM FAIL DS3 FACILITY ALARMS ALARM TYPE DEFAULT CONDITION OFFLINE FORCE TO WORKING Event FORCE TO PROTECT Event APS LIMIT Event DS3 LOS Minor DS3 LOF Minor DS3 AIS Minor DS3 YELLOW Event DS3 IDLE Event DS3 LOOPED BACK Event 2 192 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 561 Page 1 of 3 0052 MODULE ALARM LEVEL SETTING Summary This procedure provides instructions for setting ODS2 Alarm Levels Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar
349. w speed modules can house Up to 14 ODS2 modules 7 working and 7 protect 28 HLXC modules 28 DLX modules 28 RLX modules or Any combination up to a maximum of 28 DS1 circuits 2 See Figure 501 2 to identify components and locations on the chassis backplane Stop You have completed this procedure HSW HSP MXW 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU LOW SPEED UNITS ooa Mmm 2 28 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 4 5 2 5 4 6 2 6 4 7 2 7 4 V 5915 B DS3 MUX RTAU UNITS MODULE Figure 501 1 Soneplex Broadband Chassis Front View 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc DLP 501 Page 2 of 2 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance S39V1d 9 q 3lHS 58 1 SLS 9 NI 2 0 ON waviv 9 sr 5 0000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 000000000000 0 2 29 6 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc Figure 501 2 Soneplex Broadband Chassis Backplane ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 502
350. ware can be downloaded to an MPU with Version 5 software When downloading to an MPU that is not running Version 5 software the MPU software version of the source MPU must match the software version of the destination MPU The following tools and equipment are required to perform this procedure Host computer system e 100 emulator program with XMODEM file transfer capability e MPU Version 5 application software e MPU hardware with Boot Code Version 2 0 or later e Straight through RS 232 cable for Craft port on MPU or null modem cable for Port 2 on chassis back panel Connect host computer to either the Craft port on the MPU or Port 2 on the chassis back panel Turn host computer power on Insert a diskette into the computer disk drive Log on to the Craft Interface system Perform the Configuration Upload command and transfer the configuration data to the host computer Replace the MPU or connect host computer to another MPU At the new MPU repeat Steps 4 and 5 then select the Execute Configuration Data Download command and transfer the configuration data from the host computer to the new MPU If additional operations are not required log off the Craft Interface 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc For Details Go To DLP 504 DLP 526 DLP 554 DLP 519 DLP 555 DLP 564 ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance NTP 009 Page 1 of 2 HLXC AND REMOTE SYSTEM E
351. when TBOS issues a command from command point 36 D2 B8ZS the module assigned to chassis group slot 1 3 sets B8ZS line code on DS1 signal number two Point 64 on the TBOS display is reserved Since the MPU module is used in both the Soneplex Loop Extender chassis and the Soneplex Broadband chassis some TBOS Scan and Command points apply only to modules used only in the Soneplex Broadband chassis such as the D53 MUX module The MPU scans both the local and remote modules for presentation of alarm and status data to TBOS On the TBOS scan displays active scan points are identified with a 1 Inactive points are shown by a 0 Commands issued from the Command Display affect any module installed in the chassis These TBOS commands perform the same function as the corresponding commands from the MPU Craft Interface Scan Displays Expanded The MPU provides eight Scan Displays one for the APU and MPU modules and seven for the transmission portion of the chassis Scan Display 1 shows conditions for the APU and MPU see Figure 104 1 Scan displays 2 through 8 provide scan points for chassis groups 1 through 7 respectively see Figure 104 2 Command Displays The MPU provides eight TBOS Command Displays for the chassis Each command display provides command points from which the TBOS operator can remotely provision the modules Command Display 1 shows command points for the APU and MPU see Figure 104 3 Command displays 2 through 8 p
352. with modules always place the modules on an electrically grounded approved anti static mat Note When using ODS2 modules in a group NEVER install other Soneplex modules RLX DLX or HLXC in any of the unused slots in the group 2 37 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 506 Page 2 of 5 10 11 2 38 The fibers should have been placed in the rack when the chassis was installed Route the fibers through the fiber management baffle into the top of the chassis to the ODS2 module locations Protective covers must be in place on the fiber connectors to prevent dust and damage to the connections The fibers should be tagged to identify the circuit and the transmission direction Select the ODS2 module If the module is not already installed remove the module from the protective ESD packaging If ODS2 module is installed remove it and inspect for physical damage Refer to Figure 506 1 for ODS2 module locations Then refer to Table 506 1 and your work order for slots to be used Working ODS2 modules are always installed in the top odd slots 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 and 7 1 Protection ODS2 modules are installed in the adjoining odd numbered slots 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 and 7 3 Reference TAD 106 Access Identifier Insert the working ODS2 module first Align the module with the slots and slide module into the chassis until the two fiber
353. y DIP switch settings on the printed circuit board of the MPU this could make the MPU incompatible with your Soneplex Broadband system Refer to Figure 502 1 for a drawing showing the MPU module slot in the chassis Align the edges of the printed circuit card with the card guides in the chassis Using the ejector push the MPU into the slot marked MPU located in the lower right corner of the chassis until it is firmly seated in the connector If there is excessive resistance remove the module and check for improper alignment or obstructions Use the screw to secure the MPU to chassis Refer to Figure 502 2 for a drawing of the MPU front panel Verify that STATUS indicator lights red then yellow and then remains green If STATUS indicator is not lit 1 e green check for A and B power at the connections on the backplane Reference DLP 508 48 VDC Power Supply Test 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 502 Page 2 of 2 7 is power at both of the connections A and B remove and replace the MPU with new one 8 If STATUS indicator is red this indicates an MPU hardware failure Remove and replace the MPU with a new one Stop You have completed this procedure HIGH SPEED UNITS LOW SPEED UNITS HSW MXW TAU 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 3 6 1 6 3 7 1 7 3 APU
354. y functional for Version A continued 2 118 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 534 Page 6 of 6 Table 534 1 RLX Configuration Fields continued FIELD TYPE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION DEFAULT DSO Channel Toggle for DSO Channel Version A blocking a channel causes all 15 Blank blocking or blank for pattern to be transmitted in both directions normal operation for on the channel each of the 24 DSO Version B blocking a channel causes the channels blocking pattern FFhex or 7Fhex set up via the onboard jumper to be transmitted in both directions Service State Toggle IS In Service Places facility in service and allows T1 alarm reporting by the MPU OOS Out Of Service Removes facility from service and stops alarm reporting by the MPU 2 119 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance DLP 535 Page 1 of 2 USER ACCOUNT EDITING Summary This procedure provides instructions to system administrators for editing user account names and passwords and for establishing privilege levels to regulate user access to various menus Note A toggle field type means the user can press the space bar to view and select the next option that is described or the user can press the key to view and select the previous option An input fi
355. ystem Maintenance menu select Upload Download Commands Press Enter or Return The Upload Download Commands menu is shown in Figure 554 2 Use the arrow keys to select Execute Configuration Data Upload from the Upload Download Commands menu Press Enter or Return The following message appears across the lower part of the screen Preparing To Upload Configuration Data From MPU Are You Sure y n Enable the Configuration Data Upload process by pressing Y for yes or cancel upload by pressing N for no On the host computer start the program sequence that will transfer the data Note Files must be transferred using the XMODEM protocol 7 Enter a name for the file that will contain the MPU configuration data Record the name assigned to the file and start the file transfer Note The file transfer will take several minutes There are times during the transfer 8 2 176 process when there are no signs of activity this is normal When upload is finished control is passed back to the System Maintenance menu Verify that no error message appears on the screen e If an error message does not appear Stop You have completed this procedure e If an error message does appears press any key and repeat Steps through 7 2000 ADC Telecommunications Inc ADCP 61 471 Issue 4 June 2000 Section 2 Operation and Maintenance SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Force APS Commands Reset LED Test Commands Execute ACO

Acer 4730 Laptop User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents